Home

Roland KR107 Musical Instrument User Manual

image

Contents

1. One Touch Prograt E ioe One Touch Program 1 e Press the One Touch Program Piano button A Piano screen like the one shown below will appear NERO Since this instrument faithfully reproduces real acoustic piano action and response keys played in the top one and one half octave range continue to resonate regardless of the damper pedal action and the tone in this range is audibly different The Key Transpose setting p 103 can also be used to change the range that ffected by the d When you press the One Touch Program Piano button the KR will switch to the O A RO following settings regardless of the current panel settings pedal e If the keyboard has been split into upper and lower sections p 31 the keyboard returns to a single section MEMO e The pedals return to their usual functions p 21 You can change the piano e The Grand Piano sound is automatically selected performance settings by touching lt Functions gt on the e The effect is automatically set to Sympathetic Resonance p 42 sen reno Changing the Piano Sound take a look at Changing the Settings for One Touch Piano Touch the piano lid on the screen and listen to the tone change as you slide your p 152 P finger or touch ES or to open and close the lid This simulates the actual changes in sound that occur when the lid of a grand piano MEMD is set at different h
2. LL huthm a 4 Touch a part s icon to switch the surround on and off ne ee Seu function is used refer to The sounds of parts set to ON are played from the external speaker and the KR s Setup Examples With Aux Set internal speaker Parts set to OFF are played only from the KR s speaker to Surround p 177 When you touch lt Exit gt the Surround effect is activated and you return to the previous screen NEP You can adjust the volume of 5 e Press the Surround button and watch the light go out the external and built in speakers p 37 Cancelling the Effect The Surround effect is eliminated and the effect is no longer applied to any of the parts 35 Chapter 1 Performance E Changing the Amount of Surround Accomp I 2 3 4 NEP Press the Surround button and watch the indicator light up You can use the Memory Backup function to store these Touch lt Surround Accomp gt to display the Surround Accomp screen settings to the KR p 164 Touch lt Options gt Touch the External and Internal sliders to adjust the volume levels of the external speaker and the KR s speaker The Surround Accomp Accompaniment volume is adjusted When you touch lt Exit gt you return to the Surround screen O Selecting the tone to which the effect is applied 36 With Keyboard in Surround set to On you can select the parts to which the surround
3. 2 Tone Search SSS Specify initial letter of keyword to search then touch lt Search gt Select the tupe of musical instrument and musical genre Touch here to switch these screens Searching by Conditions ME 3 e Touch lt Category gt or lt Genre gt then use the buttons and the dial to In condition search tones select the search conditions satisfying all of the selected search criteria are sought 4 Touch lt Search gt The search results appear in the display Touch the tone name to select the tone Touch lt Exit gt to return to the tone search screen Searching by Tone Name 3 Touch lt By Name gt Touch lt By Key gt to go to the condition search screen 4 Decide which character is to be used for the search The selected character appears in the middle of the screen Enter the character you re searching for For example touching lt ABC gt in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group A gt B gt C Touching lt A 0 gt selects the type of character Each time you touch lt A 0 gt the character switches between alphabets and numerals B e Touch lt Search gt The search results appear in the display Touch the tone name to select the Tone Touch lt Exit gt several times to return to the Basic screen or the previous screen 29 Chapter 1 Performance Performing with Two Sounds Layered Together Layer
4. 3D DISPLAY N TONE Switching the Screen of SONG the External Display Starting and Stopping Songs Selecting Previous and Following Songs O Muting the Sound E Using the Function O Assigned to the FUNC Button 11 Changing the Tempo of the Song and Automatic Accompaniment Roland NERO You can also switch the functions for the m Play Stop button the FUNC button and the TEMPO button Please refer to Changing the Functions of the Remote Control s Buttons p 167 86 Chapter 3 Song Playback Explanation This changes the vocals from the mic You can also use this to change vocals on the TRANSFORM CD included with the instrument The setting switches each time you press the button cycling through male female child and normal voice settings This adds harmonies to the mic vocals You can also add harmonies to vocals on the included CD i The harmony setting switches each time you press the button cycling through Music Files p 49 Oct Up p 46 Oct Down p 46 and normal voice settings off Surround Accompaniment and Surround Reverb Fo Ifaloppy isis nsned when you pres e bution the floppy slo MUTE ii maes lof the sounds The Moving Key function stops atthis time You can use the function assigned to this button You can also change the function FUNC assigned to the button p 167 CANCEL This restores the HARMONY and TRANSFORM
5. In addition to the items listed under IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS and USING THE UNIT SAFELY on pages 2 3 4 and 5 please read and observe the following Power Supply Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with any device that will generate line noise such as an electric motor or variable lighting system A batteries are supplied with the unit The life of this battery may be limited however since its primary purpose was to enable testing Before connecting this unit to other devices turn off the power to all units This will help prevent malfunctions and or damage to speakers or other devices Although the LCD and LEDs are switched off when the POWER switch is switched off this does not mean that the unit has been completely disconnected from the source of power If you need to turn off the power completely first turn off the POWER switch then unplug the power cord from the power outlet For this reason the outlet into which you choose to connect the power cord s plug should be one that is within easy reach and readily acces sible Placement Using the unit near power amplifiers or other equipment containing large power transformers may induce hum To alleviate the problem change the orientation of this unit or move it farther away from the source of inter ference This device may interfere with radio and television reception Do not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers
6. gt You can set the master tuning and make a variety of other settings to the instrument starting from the third page of Function Screen For more detailed information refer to Other Settings p 161 3 Touch the icon for the setting Refer to the corresponding page for each function A Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Piano screen 152 E Adjusting Resonance Resonance You can adjust this resonance Sympathetic Resonance when the damper pedal is depressed At Step 3 in Procedure p 152 touch lt Resonance gt SS Resonance gt of strings resonating sumpatheticallu when right pedal ts depressed Display Explanation Standard This replicates the resonance inside a piano The KR physically reproduces the vibration of other free strings when keys are played allowing you to experience the feeling of acoustic piano reverberation and resonance Physical Damper Simulation Advanced In addition to the effects of Advanced this also replicates the noise produced when you depress the pedal On the KR touch the lt Standard gt lt Advanced gt or lt Demo gt icon to choose the type of resonant sound Touch lt Level gt to adjust the amount of effect applied Touch t to deepen the effect When you touch o the effect is lessened gt The Resonance settings may change when you use the Transformer p 45 and Harmonist p 47 vocal effects g
7. p 62 hand Automatic Accompaniment lets you play with an orchestra even when performing alone What Are Music Styles Accompaniment patterns in various musical genres are called Music Styles There are many different kinds of music around the world and each has its own unique features What gives jazz or classical music their unmistakable sounds are a unique combination of elements like instrumentation melody and phrasing which interact to create the musical character Elements of Music Styles A Music Style consists of a set of six sections called divisions mo Phyedatthesttofasong Original The basic accompaniment pate 7 This is a one measure phrase inserted at a point where the Fill In To Original i ane mood changes and the accompaniment returns to the original This is a one measure phrase inserted at a point where the mood changes and the accompaniment moves ahead to the variation In addition Music Styles are built from Rhythm Bass Accompaniment 1 Fill In To Variation Accompaniment 2 and Accompaniment 3 58 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Performing Using Automatic Accompaniment One Touch Arranger Here s how to create the settings for Automatic Accompaniment TT id One Program e Press the One Touch Program Arranger button NEMP ou select an internal The Basic scree
8. 3 Touch lt Mute gt on the screen The Part you chose is only muted out in the Division you selected If you want to hear the muted out Part touch lt Mute gt again To mute out a Division that changes after a few seconds intro ending or fill in touch lt Mute gt immediately after switching to the Division A gt Q pe eee 117 0 145 09 da oO oes Q O lt U Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles O Editing the volume and effect settings for each Part Displaying the Part settings screen l At the Style Composer screen touch lt Options gt A screen like the one shown below appears settings to be changed The part name and Tone name are indicated in the upper part of the screen 3 Touch You can also change the values by touching each parameter name and then using the buttons and the dial Pressing the buttons simultaneously returns the parameter to its original value Display Explanation Adjusts the volume Reverb Adjusts the amount of reverb effect applied to the sound Chorus Adjusts the amount of chorus effect applied to the sound Changes the left right direction from which the sound appears to come When you touch J the sound moves to the right touch to move the sound to the left You can change the Tone for the selected Part by pressing a Tone button to change the Tone while this screen is displayed When selecting Rhythm Part
9. 5 e Touch lt Search gt The search results appear on the display Touch a Music Style name to select a Music Style Touch lt Exit gt several times to return to the Basic screen or the previous screen 64 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Playing Only Music Style Rhythm Patterns You can also play only the rhythm patterns of Music Styles Menu Record Playback Ong Touch Prograt viano rone Music Style 59 5 0 0 Om Pop Ballad Oldies Big Band Latin Trad Rock Acoustic Country Swing Gospel Kids One Touch Program 1 e Select a Music Style p 62 Some Music Styles do not 2 Press the One Touch Program Piano button include rhythm patterns When you select these Style The performance is set so that only the rhythm patterns are played patterns no rhythm patterns 3 e Press the Intro Ending button are played even when you l the left side of th The Rhythm part of accompaniment begins starting from the Intro i a ne eyboard Just as with regular Automatic Accompaniment you can add intros and endings by pressing the Intro Ending button and make changes to the rhythm patterns with the Fill In button p 69 Adjusting the Accompaniment Tempo Menu Record Playback Tempo When the Basic screen is displayed you can use the Tempo buttons or the buttons and the dial to ch
10. Auto Punch Punch in recording of the interval In Out between set markers Punch in recording starting from the point at which the pedal the Manual Performance Pad or the Rec Punch In Out button is pressed For more about Punch In Recording refer to p 133 Tempo You can add tempo changes to a P recorded composition See p 142 4 Touch lt Exit gt Returns to the Menu screen E Recording While Erasing the Previous Recording Replace Recording The recording process where previous material is erased as new material is recorded is called replace recording This setting is in effect when you turn on the power 1 In the Rec Mode screen p 131 select lt Replace gt Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Menu screen The KR is set to the replace recording mode Record the performance using the procedures described in Chapter 4 p 105 Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts 16 Track Sequencer p 127 E Layering a Recording Over Previously Recorded Sounds Mix Recording You can record a performance layered over a previously recorded performance This method is called Mix Recording 1 In the Rec Mode screen p 131 select lt Mix gt Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Menu screen Record the performance using the procedures described in Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons Redoing Recordings p 111 Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts 16
11. Bank Select MSB Sends Bank Select MSB messages p 175 Bank Select LSB Sends Bank Select LSB messages p 175 Sends Program Change messages Programu nange Program Numbers p 175 174 Making the Settings 1 Switch to the Basic screen or press the One Touch Program Piano button 2 Touch lt Functions gt 3 Touch lt MIDI Setting gt or lt Program Change gt item Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Functions screen E Selecting the Transmit Channel Tx Channel MIDI organizes things into channels which are numbered from 1 through 16 Simply connecting a cable is not enough for communication to take place The connected devices must be set to use the same MIDI channels Otherwise no sound will be produced and no sounds can be selected Select the transmit channel 1 16 of the KR The channel setting is at 1 when the KR is powered up If the keyboard has been split into right hand and left hand sections messages from the left hand section are fixed at 3 The KR receives messages on all channels from 1 through 16 E Disconnecting the Internal Sound Generator and Keyboard Local Control When connecting a MIDI sequencer set Local Control to OFF The setting is at Local Control ON when the KR is powered up As illustrated information describing what has been played on the keyboard is passed to the sound module over two different routes 1 and 2 As
12. F 3 Point IIT HET e qe Split Point Settings Range Suitable Suitable Tone Tempo Setting gt The key you chose for the split point belongs to the left hand section of the keyboard At Step 3 in Procedure p 155 touch lt Split Point gt Display Explanation gt Suitable The suitable tone The suitable tone for a Music Styleis Style is A L Bi Suitable The suitable tempo for a Music Style is Tempo selected automatically Other Other settings Style Orchestrator phrases Setting etc are changed automatically Touch either lt C3 gt lt F 3 gt lt C4 gt or lt F 4 gt in the lower part Touch each icon to switch individual settings on and off All items are set to ON when you turn on the power of the screen Thek Hosen ween ee Parameters switched to OFF highlighted in orange do not ni E rege arial neat change even when the Music Style is changed To set another key as the split point touch KE LA i the screen then specify the key You can set the split point within a range of B1 to B6 156 Chapter 9 Various Settings E Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads Pedal Setting User Functions You can assign a variety of functions to the left and center pedals and to the performance pads You can call up the assigned functions just by pressing the corresponding pedal or pad O Assigning Functions to Pedals At Step 3 Procedure p 155 touch
13. Variation This is a developmental accompaniment pattern It is a variation on an Original This is a one measure phrase inserted at a juncture where the mood changes It is used to make a song more lively Fill in To Variation This is a one measure phrase inserted at a juncture where the mood changes It is used to make a song more sedate Fill in To Original You can make a song more lively or more restrained by increasing or reducing played parts by Divisions You can also modify a song by changing the Tone of the parts in the Divisions Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles O Creating Styles in Auto Mode Points to note when creating songs e Use one of the major minor or diminished seventh chords to create the song We recommend using diminished seventh chords to compose the song e Itis convenient to record the sounds shown below for the Parts of the 16 track sequencer Rhythm D 10 gt When using parts other than Part 2 7 8 9 and D refer to Changing an Extracted Part p 148 Creating songs l Use the 16 track sequencer to record the song Record the song after referring to Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts 16 Track Sequencer p 127 and other related sections When using music data first select a song p 77 Displaying the Style Converter screen 2 Press the Menu button The Menu screen appears 3 Touch lt Style Converter gt If no song for use in crea
14. You can take the 36 User Programs saved to the User Program button and save them as a set to a floppy disk or to user memory When saving to a floppy disk first insert a floppy disk in the disk drive gt For more on working with the disk drive refer to Using Floppy Disks p 114 1 Press the User Program button 2 Touch lt File gt 3 Touch lt Save gt A Save User Program screen like the following appears Save User Prooran Giving a name fo a set of User Programs 4 Touch lt Rename gt The Rename screen appears When you touch the cursor moves When you touch the icon for the character to be input the character appears at the cursor position For example touching the lt ABC gt icon in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group A gt B gt C gt A Each touch of lt A a 0 gt cycles the type of characters through English upper case English lower case IN Mh numerals symbols then back to English upper case When you touch lt Del gt the character at the cursor position is deleted When you touch lt Ins gt a space is inserted at the cursor position 5 When you have finished with the name touch lt Exit gt 123 A gt Q pe moja 11 oO da oO sn o Le U Chapter 6 User Program Registration Determining the save destination 6 Touch lt
15. destination for the set of User Programs If a User Program name is displayed already a User Program saved to that number is already If you select a number with User Programs data and then copy data to that number the previously saved User Programs are deleted If you do not want to delete the saved User Programs select a number in the save destination column for which no name is displayed 7 Touch lt Execute gt The set of User Programs on the floppy disk is saved to user Memory Never turn off the power or eject the floppy disk from the disk drive while the operation is in progress Doing so will damage the KR s internal memory making it unusable 125 da oO sn Q Le U Chapter 6 User Program Registration E Coping Sets of User Programs Stored in the User Memory to Floppy Disks You can take User Program sets saved in user memory and copy them to floppy disks In this case in the Copy User Programs screen in Step 4 above touch the large arrow icon in the center to get the arrow to point up This sets the KR to copy the User Program set in the user memory to the floppy disk The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying sets of User Program set from disks to user memory Using the Pedal to Switch User Programs You can use the Pedal as a dedicated switch for selecting User Programs in order l Press the User Program button 2 Touch lt Option gt in the lo
16. previous screen Cancelling the effect 4 Press the Equalizer button and watch the indicator light go out The equalizer effect is cancelled O Storing the settings You can store adjusted equalizer settings to lt User gt Even after editing the settings you can touch lt User gt to call up your preferred settings Press the Equalizer button and watch the indicator light up The Equalizer screen appears Adjust the equalizer Touch lt Write gt The settings are stored Even after editing the settings you can touch lt User gt to select the stored settings 41 Chapter 1 Performance Applying Effects to the Sound Effects You can apply a wide range of different effects to the notes you play on the keyboard First press the Tone button to select a Tone p 27 The Tone selection screen appears Then touch lt Effects gt The Effect screen appears Applying effects to the sound 3 Touch lt ON gt The effect selected with lt Type gt will be applied Setting the Effect 4 3 Touch lt Type gt Touch lt Depth gt to adjust the amount of effect applied The amount increases as the value is raised You can also move the slider with the buttons and the dial Pressing the buttons simultaneously returns the slider to the initial value Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Tone selection screen Cancelling the Effect
17. 20 250 The metronome is automatically set to 108 when the power is turned on Pressing the and buttons simultaneously returns the selected song accompaniment to the basic tempo O Determining the tempo with tempo marks You can set the tempo by choosing a tempo indicator such as Allegro indicated on the score On the Metronome screen touch the tempo indicator bar graph The tempo is set to match the tempo mark O Changing the beat of the metronome 2 On the Metronome screen touch lt Beat gt The available choices for the beat appear at the bottom of the screen Choose the beat from among the selections by touching your choice You can scroll the display to one side or the other and show other choices for the beat by touching NERO You can also use the dial to adjust the tempo Turn it clockwise for a faster tempo or counterclockwise for a slower tempo NERO o When rae is selected only the upbeat will sound 53 Chapter 1 Performance O Changing the volume The volume of the metronome can be adjusted to ten different levels 1 e On the Metronome screen touch lt Volume gt The available choices for the volume level appear at the bottom of the screen 2 Touch the volume icon you ve selected the selection moves to the side allowing you to access other volume levels I E j Choosing X sets the volume to the lowest level and choosing X D
18. Fill In to Performs the same function as the Fill In Original To Original button p 69 A fill in is inserted but the accompaniment pattern after that doesn t change This plays a fill in half a measure long then switches to the Variation accompaniment pattern Half Fill In Variation This plays a fill in half a measure long then switches to the Original accompaniment pattern Original This changes the accompaniment pattern Variation without inserting a fill in When this function is used during Arranger Automatic Accompaniment the Reset accompaniment returns to the beginning of the Division p 58 Half Fill In Original Performs the same function as the Intro Ending button p 66 Intro 1 and Ending 1 are played Intro 1 Ending 1 Performs the same function as the Intro Ending button p 66 Intro 2 and Ending 2 are played Intro 2 Ending 2 6101dpu5 Arranger Performs the same function as the Start Start Stop Stop button p 66 Orchestrat This changes the accompaniment to a more or Up elavorate arrangement p 70 Orchestrat Changes the accompaniment to a simpler or Down arrangement p 70 Melody Turns the Melody Intelligence function on Intelligence and off p 72 157 oO da Q oes o Le lt U Chapter 9 Various Settings This starts Automatic Accompaniment with a fade in where the volume gets Fade In Out progressively louder ends
19. Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices such as cell phones are operated in the vicinity of this unit Such noise could occur when receiving or initi ating a call or while conversing Should you experience such problems you should relocate such wireless devices so they are at a greater distance from this unit or switch them off Observe the following when using the unit s floppy disk drive For further details refer to Before Using Floppy Disks p 7 e Do not place the unit near devices that produce a strong magnetic field e g loudspeakers e Install the unit on a solid level surface e Do not move the unit or subject it to vibration while the drive is operating Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight place it near devices that radiate heat leave it inside an enclosed vehicle or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes Also do not allow lighting devices that normally are used while their light source is very close to the unit such as a piano light or powerful spotlights to shine upon the same area of the unit for extended periods of time Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit e When moved from one location to another where the temperature and or humidity is very different water droplets condensation may form inside the unit Damage or malfunction may result if you attempt to use the unit in this condition Therefore before using the unit you must allow it to stand f
20. S 131 30 Nacka SWEDEN TEL 0 8 702 00 20 SWITZERLAND Roland Switzerland AG Landstrasse 5 Postfach CH 4452 Itingen SWITZERLAND TEL 061 927 8383 UKRAINE TIC TAC Mira Str 19 108 P O Box 180 295400 Munkachevo UKRAINE TEL 03131 414 40 UNITED KINGDOM Roland U K Ltd Atlantic Close Swansea Enterprise Park SWANSEA SA7 9FJ UNITED KINGDOM TEL 01792 702701 BAHRAIN Moon Stores No 16 Bab Al Bahrain Avenue P O Box 247 Manama 304 State of BAHRAIN TEL 211 005 CYPRUS Radex Sound Equipment Ltd 17 Diagorou Street Nicosia CYPRUS TEL 022 66 9426 IRAN MOCO INC No 41 Nike St Dr Shariyati Ave Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad Tehran IRAN TEL 021 285 4169 ISRAEL Halilit P Greenspoon amp Sons Ltd 8 Retzif Ha aliya Hashnya St Tel Aviv Yafo ISRAEL TEL 03 6823666 JORDAN AMMAN Trading Agency 245 Prince Mohammad St Amman 1118 JORDAN TEL 06 464 1200 KUWAIT EASA HUSAIN AL YOUSIFI amp SONS CO Abdullah Salem Street Safat KUWAIT TEL 243 6399 LEBANON Chahine S A L Gerge Zeidan St Chahine Bldg Achrafieh P O Box 16 5857 Beirut LEBANON TEL 01 20 1441 QATAR Al Emadi Co Badie Studio amp Stores P O Box 62 Doha QATAR TEL 4423 554 SAUDI ARABIA aDawliah Universal Electronics APL Corniche Road Aldossary Bldg 1st Floor Alkhobar SAUDI ARABIA P O Box 2154 Alkhobar 31952 SAUDI ARABIA TEL 03 898 2081 S
21. Sync Start On Off lt Accomp gt setting for Arranger Settings Arranger Configuration Style Orchestrator Division 200 Parameters Stored in Memory Backup Remembering the Settings Even When the Power is Turned Off Memory Backup p 164 Tone Parameters System Parameters Octave Shift Effects On Off Type Depth One Touch Piano Settings Lid Tuning Tuning Key Stretch Tunings Resonance Type Depth Key Touch String Resonance On Off Depth Hamper Response On Off Depth Metronome Sound Count In Measures Sound Countdown Sound Language Opening Message Touch Screen Track Assign Reverb On Off Type Depth Surround Off Accomp Reverb Surround On Off for each part various settings Aux Out Settings CD Volume Only instruments featuring the Moving Key function Master Volume Only instruments featuring the Moving Key function Moving Key On Off Only instruments fea turing the Moving Key function Remote Control s Setting Only instruments featuring the Moving Key function Music Files That the What Are Music Files Music Files contain information describing the details of a musical performance such as the C3 key on a keyboard was pressed for this amount of time using this amount of force By inserting the floppy disk into the disk drive on the KR the performance information is sent from the floppy disk to the piano and playe
22. You press the O Rec button and the following messages will appear when a song has already been recorded Do you want to record a new song or add on to the current song Add On IL NewSono Touch lt New Song gt This switches the KR to the settings required for recording a new song The KR is put in recording standby To cancel recording press the Rec button once more 4 Decide on the tempo Start recording 3 e Playa chord on the left hand part of the keyboard An Automatic Accompaniment intro starts and recording starts at the same time Stop recording 6 Press the Intro Ending button An ending plays then the Automatic Accompaniment and recording stop at the same time Listening to the recorded performance 7 e Press the ma Reset button then press the m Play Stop button The recorded performance plays back When you press the m Play Stop button playback stops 108 NERO If you select lt New Song gt when a song has already been recorded the OK to delete song prompt appears in the screen For more detailed information refer to If the following screen appears p 105 NERO You can change how recording is stopped when recording a performance with Automatic Accompaniment To learn how see Changing How Recording Stops p 112 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Track buttons assignments for recorded pe
23. buttons and the dial to correct the pitch or velocity If you want to delete the note touch lt Delete gt When you re done making all the settings touch lt Exit gt Return to the Song Edit screen 140 Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs E Modifying the Tone Changes in a Song PC Edit In some songs the instrument sound changes during the course of the song that is the Tone changes in the middle of a Part In such songs an instruction to switch the Tone is inserted at the place where you want the sound to change This instruction is called a Program Change PC and actions such as deleting program changes or changing the selected Tone by them are called PC editing It is not possible to insert a program change into a measure or beat that does not contain a program change At Step 3 of Selecting the editing function p 135 select lt PC Edit gt A screen like the one shown below appears R PC Edit Part 6 HEAD Y 001 01 000 END Location Tone name The PC location display uses Measure Beat Tick as the format A tick is a unit of time that s shorter than a beat Touch to select the part with the program change to be edited The Part number appears at the top of the screen Use the Bwd button and the gt gt Ewd button or use lt gt lt gt in the upper part of the screen to find the program change to be edited When you
24. Bar Chime Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Sticks Square Click Metronome Click Metronome Bell Std Kick 2 Std Kick 1 Side Stick Snare Drum 1 Hand Clap Snare Drum 2 Low Tom 2 Closed Hi hat 1 Low Tom 1 Pedal Hi hat 1 Mid Tom 2 Open Hi hat 1 Mid Tom 1 High Tom 2 Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibra slap Ride Cymbal 2 High Bongo Low Bongo Mute High Conga Open High Conga Low Conga High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Cabasa Maracas Short Hi Whistle Long Low Whistle EXC2 Short Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block Mute Cuica Open Cuica Mute Triangle Open Triangle Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo EXC7 EXC7 EXC1 EXC1 EXC1 EXC4 EXC4 EXC5 EXC5 EXC6 EXC6 BRUSH Set Bar Chime Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Sticks Square Click Metronome Click Metronome Bell Kick 2 Kick 1 Side Stick Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Low Tom 2 Closed Hi hat 2 Brush Low Tom 1 Pedal Hi hat 2 Brush Mid Tom 2 Open Hi hat 2 Brush Mid Tom 1 Brush Hi Tom 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Brush Hi Tom 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibra slap Ride Cymbal 2 High Bongo Low Bong
25. Dat Accent Bop Accent Thum Voice HollowReleas Choir Oohs VoiceAah Fem Choir Aahs Warm SqrPad New Age Pad Sugar Key LM PureLead LM Square JP SuperSaw Natural Lead 2600 SubOsc SquareWave2 Org Bells Oohs Chord Fantasia Crystal Harpvox CC Solo Vox Sweep Brightness Syn Square JP8 Square FM Lead FM Lead 2 Mg Lead Dual Sqr amp Saw P5 Saw Lead Rhythmic Saw Waspy Synth JP8 Pulse Cheese Saw SynVox Clear Bells Soft Crystal Digi Bells Nylon Harp Nylon Rhodes Fantasia 2 Soft Pad P5 Poly Reso Saw RAVE Vox Fat amp Perky Heaven Il JP8 Sqr Pad Sweep Pad 2 Converge Big Panner Ai yai a Echo Pan 2 Falling Down Poly King Octave Stack Warm Pad Rising Osc RandomEnding Piano 1 Piano 1w Piano 1d Piano 2 Piano 2w Piano 3 Piano 3w GS Honkytonk Honky tonk 2 GS E Piano1 GS E Piano2 60 s E Piano E Piano 1v E Piano 2v Detuned EP 1 Detuned EP 2 GS Harpsi Coupled Hps Harpsi w Harpsi o Soft Clav Celesta Glockenspiel Music Box Viberaphone Vibe w GS Marimba Marimba Xylophone Tubular bell Church Bell Carillon Santur Organ 1 Organ 2 Pop Organ Detuned Or 1 Detuned Or 2 Church Org 1 Church Org 2 Church Org 3 Full Organ 4 Jazz Organ Rock Organ 2 Reed Organ Accordion Fr Accordion It GS Harmonica Bandoneon GS Nylon Gt Nylon Guitar Nylon Gt o Ukulele Steel str Gt 12 str Gt Mandolin Jazz Guitar Hawaiian Clean Gt Chorus Gt Muted Gt Funk Gt Funk Gt 2 Overdrive Gt Distortio
26. E Setting the Type of CD To Be Played Back The KR may be unable to correctly recognize the type of CD being used In such instances you can specify the type of CD manually 1 Press the Menu button The Menu screen appears 2 Touch lt CD gt A screen like the one shown below appears fp 2 CO Data 3 Touch the lt CD Data gt CD Display Explanation Auto The CD type is detected automatically General CDs for Player Piano contain audio and MIDI data and the data format may vary from one CD to the next If the CD s data format does not match the KR s to select the type of settings a beep will sound Certain general Automatic Piano CDs may not be playable on the KR Commercial Audio CD CDs other than those designed for use with the piano player piano Note that certain commercially available CDs cannot be played back on the KR 4 Touch lt Exit gt to go back to the Menu screen A gt Q pe j 11 he 171 O da Q sjm Q Le U Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices You can connect the KR to external devices such as audio equipment MIDI instruments and computer O Connecting MIDI Devices p 172 You can connect a MIDI sequencer and record performance data from the KR or play performance data from the KR on the sequencer Also when you connect a MIDI sound module you can perform on the KR and hear the sounds played through the M
27. Mambo 2 Rhumba 2 ChaCha 1 ChaCha 2 Son Calypso Reggae Tango Plena Bomba Merengue Slow Beguine Beguine Latin Pop Latin Asian Rhumba Trad Kids Raindrops Music Hall Slow Waltz Kids Shuffle Kids Kids Dance Broadway Stage Waltz Fast Waltz Little Steps Parade MarchingBand Polka March Irish Tejano Celtic Circus Party Waltz Vienna Waltz Musette Scotland Japan Ireland Festival Cinema WesternMovie Balloon Trip Blacks White SFX Movie Western Screen Fanfare Waltzing SimpleMarch1 SimpleMarch2 Simple Waltz Kids 4 4 Kids 6 8 Lullaby 4 4 Music Box gt o E 0 3 a A O w 193 N 0 O Q Q Q lt 0 symbol Indicates the constituent note of chords x symbol Chord shown with an can be played by pressing just the key marked with the x p 60 194 C C D Eb E F Cmaj7 C maj7 Dmaj7 Eb maj7 Emaj7 Fmaj7 AO HEE AH EELEE AN CAE EEE LH LEELEE YT LTS I lt C7 CH7 D7 Eb 7 E7 F7 ee LEELEE LEN LEET EE UCT ed et Cm C m Dm Ebm Em Fm ALMUEN EE ETHTH UREAN LPL PCT PT LEEREN LTTE AT Cm7 C m7 Dm7 Eb m7 Em7 Fm7 IDET CET LEE er CETTE Les ees LPR Cdim C dim Ddim Ebdim Edim Fdim ACUERDA EEEE Uist PITT EELER LEN LEE MELEE PP TAS E Cm7 b5 C m7 b5 Dm7 b5 Ebm7 b5 Em7 b5 Fm7 b5 ATEEN EERME LITEN Cee ALETLE SCTE UT Caug C aug Daug Eb aug Eaug Faug CUATES UPLETEN EELEE EE ELETEN PPE EE Csus4 C sus4 Dsus4 Eb sus4 Esus4
28. Once you re familiar with the song practice it a number of times along with the example 1 e Touch lt Reference gt When the Message screen appears touch lt Close gt 2 Touch lt gt on the screen The example performance is played back Touch lt lt q gt or lt gt gt gt to rewind or fast forward within the practice range Touch lt H gt to return to the beginning of the practice range 92 Chapter 4 Practice Functions Touch the Notes When you touch a note on the Practice screen the KR plays that note When you trace along the displayed score with your finger the KR plays the traced segment One Hote One Note a One Note When you touch lt amp gt the KR plays the note currently indicated by the bouncing ball When you touch lt gt or lt Il gt you can return or advance one note at a time to check the notes gt On instruments equipped with the Automatic Keyboard function the automatic keyboard will move Recording Your Performance 3 4 Once you are able to play the song try recording your own performance Touch lt Rec gt When the Message screen appears touch lt Close gt Touch lt O gt on the screen You ll hear a count and recording begins Play along with the accompaniment Checking Your Performance 5 6 Compare your recorded performance with the example Touch lt Check gt When the Message screen ap
29. Program Chano 175 Protect nario 114 PU PiekUp Pautas 113 Punch ECOL motores eeir i E torcida 133 Q Quantize Song Edit main 137 Quick Tour Automatica ll Sarandon 166 R Res Modena o a ta 112 130 Record Playback Buttons sitiada ds sais 78 Recording ai 105 T6 Track Sequencer nacio 129 E 106 PIGS WUNA SOND an 110 Redoing Tecos lo 111 Track DUONG stato 111 With Accompaniment nn 108 Remote Control ccccccsseccscccesccesccessscessccesseees 85 86 167 Repertorio 102 Replace Recording seriada dl 131 Replace 88 Reser Daton cada diia 78 207 Index RESON anoe sora oA E 152 Restoring the Factory Settings oomcccoononononnannnonannnonacononacoso 165 A a ATAO 33 ReverbDuton sr darlas 33 RAiN OONN 56 DEAT tds 56 VOE esana a T A A 57 Rth Dili arde dir 56 lg A e A 92 Rhythni Pattern List posen nd in 199 Rieht hand Tomes scisiscnsendisincnoaasma devas a EE ERE A DEA 30 ROOE NOE sarson EAA 60 Rotary CEC Cbs obre n T TE 158 S SAVE dt iio 116 Compatible a 118 Userotlennin dad 149 O 88 Davie as mace data sold das 91 DOLHIN a EA AEA A E ETEA E T EA 90 Score Display DURON aaea dci 88 Secre Display Dutton tati dis QS 8 74 Screens 16 track Sequencer screen scecsescccesserecesssesesessees 127 Advanced ID Screen sinmedi iaa N 38 Basic SCEO A CZ 24 59 Chord Sequencer Screen oomocccoooocanecononanononsanccnoncanaconss 134 Copy SONS a i 120 Copy Silesia 151 Copy User Programs screen cssssccsesseeccsesee
30. lt OK gt All of the content in the user memory is deleted If you touch lt Cancel gt the deletion is cancelled and you re returned to the previous screen Never turn off the power while the display indicates lt Executing gt Doing so will damage the KR s internal memory making it unusable gt Carrying out this operation does not initialize any settings other than the user memory settings To restore settings other than those for the user memory to the original factory settings carry out Factory Reset p 165 Automatically Starting the Quick Tour You can set the instrument so that the Quick Tour starts automatically with no operation required 1 Hold down the Wonderland Game button and press the Part Balance button The Quick Tour screen appears 2 Touch lt Option gt Auto Start Settino 3 d Ueno starts after a few minutes of inactivity Touch tcon tn screen to start the demo 166 3 Touch lt ON gt or lt OFF gt When set to ON the Quick Tour starts when you turn on the power The demo stops as soon as you carry out any kind of operation If no operation is performed for 5 10 minutes after that the automatic demo starts again When set to OFF the Quick Tour does not start unless you touch the Quick Tour screen icon 4 Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Quick Tour screen gt This setting is saved even after the power is turned off For
31. p 52 gt You can t change a song s beat once it s been recorded If you want to compose a song whose beat changes partway through the song take a look at Changing the Beat in the Middle of a Song Beat Map p 141 A gt Q pe j 11 N 5 Press the Tempo and buttons to set the basic tempo of the song If you do not need the metronome sound press the Metronome button once more gt When using song data that has already been recorded the recording is made using the source song s basic tempo To change the basic tempo of a song please refer to Changing the Tempo of Recorded Songs p 142 129 N da Q les Q Le U Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs O Step 2 Start Recording If necessary choose a recording method For more on how to record refer to p 130 If you record for the first time there s no need to select the recording method Selecting the Part to Record 1 Display the 16 track Sequencer screen p 127 2 Touch the number for the Part you want to record The button for the touched part being set turns orange You can only record drum sounds or effect sounds on Part D 10 or Part S 11 You can select drum sets or effect sounds by selecting Part D 10 or Part S 11 and touching lt Drum Set gt Selecting the sound to play 3 Use the Tone buttons to choose a Tone to play After selecting a Tone touch lt Exit gt to call up t
32. s speakers p 176 3 Output jacks Main These jacks can be connected to your audio system to enjoy more powerful sound They can also be connected to a tape recorder or similar device in order to record your performance on a cassette tape p 176 4 Output jacks Aux You can connect an amp or external speaker to the Aux jack and play the accompaniment and reverb sounds through it p 35 5 Expression Pedal jack You can connect an expression pedal to the KR Bottom Panel Front Left Bottom Panel Front Right GAS omar SZ Mic Volume Min 12 SS O 13 11 Phones jacks A set of headphones can be connected here p 22 12 Mic In jack Used for connecting microphones p 22 13 Mic Volume knob Adjusts the volume level for the microphone p 22 14 Computer R L Mono Main Ext Display 00000 00000 00000 10 6 Pedal connector Connect the pedal cable of the stand to this connector p 20 7 MIDI Out In connectors These can be connected to an external MIDI device to exchange performance data p 172 8 Computer connector You can connect a computer to this connector to exchange performance data p 178 9 Computer switch The setting for this switch made depending on the computer connected Mac PC 1 PC 2 Switches the connections for the MIDI connectors and the computer port p 178 You can t use the MIDI Out In connector and th
33. sets it to the highest level Choose Corr to silence the metronome sound O Changing the Type of Sound You can change the sound the metronome makes The setting is at normal metronome sound when the KR is powered up 1 e On the Metronome screen touch lt Sound gt The available choices for the type of sound appear at the bottom of the screen 2 Touch one of the items in the group to select a metronome sound Normal metronome Electronic metronome sound sound 1 2 3 in Japanese 1 2 3 in English Dog and cat sounds Wood block Triangle and castanet Hand clap 34 Chapter 1 Performance O Changing the Animation A metronome that moves along with the tempo is usually displayed at the center of the Metronome screen You can change that picture to an animated bouncing ball or other animation 1 e On the Metronome screen touch the lt Type gt The animation type will change Each time you touch the icon the animation switches between Metronome Dr KR and Bouncing Ball O Changing how the metronome beat pattern sounds You can set the Metronome to play at even smaller intervals 1 e On the Metronome screen touch lt Pattern gt The available choices for the metronome pattern appear at the bottom of the screen 2 Choose a pattern by touching your choice You can scroll the display to one side or the other and show other pattern choices by touching Displaye
34. you can touch lt Drum Set gt to select the drum set or effect sound Finishing the settings 4 Touch lt Exit gt The Style Composer screen appears 146 for each parameter to change the value E Creating a Style from a Song You Composed Yourself Style Converter You can take a song you ve composed yourself and extract the portions you need to create your own original Style When you re composing a song there s no need to specify all the chords You can specify some of the chords and the KR automatically chooses the other chords and arranges the style This function is called the Style Converter Style Converter features an Auto mode that allows you to easily create Styles from songs with a single chord and a Manual mode in which you create Styles from songs with three kinds of chords major minor and seventh chords When creating a song in order to create an music style it s good practice to consider the arrangement of the music style Style Arrangements A Music Style is made up of five performance parts Rhythm Bass Accompaniment 1 Accompaniment 2 and Accompaniment 3 A song progresses in predictable a sequence such as intro melody A melody B bridge and ending With the KR such changes in songs are allocated to the following six performance states We call these six parts of a song Divisions CO ON ES otal Mi compas te
35. 14 Tops Plis 18 TOP CS AS aired a easease 18 Touch Screen cds 24 165 ouch the Notes 420 ewes eh ee ee 89 93 Traci Asi taa 170 A A te den dete Steet tee acct 99 107 109 TEAM anced bears cece eee ana Reeves 45 Trane DOSE eriari 103 Transpose Gone Ca nos 139 Transposel button ia a 103 THOU IESHOOUING alitas dc 180 SEAT AAT cect can she ania su otas eto E te newaltnetaeuigad 153 Tunne A e ea na i dseansad a 153 TUTOE eatarra E O 92 TUTON screen saratie a a Ri 92 TecChannel sisas dona 174 QS refers to the page number in Quick Start U Undo Sons Edil astas 136 User PUN CHONS stars 157 User Image Display acsesattantsrtbunsenatacsin bia tasbhasetaunveneaaat 163 User Menor ia 149 Formateo dins 165 UserTrostadda diras 122 caline p srein a n aAA 123 COP VAIS SEN E SA 125 Deleting regea le 125 A A E A 124 Register ai 122 DIVINE EOE 123 Transmitting PC Numbers seeseseeeserererererererereseseseees 126 User DIVE sol T 63 144 COPY At adi 151 Dele mE ai 150 SAVE iia 149 V WAT IA nOs on 58 Variatio DUO 69 Vocal COMME Ss oi nes debeas aice ves tatneedenscens 48 Vocal Edel alta 43 Vocal Ettect button ai totale E E EE 43 Vocal Keyboard sitas dois dns 48 Vocal Tap temporaria 97 Volume GD rie E ET O N A ET 87 Metronome naaa aaa 54 Microphone a 22 A A E E E E O S 22 A tee a Waltatnlnoveoutudnmnn sie 57 Votime Knobinlcand diia ld dias 22 W Wonderland adas QS5 X AS MO atada 201 209 Information EGYPT Al
36. 1996 Roland Corporation 1995 Roland Corporation 1995 Roland Corporation 1995 Roland Corporation 1995 Roland Corporation 1995 Roland Corporation 1995 Roland Corporation 1995 Roland Corporation 1995 Roland Corporation 1995 Roland Corporation 1995 Roland Corporation 1999 Roland Corporation 1999 Roland Corporation 1999 Roland Corporation 1999 Roland Corporation 1999 Roland Corporation 1999 Roland Corporation 1999 Roland Corporation 1999 Roland Corporation The Hunt O 1999 Roland Corporation TenderFlower O 1999 Roland Corporation Shepherdess O 1999 Roland Corporation Farewell O 1999 Roland Corporation Consolation O 1999 Roland Corporation AustrianDance O 1999 Roland Corporation Ballad O 1999 Roland Corporation Sighing O 1999 Roland Corporation Chatterbox O 1999 Roland Corporation Restlessness O 1999 Roland Corporation Ave Maria O 1999 Roland Corporation Tarantella O 1999 Roland Corporation AngelHarmony O 1999 Roland Corporation Gondola Song O 1999 Roland Corporation The Return O 1999 Roland Corporation The Swallow O 1999 Roland Corporation KnightErrant O 1999 Roland Corporation Invention 1 O 2000 Roland Corporation Invention 2 O 2000 Roland Corporation Invention 3 O 2000 Roland Corporation Invention 4 O 2000 Roland Corporation Invention 5 O 2000 Roland Corporation Invention 6 O 2000 Roland Corporation Invention 7 O 2000 Roland Corporation Invention 8 O 2000 Roland Corporati
37. 3 of Selecting the editing function p 135 select lt Copy gt For more about ordinary copying please refer to Copying Measures Copy p 136 Select Rhythm Pattern as the lt Src gt This makes the setting for copying a built in Rhythm Pattern e The atin pattern s name and beat are indicated in the lt From gt column e The lt Dst gt is fixed at Part 10 e When the lt Src gt is switched to something other than Rhythm Pattern the KR is set to carry out normal copying Press the m Play Stop button to play back and confirm the rhythm pattern The rhythm pattern stops when you press the m Play Stop button once more E Correcting Timing Discrepancies Quantize You can correct for timing discrepancies in a recorded performance by automatically aligning the music with the timing you specify This is called Quantizing As an example let s say that the timing of some quarter notes in a performance is a little off In this case you can quantize the performance with quarter note timing thus making the timing accurate Example Quarter note resolution ld 1 2 Actual note data 3 Note data after quantization Example Sixteenth note resolution Actual note data ES E EE ita Note data after quantization 7 j J At Step 3 of Selecting the editing function p 135 select lt Quantize gt A screen like the on
38. 32 A aoe ene eas ee eee ee 93 One Touch Program Arranger button ooooocccccnnnnccnnnnnns 59 One Touch Program Piano button oooorocccnnccannnnnononos 26 One TOUCH Sens 156 Onie Fouchv Arran Ger a led 99 Sete S aia 155 OneTouch ANO eira cee S Aa 26 Ss O AN a caer 152 Openine Message eu 162 O QS 14 Oreinak il iiici 58 Original Ditto ina id ia 69 Output Aux JACKS tasas iii 176 OPU aC kS veie 176 QED ULE JACKS AUX bie 14 P Panel A A 166 Part Balance sonreir a a TRO a easoee eens 75 Fart Balance DUTON seal 75 Part Exchange Sons Edit aspror a a 140 PC Edt GONS Edit iiaii is 141 Pede a E E cee 21 Pedal Cable A N Zi Pedal connector sita oia 21 Peda EX nt a aid QS 14 QS refers to the page number in Quick Start Pedal Setanes forera r n ETNE 157 Percus toi mrenea a teaver ane noua anes 28 Performance Pad si dos 70 71 157 Phones jacket 22 A A ES E E E PE E E E ts 71 Phrase DURO tati 71 ETET ALS AEE A E EE A E E E 26 Piano cree i A 24 lata ET e E OA O E E E AENT EE E 113 PHOS inae eE E E EEE 90 Play Mod Ersem aE 169 Play Stop DU OD ee a AN 78 84 Payne RN 77 Allot the internal SONES vit ds 78 At a fixed tempo Tempo Mute sssssesssssseseeressseeressses 97 rondo aira sia tenet oat aiid Aeon ciate Mnas tanseoe 78 Repeal ias 102 DONE A o A 83 Song on floppy disk virilidad 11 Power Ona dE seattle 21 Row er SWitch ai 21 Practice PUMCHON aparatito 92 PS ose EE E E E theives bors E E 62
39. 6324170 KOREA Cosmos Corporation 1461 9 Seocho Dong Seocho Ku Seoul KOREA TEL 02 3486 8855 MALAYSIA BENTLEY MUSIC SDN BHD 140 amp 142 Jalan Bukit Bintang 55100 Kuala Lumpur MALAYSIA TEL 03 2144 3333 When you need repair service call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as shown below PHILIPPINES G A Yupangco amp Co Inc 339 Gil J Puyat Avenue Makati Metro Manila 1200 PHILIPPINES TEL 02 899 9801 SINGAPORE Swee Lee Company 150 Sims Drive SINGAPORE 387381 TEL 6846 3676 CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE LTD Blk 3014 Bedok Industrial Park E 02 2148 SINGAPORE 489980 TEL 6243 9555 TAIWAN ROLAND TAIWAN ENTERPRISE CO LTD Room 5 9fl No 112 Chung Shan N Road Sec 2 Taipei TAIWAN R O C TEL 02 2561 3339 THAILAND Theera Music Co Ltd 330 Verng NakornKasem Soi 2 Bangkok 10100 THAILAND TEL 02 2248821 VIETNAM Saigon Music Suite DP 8 40 Ba Huyen Thanh Quan Street Hochiminh City VIETNAM TEL 08 930 1969 AUSTRALIA NEW ZEALAND AUSTRALIA NEW ZEALAND Roland Corporation Australia Pty Ltd 38 Campbell Avenue Dee Why West NSW 2099 AUSTRALIA For Australia Tel 02 9982 8266 For New Zealand Tel 09 3098 715 CENTRAL LATIN AMERICA ARGENTINA Instrumentos Musicales S A Av Santa Fe 2055 1123 Buenos Aires ARGENTINA TEL 011 4508 2700 BARBADOS A amp B Music Supplies LTD 12 Webster Indu
40. 8 Creating Music Styles 7 Touch j to select the save destination number If a Style name is displayed a style is already saved to that number If you select a number with a previously saved User Style and then save to that number the previously saved User Style is deleted If you do not want to delete the User Style being saved select a number in the save destination column that does not yet have a name Touch lt Save gt The saving process starts Never turn off the power while the operation is in progress Doing so will damage the KR s internal memory making it unusable 150 E Deleting Saved User Styles This deletes User Styles that have been saved to floppy disks or in user memory When deleting a User Style on a floppy disk first insert the floppy disk in the disk drive 2 3 4 Press the Music Style User button A User Style screen appears If the User Style screen is not displayed touch lt User Disk gt in the lower part of the screen Touch lt File gt Touch lt Delete gt A Delete Style screen like the following appears Delete Style SSE Disk _ as Touch lt Disk gt or lt User gt Touch lt User gt if you are deleting a file from user memory touch lt Disk gt if you are deleting a file from a floppy disk Touch to select the Style to be deleted Touch lt Delete gt A screen like the one shown below appears OK to del
41. Disk gt or lt User gt Touch lt Disk gt if you are saving to a floppy disk touch lt User gt if you are saving to user memory 7 Touch to select the save destination User Program number If a User Program set name is displayed a User Program set saved to that saved to that number is already If you select a number with previously saved User Program set data then save a new set of data to that same number the older User Program set will be deleted If you don t want to lose any previously saved User Programs select a number in the save destination column that does not yet have a name Save 8 Touch lt Save gt to begin the save Touch lt Exit gt to return to the User Program File screen Never turn off the power or eject the floppy disk from the disk drive while the operation is in progress Doing so will damage the KR s internal memory making it unusable gt When clearing the set of saved User Programs refer to Deleting Saved User Program Sets p 125 124 E Loading Saved User Program Sets User Programs that have been saved on floppy disks or in user memory can be called up on an individual set basis to the User Program button Note that calling up these User Programs results in the deletion of all User Programs currently recorded to the User Program button When loading a set of User Programs from a floppy disk first insert the floppy disk in the disk drive gt For
42. Dog Horse Gallop Bird 2 Telephone 1 Telephone 2 DoorCreaking Door Scratch Windchime Helicopter Car Engine Car Stop Car Pass Car Crash Siren Train Jetplane Starship Burst Noise Applause Laughing Screaming Punch Heart Beat Footsteps Gun Shot Machine Gun Lasergun Explosion Piano 1 Piano 2 Piano 3 Honky tonk E Piano 1 E Piano 2 Harpsichord Clav Celesta Glocken Music Box Vibraphone Marimba Xylophone Tubularbell Santur Organ 1 Organ 2 Pop Organ 1 Rock Organ2 ChurchOrg 1 Reed Organ AccordionFr Harmonica Bandoneon Nylon strGt Steel strGt Jazz Guitar Clean Gt Muted Gt Funk Gt OverdriveGt Dist Guitar Gt Harmo Acoustic Bs Fingered Bs Picked Bs Fretless Bs Slap Bass 1 Slap Bass 2 SynthBass 1 SynthBass 2 Rubber Bass Violin Viola Cello Contrabass Tremolo Str Pizzicato Harp Timpani Strings SlowStrings Syn Str 1 Syn Str 2 Choir Aahs Pop Voice SynVox Orche Hit Trumpet Trombone Tuba M Trumpet FrenchHorns Brass 1 SynthBrass1 SynthBrass2 A Brass 1 Soprano Sax Alto Sax Tenor Sax BaritoneSax Oboe EnglishHorn Bassoon Clarinet Piccolo Flute Recorder Tone List Pan Flute Bottle Blow Shakuhachi Whistle Ocarina Square Wave Saw Wave Doctor Solo SynCalliope ChifferLead Charang Solo Vox 5th SawWave Bass amp Lead Fantasia Warm Pad Polysynth Space Voice Bowed Glass M
43. ENIN EN 22 Connectne a Microphone Sonata is 22 Connecting an External Display oonciniiconicnncnnonicnccncanccncancancnncnos 23 Making the Connections ninia 23 Aboutthe Touch TO ita 24 Adjusting the Contrast of the Screen ooocncicnncnonionicnnnonncnnnncnn no 24 Mant A A 24 Pano o eeir a A E E T 24 BASIC CT COINS csi i 24 Usme the Man on athe E attri 25 Chapter 1 Performan e c cscecesseeseeeseeseeeeenees 26 Playing the Keyboard Like a Piano One Touch Piano 26 Performing with a Variety of Tones Tone Buttons 0 27 Playing Percussion Instruments or Sound Effects 28 Using Keywords to Search for Tones Tone Search 29 Performing with Two Sounds Layered Together Layer 30 Playing Different Tones with the Left and Right Hands Split 31 Shifting the Keyboard Pitch in Octave Steps Octave Shift 32 Adding Reverberation to the Sound Reverb 33 Adding a Surround Sound to the Accompaniment and Reverb SUMPOUNNIG nat T T O 35 Giving More Breadth to the Accompaniment Sound 35 Changing the Amount of Surround Accomp eocccccocccnonncnnnnnnnono 36 Broadening the Reverb Sound oococcnncnnnncnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnanonanacnnonos 37 Changing the Amount of Surround Reverb cc eee 37 Adding Three Dimensional Breadth to the Sounds You Play Advanced o Diesin e A AE A 38 Adjusting the Sound to Achieve the Preferred Tone Quality Equalize
44. External Display External Display p 163 Low hum coming from external device Do you have different external devices plugged into different power outlets When connecting external devices always draw power from the same outlet No sound is heard No sound is heard No sound is heard when a MIDI instrument is connected You cannot use a connected MIDI device and computer simultaneously No sound is heard when the keyboard is played Not all played notes are sounded Is the volume level of the KR p 22 or connected device turned all the way down Are headphones plugged in p 22 Has the Balance knob been moved all the way to the right or left Has the volume been set to 0 using the Part Balance p 75 Are all sliders in the Equalizer screen at the minimum level p 40 Has the footage been adjusted so that all frequency components aren t sounded p 15 in the Quick Start Have all devices been switched on Are the MIDI cables connected correctly p 173 Does the MIDI channel match the connected instrument p 174 Is the Computer switch on the bottom of the KR set to MIDI p 178 The MIDI connectors and the computer connector cannot be used at the same time Confirm that the computer switch is set to MIDI when a MIDI device is connected to the MIDI connector and to either MAC PC 1 PC 2 when a computer is connected to the C
45. F W I TEL 596 596 715222 MEXICO Casa Veerkamp s a de c v Av Toluca No 323 Col Olivar de los Padres 01780 Mexico D F MEXICO TEL 55 5668 6699 NICARAGUA Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Nicaragua Altamira D Este Calle Principal de la Farmacia 5ta Avenida 1 Cuadra al Lago 503 Managua Nicaragua TEL 505 277 2557 PANAMA SUPRO MUNDIAL S A Boulevard Andrews Albrook Panama City REP DE PANAMA TEL 315 0101 PARAGUAY Distribuidora De Instrumentos Musicales J E Olear y ESQ Manduvira Asuncion PARAGUAY TEL 595 21 492147 PERU Audionet Distribuciones Musicales SAC Juan Fanning 530 Miraflores Lima Peru TEL 511 4461388 TRINIDAD AMR Ltd Ground Floor Maritime Plaza Barataria Trinidad W I TEL 868 638 6385 URUGUAY Todo Musica S A Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771 C P 11 800 Montevideo URUGUAY TEL 02 924 2335 VENEZUELA Instrumentos Musicales Allegro C A Av las industrias edf Guitar import 7 zona Industrial de Turumo Caracas Venezuela TEL 212 244 1122 AUSTRIA Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH Austrian Office Eduard Bodem Gasse 8 A 6020 Innsbruck AUSTRIA TEL 0512 26 44 260 BELGIUM FRANCE HOLLAND LUXEMBOURG Roland Central Europe N V Houtstraat 3 B 2260 Oevel Westerlo BELGIUM TEL 014 575811 CZECH REP K AUDIO Kardasovska 626 CZ 198 00 Praha 9 CZECH REP TEL 2 666 10529 DENMARK Roland Scandinavia
46. Fsus4 ALEN EEEH UAE COCA LALE EN OPE LAE C7sus4 C 7sus4 D7sus4 Eb 7sus4 E7sus4 F7sus4 ATADO EELEE LEERLO OP LETY LYE COE EET LIY C6 C 6 D6 Eb6 E6 F6 per EE CEES TTLIL Let Pel ITS Dt COS OPT Lotte C m6 Ebm6 Em6 Fm6 Chord List 0 symbol Indicates the constituent note of chords x symbol Chord shown with an can be played by pressing just the key marked with the x p 60 F maj7 Gmaj7 Abmaj7 Amaj7 F 7 F m Gm Bb maj7 Bb m Bmaj7 B7 ae in iaren n START PER Bm F m7 Gm7 i F dim Gdim Abdim Adim Bb m7 Bm7 EUEN Les IT Bb dim Bdim PUTT TERE CAN ATA LO CD CEPT Pitt CEEE et F m7 b5 Gm7 b5 Abm7 b5 Am7 b5 F aug Gaug Abaug Aaug F sus4 Gsus4 Absus4 Asus4 F 7sus4 G7sus4 Ab7sus4 A7sus4 Bb m7 b5 Bm7 b5 SU Fa A Bb aug Bb sus4 Bb 7sus4 Baug Bsus4 B7sus4 CIA A ELEELE CPE tr LAN COPE Ty Oe F 6 Ab6 A6 Bb6 B6 WREE E ATAR PETES PATATA F m6 Abm6 Bbm6 EN PECADO CEPA CPC CUANDO CUTE 195 gt o 7 0 3 a A O w Internal Song List Folks Annie Laurie 1993 Roland Corporation Londonderry Air 1993 Roland Corporation AmazingGrace 1993 Roland Corporation Ave Maria 1993 Roland Corporation Clock 1998 Roland Corporation Entertainer 1994 Roland Corporation Greensleeves 1993 Roland Corporation Hallelujah 1993 Roland Corporation Jingle Bells 1998 Roland Corporation Les patine
47. KRN e E lt Keyboard gt Keyboard 88 keys Progressive hammer action keyboard with escapement Touch Sensitivity 100 levels Keyboard Mode Moving Key Yes lt Sound Generator gt Conforms to GM2 GS XG Lite Max Polyphony Whole Split adjustable split point Layer Arranger Piano Style Arranger Manual Drums SFX 128 voices Tones Tone Search by terms and by letters 6 groups 691 variations including 16 drum sets 2 SFX sets Temperament 8 types selectable tonic Stretched Tuning 2 types Master Tuning 415 3 Hz 466 2 Hz adjustable in increments of 0 1 Hz Transpose Key Transpose 6 5 in units of semitone Playback Transpose 24 24 in units of semitone Reverb 16 types 127 levels Chorus 8 types 127 levels Sympathetic Resonance Rotary and 45 other types Advanced 3D with Surround Physical Damper Simulation Advanced Resonance 5 bands Master level lt Arranger gt Music Styles Style Search 6 groups 231 styles x 4 types Style 22 les x 4 l h Music Assistant Search by terms and by letters Over 140 sets x 4 presets Programmable Music Styles Melody Intelligence 24 types Start Stop Intro Ending 2 types for each style Sync Start Fill In Variation Original Arranger Reset Countdown Count in Melody Intelligence Break Leading Bass No Chord Fade in Fade out Half Fill In Style Converter Style Composer Control Variation Original Chord Intelligence Style Orc
48. Ride Cymbal 2 High Bongo Low Bongo 808 High Conga 808 Mid Conga 808 Low Conga High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Cabasa 808 Maracas Short Hi Whistle Long Low Whistle EXC2 Short Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 808 Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block Mute Cuica Open Cuica Mute Triangle Open Triangle Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo EXC7 EXC7 EXC1 EXC1 EXC4 EXC4 EXC5 EXC5 EXC6 EXC6 DANCE Set Bar Chime Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Dance Snr 1 Square Click Metronome Click Metronome Bell Kick 1 808 Bass Drum 2 808 Rim Shot TR 909 Snr Hand Clap Dance Snr 2 808 Low Tom 2 808 CHH EXC1 808 Low Tom 1 808 CHH EXC1 808 Mid Tom 2 808 OHH EXC1 808 Mid Tom 1 808 Hi Tom 2 808 Cymbal 808 Hi Tom 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cymbal 808 Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibra slap Ride Cymbal 2 High Bongo Low Bongo 808 High Conga 808 Mid Conga 808 Low Conga High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Cabasa 808 Maracas Short Hi Whistle Long Low Whistle EXC2 Short Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 808 Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block Mute Cuica Open Cuica Mute Triangle Open Triangle Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo EXC7 EXC7 EXC4 EXC4 EXC5 EXC5 EXC6 EXC6 JAZZ GS STANDARD Set
49. Sequencer 127 The 16 Track Sequencer TEO isinisi iiien 127 Modifying the Settings of Each Part onucncinninnnnnnnnnicninacncnanos 128 Getting the Most Suitable Part Tones for the Musical Genre AKT E E E EEA E T I E A NS 129 Recording a PerforManCe oococcncnnnncnnononconinnnncnnnininannccnnncnacaninanos 129 Changing the Recording Method Rec Mode 130 Recording While Erasing the Previous Recording Replace Recording tt 131 Layering a Recording Over Previously Recorded Sounds VERE Cord a 131 Repeated Recording at the Same Location hoop Record S lil Ia 132 Re Recording Part of Your Performance Funeh n Recordin mena io alta 133 Composing an Accompaniment By Entering Chords Chord Sequencer Aa 134 Inputting Chords without Playing the Keyboard 135 EUNE SON iaa 135 Basic Operation of the Editing FunctioNS oocncononnnnnanionenes 135 Undoing Edits Und visi dad 136 Copying Measures Copy nerne eiren 136 Copying Rhythm Patterns to Create Rhythm Parts 137 Correcting Timing Discrepancies Quantize conconcnicnicnnnnnnos 137 Deleting Measures Delete o iia a 138 Inserting Blank Measures InSert cocoiconcnncnnconinncnncnncnninnnannos 138 Transposing Individual Parts Iranspose concninncnninninninnns 139 Making Measures Blank Erase conconioninncnncnncnninncnnicnnanicinanios 139 Exchanging Parts Part Exchange cconconcnncnncnicnninacanicaraninnnanios 140 Correcting Notes One by
50. Song Edit screen However you cannot play back songs while editing in each editing screen E Undoing Edits Undo You can cancel an editing operation that you ve just carried out This is handy when you want to undo an edit and restore data to the way it was before There are some edits that can t be restored At Step 3 of Selecting the editing function p 135 select lt Undo gt Editing functions that can be undone appear on screen 22 gt You are undoing the last editino Copu If you touch lt Cancel gt the undo is cancelled and you re returned to the Song Edit screen If you touch lt OK gt the confirmation message appears on screen Touch lt OK gt to undone the most recent edit 136 E Copying Measures Copy You can copy a portion of a performance to a different bar in the same Part or to a measure in another Part This is handy when you re composing a song that repeats a similar phrase Ex To copy measures 5 7 to measure 8 re se aS e Sa a 1 213 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 At Step 3 of Selecting the editing function p 135 select pas a lt Copy gt A screen like the one shown below appears Measure number of the first measure of the segment to be copied Number of measures to be copied Copy source Track button or part number Choosing All copies all Parts appears in the lt Dst gt col
51. Starts and stops automatic accompaniment p 66 Rhythm Partner 19 Metronome button Activates the built in metronome p 52 You can change the count sound settings p 160 20 Beat Indicator This lights up in correspondence with the beat of the selected song or accompaniment 21 Rhythm button Plays the Rhythm pattern p 56 22 Tempo buttons Adjusts the tempo Press the and buttons at the same time to return to the original tempo m One Touch Program 26 27 28 29 23 Main Buttons See the Quick Start Select Listen to a Song Disk button Use this button to select internal songs or songs from floppy disk p 77 Song Stylist button Music Assistant button Score Display button Displays scores p 88 You can use the practice function p 92 Session Partner button Select Various Tones button 24 Touch Screen This lets you perform a variety of operations just by touching the screen p 24 25 Contrast knob Adjusts the contrast of the screen p 24 26 Dial Use this to change on screen values 27 buttons Allow you to change on screen values 28 One Touch Program button Piano button Makes the optimal settings for a piano performance p 26 Arranger button Makes the optimal settings for playing with automatic accompaniment p 59 29 Melody Intelligence Button Adds harmony to the sounds played with t
52. The button for the touched part being set turns orange 4 Press an Music Style button then select a Style with the touch screen or the buttons and the dial When you have decided on a Style touch lt Exit gt to display the Style Composer screen 9 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to determine the Styles for each Part Deciding on a Style 6 Touch lt Execute gt You have created a new Style The User Style is recorded to the Music Style User button Try playing with the new Style If you turn off the power or record a new User Style any User Style you ve previously recorded is lost If you do not want to delete the Style save it to a floppy disk or to user memory Take a look at Saving a User Style p 149 O Muting Parts for a particular division You can mute the sound of particular Parts in specific Divisions For example have all of the parts play in the Variation accompaniment pattern while muting Accompaniment 2 and Accompaniment 3 in the Original accompaniment pattern With this arrangement when the accompaniment pattern changes from the original to the variation it creates a more elaborate effect in the accompaniment gt For more on Divisions refer to the Style Arrangements p 146 1 Touch the Style Composer screen to choose the Part you want to mute out 2 Press the Fill In To Variation or To Original button to switch to the division that you want to mute
53. Track Sequencer p 127 or other methods After you have finished with mix recording return to the usual replace recording mode A gt Q pe j 11 N 131 N da oO les o Le lt U Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs E Repeated Recording at the Same Location Loop Recording You can record a specified passage over and over layering sounds with each pass This method is called Loop Recording This is handy when recording a Rhythm Part For example use this method to make a Loop Recording of a four measure segment First record the bass drum the snare drum next then the hi hat and so on layering a different instrument onto the same four measures After you have finished recording the four measure rhythm pattern you can then use the procedure in Copying Measures Copy p 136 to create as many copies of the four measures as you need to complete your Rhythm part l Place A and B markers at the beginning and end of the passage you want to record Take a look at Setting Markers for Repeated Practice Marker p 100 If you haven t recorded anything yet then use Blank Recording to create the necessary number of measures before placing the markers What is Blank Recording Blank Recording is recording a number of silent measures with no content 1 Set the basic tempo and beat of the song 2 Hold down the Rec button and press the
54. Two tones sounding together when you press a single key is referred to as a layer performance For instance it s possible to play the Tones for both Piano and Strings simultaneously When you select an internal song or music file that includes the lyrics data lt ES appears in the Basic screen Touch this to display the lyrics The tone that was sounding before you switched to layer performance plus the tone indicated in the lower part of the display are now played together MEMD Here the tone appearing in the upper part of the display is called the right hand When you touch Octave tone and the tone appearing in the lower part of the display is called the layer Rp on none ee enon screen the pitch of the tone keyboard s sound is changed Cha nging the tones in octave units To learn more see Shifting the Keyboard 2 Touch the name of the tone to be changed Pitch in Octave Steps Octave Shift p 32 The tone name will be highlighted in orange ift p 32 3 Press a Tone button to select the new tone p 27 4 When you have selected the tone touch lt Exit gt MEMO f You can vary the volume level The display returns to the Basic screen balance of the two tones For Cancelling the Layer instructions see Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each 5 e Touch lt Layer gt Performance Part Part Balance p 75 The lt Layer gt icon returns to the or
55. Various Tones button mccconccoonncnancrnanrenanenannnnns QS 14 Select Listen to a Song button cmmmmmmermmnsanennnas QS 6 77 83 Session Partner bt On anciana as QS 18 oa iaEcesns QS 5 QS 14 DEX SEU LISE supei a a E eaihi ating 190 Ma 201 SMF Musie files sad ir 201 Sot Pedalei lid 21 Sol iia E O 128 DONS Mora ato ti cis 78 SONG ida G ee aiuatan su antiaieatandaneseiaads QS 5 so e NUDE is 78 84 SONS SEAT E reai we nieseoea O 79 Sone Stylist DUO sariri ea a QS 16 Sosno pedal siii 21 sound ENEE eaea ie n eeroauseeas 28 Sound Generator src 201 DOLE AE AA E E E seh cvatwe E 74 SPITE POUNCE esas A N ANO 156 Dp lito p QS 14 QS refers to the page number in Quick Start SEALE Stop DUO ennen i 66 Stretch TUAMS ar 153 Sirio RESOMAINCE sanidad dina 154 Diy 1S COMPOST ide 144 Se Converter under naasweacuueies 146 Style Orchestra vaa 70 Style Orchestrator button ss 70 Style SEITE aira TO dan 64 SOA A E N A 35 ACCON A EE ge uadaeeeas 35 E 37 Surround Doo tae asad nba 38 Sympathetic Resonance visita 21 SVE iaa 66 T Tap TEMPO ts 96 Temperamocnt added iaia 153 O bat teesoctatatadeteneatasenateentetsase 53 65 95 Tempo DUtOAS ia 95 a A E 93 Tempo Mute dei toalla 97 Tempo Recre 142 TONES crsseaceanacdacaiesecanseaabacaaiutedoass suacuaeneabacsasscctedveestuasavens QS 5 Tone Buttons urice irea o 27 Tone LISE caerle 184 Tone Search arepan o aO 29 Tone GeT a E N 129 TOC etl ip Ser a ere rr er rr ee ere QS
56. accompanying this product INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS WARNING When using electric products basic precautions should always be followed including the following 1 Read these instructions 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched 2 Keep these instructions particularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the 3 Heed all warnings point where they exit from the apparatus 4 Follow all instructions 11 Only use attachments accessories specified by the 5 Do not use this apparatus near water manufacturer 6 Clean only with a dry cloth 12 Never use with a cart stand tripod bracket 7 Do not block any of the ventilation openings Install in or table except as specified by the accordance with the manufacturers instructions manufacturer or sold with the apparatus e 8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators When a cart is used use caution when heat registers stoves or other apparatus including moving the cart apparatus combination to m amplifiers that produce heat avoid injury from tip over 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with unused for long periods of time one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two 14 Refer all servicing
57. allows you to Chord names can be displayed check the keys that are pressed for the sounds played back in some of the internal songs and recorded performances Selects the part for which the score is displayed using the KR s Chord You can specify the track or part to be displayed with lt Option gt p 90 Makes detailed settings for the score display p 90 This allows you to practice the song repeatedly while reading the music p 92 Sequencer p 134 The left pedal functions as the Replay When you press the pedal during the playback of the song playback stops and when you release the pedal playback resumes starting at the beginning of that measure When the pedal is pressed in rapid succession playback is returned the same number of measures as the number of times the pedal is pressed In situations such as when you want to hear a difficult phrase repeated a number of times you can press the pedal to go to an earlier point in the song 88 Chapter 4 Practice Functions 3 Press the gt E Play Stop button Playback of the song begins and the score advances along with the progression of Noe SKOV iE score if the selected part the performance contains no data To change the part being displayed refer Notes Regarding the Score Display to Making Detailed Settings e When playback of a song begins ha appears in the Score screen While this for the Score Display p 90 symbol
58. and the accompaniment pattern Refer to Inputting Chords with the Chord Sequencer 6 When you have finished inputting all the data touch lt Execute gt The accompaniment you ve composed is registered at 0 New Song When storage of the data is complete return to the Menu screen Now press the gt Play Stop button and try playing the melody along with the accompaniment you created Songs you ve created are discarded as soon as you turn off the power If you do not want to delete the song save it to a floppy disk or to user memory Refer to Saving Songs p 116 Inputting Chords with the Chord Sequencer Change the accompaniment arrangements Move the cursor Music Style O O O O O O Ow O O User Pop Ballad Oldies BigBand Latin Trad Function Rock Acoustic Country Swing Gospel Kids Style P Orchestrator Select the accompaniment pattern Division 1 Use the buttons or the dial to move the cursor to the input position Use the a Bwd and P gt Fwd buttons to move the cursor one measure at a time 2 Enter the chord progression and the changes in the accompaniment pattern and arrangement Just as when performing with Automatic Accompaniment press the keys to specify a chord and press a button to select the accompaniment pattern p 69 You can change the Style Orchestrator with the Performance Pads p 70 3 Touch lt Ins gt once to
59. appears in the screen For more detailed to the current song information refer to If the Add On il NewSono following screen appears p 105 Touch lt New Song gt This switches the KR to the settings required for recording a new song The KR is put in recording standby To cancel recording press the Rec button once more 4 Decide on the tempo and beat If necessary press the Metronome button to play the metronome When you have finished making the settings touch lt Exit gt to display the Basic screen Start recording 5 Press the m Play Stop button A two bar count in plays then recording starts Even without pressing the m Play Stop button recording starts when you play the keyboard There is no count in played when you start by playing rather than 106 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance pushing the m Play Stop button When recording starts the m Play Stop and O Rec buttons indicators light up Stop recording 6 Press the m Play Stop button Recording stops The performance is recorded to the 1 Whole button Listening to the Recorded Performance 7 e Press the ma Reset button then press the m Play Stop button The recorded performance is played back When you press the m Play Stop button playback stops Track buttons assignments for recorded performances When you record only
60. at the infrared receiver keeping in mind the range of operation below Roland zl ot SS F pe oe ee eee PET TTT eee EE ET TT ET ET ETT ET TET O O IA Infrared Receiver AN ES N CD Drive an ee Range of operation Distance 4 m approximately 13 feet Angle 30 degrees to the left and right of the receiver fete 00 00 00 O O 00 fc oo oo land Rol Remote Control Precautions Concerning Use of the Remote Control e The remote control is able to transmit only one operation at a time e The remote control may not operate even within the range of operation if there is an obstacle between it and the main unit e Using the remote control near other equipment that uses remote control systems may result in operational errors e The life of the battery depends on the amount and conditions of use If the operational range of the remote control decreases change the batteries e If you will not be using the remote control for a long period of time remove the batteries 85 Chapter 3 Song Playback E About the Remote Control Infrared Emitter Restoring the Original TONE HARMONY O and TRANSFORM Adding Effects to Mic Vocals Settings VOCAL EFFECT cane Selecting the Tone of Turning the Advanced G the Part Activated by 3D F i S d the Keys 30 Function or Surrgun TIE 2 AST
61. bass bands Space Chorus A chorus with extremely small undulations Chorus gt Flanger Applies both chorus and flanger effects Rhodes Multi The optimal effect for an electric piano Clean Guitar Applies an effect that combines Multi 1 compressor chorus and delay Clean Guitar Applies an effect that combines Auto Multi 2 Wah Equalizer chorus and delay Produces cyclical changes in volume katePah Makes the sonic position of the sound move to the left or right Chorus Delay This effect connect a chorus and a delay in parallel Chorus Flanger Due effect connect a chorus and a flanger in parallel Appli ffect th i Rotary Multi pp e an effect that on rotary Equalizer and overdrive Applies an effect that combines Ring Modulator Equalizer Pitch Shifter Phaser and Delay Keyboard Multi 191 gt o 0 3 a A O N N 0 O Q Q Q lt Music Style List KR 17 Pop Rock Funky Disco Strumin Away AmericanPop1 AmericanPop2 60s Feelin EZ Listening Funky Pop 70s 1 70s 2 Cool Al Shuffle Pop ShufleFusion Contemporary Asian Pop Swing Pop Groovin Medium Pop Michael sPop OrchestraPop Light Pop 70s 8 Beat British Pop 60s R amp B Fusion West Coast Rollin Light Fusion Shuffle Rock Power Pop Power Rock Hard Rock Heavy Metal Hip Hop Techno House Pop Euro Dance 192 Ballad Acoustic Scat Ballad Piano Pop Guitar Trio 6 8 Ballad Love Songs
62. data to be saved Insert a different floppy disk or delete files on user memory and repeat the procedure The floppy disk inserted into the disk drive can t be read Be sure you re using Roland SMF Music Files or other music files compatible with Roland digital Error 12 pianos p 201 Also if you want to save your work on floppy disk you need to format the floppy disk first p 114 For more on CDs that can be read refer to p 82 The disk was removed from the disk drive while Error 13 reading or writing was in progress Insert the disk and repeat the procedure This disk or user memory is damaged and cannot Error 14 be used Insert a different disk and repeat the procedure or format the user memory p 165 This song or music style cannot be read Please use a Roland SMF Music Files or Roland Digital Piano Error 15 compatible music files p 201 Also you can only use User Programs that have been saved with the KR p 123 The KR cannot read the disk or user memory quickly enough Press the M Play Stop Error 16 button then press the kd Reset button and gt Play Stop button to play the song For more on CDs that can be read refer to p 82 Indica tion The selected image data cannot be displayed If it cannot be made to appear either on the KR s display or the external display you will need to prepare image data that can be used with the KR p 164 The internal memo
63. do not want to delete the song touch lt Cancel gt and either save the song to a floppy disk p 116 or register the song to the Favorites p 80 Recorded performances are discarded when another song is selected or when the power is turned off Be sure to save important performances on a floppy disk Take a look at Saving Songs p 116 You cannot record with songs on CDs You cannot save songs to CDs and you cannot delete songs recorded to CDs Furthermore you cannot format CDs 105 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Recording a New Song New Song This records keyboard performances without the use of the internal songs or Automatic Accompaniment Settings for recording performances 1 e Press One Touch Program Piano button This sets the KR for performance without the use of Automatic Accompaniment 2 Decide on the tone of the performance p 27 Use the Tone buttons and the touch screen to select the tone When you have finished choosing the settings touch lt Exit gt to display the Basic screen Recording settings 3 Press the O Rec button You press the O Rec button and the following messages will appear when a song has already been recorded MEMP If you select lt New Song gt when a song has already been Do you want to record recorded the OK to delete a new song or add on song prompt
64. e Do not use in dusty areas e Do not leave the disc in direct sunlight or an enclosed vehicle Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside encoded surface of the disc Damaged or dirty CD ROM discs may not be read properly Keep your discs clean using a commercially available CD cleaner Keep the disc in the case Do not keep the disc in the CD drive for a long time Do not put a sticker on the label of the disc Wipe the disc with a soft and dry cloth radially from inside to outside Do not wipe along circumference Do not use benzine record cleaner spray or solvents of any kind Do not bend the disc Bending discs may prevent proper reading and writing of data and may further result in malfunction GS G is a registered trademark of Roland Corpo ration XG lite XE is a registered trademark of Yamaha Corpo ration Apple and Macintosh are registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc IBM and IBM PC are registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation All product names mentioned in this document are trade marks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Introduction Thank you and congratulations on your choice of the Roland KR Intelligent Piano While the KR Intelligent Piano certainly allows you to achieve authentic piano performances it also features easy to use Automatic Accompaniment and numerous other useful functions In order to enjoy reliable performance of
65. for the track containing the performance you want to erase then press the Rec button The Track button s light goes dark and the recorded music is erased Changing How Recording Stops When recording an Automatic Accompaniment performance you can change the accompaniment and the way recording mode stops 1 e Press the Menu button and watch the indicator light up The Menu screen appears 2 Touch lt Rec Mode gt A screen like the one shown below appears Rec Mode Rec Stop 112 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance 3 Touch lt Rec Stop gt j to switch between Arranger Stop and Composer Stop Display Explanation Aranaer eio Recording stops at the same time the Automatic 9 P Accompaniment stops Recording does not stop even when the Automatic Composer Stop Accompaniment stops When you press the gt m Play Stop button recording stops Recording Songs Starting with Pickups You can record songs that start with pickup beats songs that start on a beat other than the measure s first beat Count Sound e et Measure 2 PU Recording begins here Carry out Steps 1 4 on p 106 to prepare for recording If the O Rec button s indicator is not lit press the Rec button so the indicator is lit The KR is put in recording standby 1 e Press the lt lt Bwd button one time The measure number in the
66. gt The score is saved to the floppy disk as image data in BMP bitmap format Other than for your own personal enjoyment use of the scores that are output without the permission of the copyright holder is prohibited A gt Q pe pg 11 A by law Do not remove the floppy disk while save is in progress 91 Chapter 4 Practice Functions Practicing Songs with the Practice Function e Try using the KR s practice function to practice a song you like This feature makes it simple to specify the segment you want for repeated practice check your own performance against the score and practice at a slower tempo O 1 Displaying the Score Screen Selecting the song 1 e Press the Select Listen to a Song button to select the song you want to practice For more on how to select songs refer to p 77 Displaying the Score screen 2 Press the Score Display button q da oO sia Q Le Q The Score screen appears 3 Touch lt Tutor gt The following Tutor screen appears When you select this function after turning on the power a gt Touch to play a sample message screen like the one performance You can change the practice shown in the figure at left appears only once When the Message screen appears touch lt Close gt O 2 Practicing Listening to a reference of the Performance First listen to the song you are going to practice
67. hands when plugging into or unplugging from N an outlet or this unit e Before moving the unit disconnect the power plug from the outlet and pull out all cords from external devices audio CD player The resulting sound may be of a level that could cause permanent hearing loss Damage to speakers or other system components may result eesesoescecoooecccsoooeeccsoooeeccssoosecesssosoeccosssosesccosososcccsosossecooooesscooooesssosooeceeesooo AS E A T C T N O A A A A T o Disconnect all cords coming from external devices e Be careful not to touch the keys while the f before moving the unit automatic keyboard is functioning as this may sprain your fingers or damage the keyboard e DO NOT play a CD ROM disc on a conventional S e Before cleaning the unit turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the outlet p 20 e Do not put anything that contains water e g flower vases on this unit Also avoid the use of RR esas SOs ARA RR RARA AREA AN insecticides perfumes alcohol nail polish spray e Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning cans etc near the unit Swiftly wipe away any in your area pull the plug on the power cord out liquid that spills on the unit using a dry soft cloth ofthe outlet e Connect mains plug of this model to a mains socket outlet with a protective earthing N connection A CAUTION If used improperly batteries may explode or leak and cause damage or injury In the intere
68. how forcefully the keys are played Pedal EX2 Pressing the pedal with Pedal EX2 selected increases the layer Tone volume Pressing the pedal with Pedal EX3 selected increases the layer Tone volume while the volume of the left hand Tone is decreased The layer Tone is played at a fixed volume regardless of how forcefully the keys are played Pedal EX1 Pedal EX3 Pressing the pedal with Pedal EX4 selected increases the layer Tone volume while the volume of the right hand Tone is decreased Pedal EX4 The effect may not be applied correctly when you press a pedal if Pedal EX1 4 is assigned to more than one pedal gt Using the Bend Up or Bend Down function during a split performance p 30 changes the pitch of sounds in the right hand side of the keyboard Additionally the range in which the pitch can change when the Bender effect is used is called the bend range refer to Changing the Bend Range Pedal Setting p 159 Chapter 9 Various Settings E Changing the Bend Range Pedal Setting The effect of smoothly raising or lowering the pitch of a played note is called the bender effect You can assign the bender function to a pedal then apply the bender effect by depressing and releasing the pedal You can also make a setting that determines how much the pitch of the note changes when you apply the bender The maximum range of change in pitch is called
69. insert one measure before the measure where the cursor is currently positioned If you touch lt Del gt the measure where the cursor is currently positioned is deleted while the measures that follow are moved forward To remove what you have input move the cursor to the position with input you want to delete then touch lt Clear gt This deletes the entered setting Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs gt You can only insert an intro at the beginning of a song When you add an intro the number of bars corresponding to the length of the intro is inserted automatically Functions That Can Be Assigned to the Pedals and the Performance Pads gt For instructions on assigning functions refer to Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads Pedal Setting User Functions p 157 e Inputting a short Intro and Ending Assign Intro 2 Ending 2 to a pedal or pad e Inputting a Variation or Original without a Fill In Assign Original Variation to a pedal or pad e Using the keyboard to input slash chords such as Fm C Assign Leading Bass to a pedal or pad e Inputting a break somewhere within the song Assign Break to a pedal or pad Check the accompaniment you inserted Here s how to play back as much of the accompaniment as you have input 1 Press the ka Reset button to return to the beginning of the song 2 When you press the gt Play Stop butto
70. is added using the pitches of the specified part Touch lt Variety gt When lt Variety gt is ON the melody played on the keyboard is played as the harmony The harmony added is matched to the pitch Cancelling the effect 3 e Touch the icon you selected in Step 3 again The Music Files function is cancelled Touch lt Exit gt to go back to the Vocal Effects screen NEP When you play the keys while using Vocal Keyboard the tone selected for Vocal Keyboard is played NERD The harmony data on Part 5 is contained on the included CD 49 Chapter 1 Performance O Adding harmonies to a specified part Music Files Models Without Moving Key When you sing while playing back a specified part from song data harmony is added based on pitches of the specified part 1 e Select the song to which you want to add harmony If selecting a song on a floppy disk insert the floppy disk in the disk drive For more on how to select songs refer to Playing a Song p 77 2 Touch lt Music Files gt in Step 2 of How to select Vocal Effect p 43 i R Music Files Select the performance part to be used for the harmony 3 Touch the icon for the part to which you want to add harmony When you sing into the microphone harmony is added using the pitches of the specified part Cancelling the effect 4 Touch the icon you selected in Step 3 again The Music Files functio
71. it with a fade out where the volume gets progressively softer then stops Rotary This switches the speed of the rotary effect Slow Fast when you perform with an organ Tone While the pedal or Performance Pad is held down the pitch of the sound drops temporarily returning to the original pitch when the pedal or Pad is released This can be effective for simulating the performance of instruments like a Hawaiian guitar Composer Performs the same function as the M Play Stop Play Stop button p 77 Press the pedal or the Pad turns the score Page appearing on the KR display to the next Fwd 1 page while the performance of a song is stopped Press the pedal or the Pad turns the score Page appearing on the KR display to the Bwd 1 preceding page while the performance of a song is stopped Press the pedal or the Pad turns the score Page appearing on the external display to the Fwd 2 next page while the performance of a song is stopped Press the pedal or the Pad turns the score Page appearing on the external display to the Bwd 2 preceding page while the performance of a song is stopped Punch In During Punch in Recording this starts and Out stops recording p 133 You can set the tempo according to the Tap interval at which the pedal or pad is Tempo pressed p 97 What is the leading bass function The function that sounds the lowest note of a fingered chord as the bass tone is called Leading
72. jacks for plugging in headphones This allows two people to listen through headphones simultaneously making it very useful for lessons and performing piano pieces for four hands Additionally this allows you to play without bothering others around you even at night Plug the headphones into the Phones jack located at the bottom left of the piano Connecting headphones will automatically mute the sound from the internal speakers The headphone volume is adjusted by the Volume knob of the KR 22 Use Stereo headphones Some Notes on Using Headphones e To prevent damage to the cord handle the headphones only by the headset or the plug e Connecting the headphones when the volume of connected equipment is turned up may result in damage to the headphones Lower the volume on the KR before plugging in the headphones e Listening at excessively high volume levels will not only damage the headphones but may also cause hearing loss Use the headphones at a moderate volume level Connecting a Microphone You can connect a microphone into the Mic In jack and enjoy karaoke with the KR 1 Connect a microphone sold separately to the Mic In jack on the lower right area of the instrument 2 Rotate the Mic Volume knob in front of the Mic In jack to adjust the volume level for the microphone 3 Adjust the mic echo p 44 Some Notes on Using a Microphone e Be careful of high volume levels when using mikes
73. late at night or early in the morning e When connecting a microphone to the KR be sure to lower the volume If the volume control is too high when the microphone is plugged in noise may be produced by the speakers e Howling could be produced depending on the location of microphones relative to speakers This can be remedied by Changing the orientation of the microphone Relocating microphone at a greater distance from speakers Lowering volume levels Before You Start Playing Connecting an External Display You can connect a computer monitor or other such external display to the instrument and display scores and lyrics on the larger screen and display whatever images as you like For more about the external display settings refer to Changing the Settings for Showing Images with the External Display External Display p 163 For more on displaying images refer to Selecting Images To Be Shown on the KR and External Displays User Image Display p 163 NEP If your instrument came with a CD drive you can use the remote control to switch screens Displays That Can Be Connected to This Instrument In general a great many of the VGA monitors and multiscan monitors that are available on the market are compatible with this instrument However before you connect any monitor make sure it meets the following specifications e Resolution 640 x 480 pixels e Horizontal scan frequency 31 5 k
74. lid 1 Connect the supplied power cord to the AC inlet jack KR 17 2 Connect the pedal cord to the Pedal jack 3 Cramp the power cord and pedal cord with Cord Cramp and screw 6 at A and B see the picture above 4 Cramp the power cord and pedal cord with Cord Cramp and screw at C D and E see the picture above 5 Plug the power cord into an AC outlet KR 15 Although the KR 17 s cover is designed to close slowly when you let go of it it will close immediately if it has been opened only slightly Take care not to catch or pinch your fingers in the cover KR 15 1 Connect the supplied power cord to the AC inlet jack 2 Connect the pedal cord to the Pedal jack 3 Cramp the power cord and pedal cord with Cord Cramp and screw b at A see the picture above 4 Cramp the power cord and pedal cord with Cord Cramp and screw at B C and D see the picture above 5 Plug the power cord into an AC outlet 20 Before You Start Playing Connect the Pedal Cable Insert the pedal cable into the Pedal connector on the rear panel of the KR Pedal 4 OR Turning the Power On and Off Turn on power to your various devices in the order specified By turning on devices in the wrong order you risk causing malfunction and or damage to speakers and other devices To turn the power on turn the Volume knob all the way down and then press the Power switc
75. lt ON gt or lt OFF gt icon to select the tuning curve When set to ON the tuning curve features extended low and high ranges Stretch Tuning It is suitable for piano solos This setting is selected when the power is turned on When set to OFF the standard tuning curve is used It is suitable when playing in an ensemble with other instruments 153 A gt Q O j 11 Oo da Q sl Q Le lt U Chapter 9 Various Settings E Changing How Rapidly Sounds Are Expressed According to the Force Used to Play the Keys Hammer Response You can adjust the timing with which sounds are produced according to the force used to play the keys This function is called Hammer Resonance When a key is pressed on an acoustic piano it causes a hammer to move and strike the strings producing sound The hammers move more slowly when the keys are played gently meaning that sounds are produced just slightly later than when you play the keyboard with greater force When the Hammer Response function is on the interval between the time a key is pressed and the time sound is produced varies according to the force used to play the key The more gently the key is pressed the more delayed the timing of the sound At Step 3 in Procedure p 152 touch lt Hammer Response gt Hamer Response SSE Playing more softly slows the hammer movement resulting in l a natu
76. lt Pedal Setting gt e Pedal Setting SSS Upper Soft Left Pedal Center Pedal Bend Range Touch t to assign functions to each of the pedals Pressing the One Touch Program Piano button restores the piano performance functions to the pedals p 21 O Assigning Functions to Performance Pads 1 Press the User Function button and watch the indicator light up A screen like the one shown below appears a User Pad Settin SSE Pad 3 2 Touch t y to assign functions to each of the Performance Pads gt If you set the pedal as a dedicated switch for selecting User Programs the function assigned to the pedal cannot be used Refer to Using the Pedal to Switch User Programs p 126 O Functions that can be assigned Pedals Performance Pads Toggles the Leading Bass function on or off The function stays on as long as the Leading pedal to which this is assigned is pressed Bass When assigned to a Performance Pad this is alternately switched on and off each time the pad is pressed Only the accompaniment s rhythm part is played The next time you specify a chord with the keyboard the No Chord function is cancelled and all of the accompaniment parts are played No Chord During the performance of Automatic Break Accompaniment the accompaniment stops for one measure only Fill In to Performs the same function as the Fill In Variation To Variation button p 69
77. more on working with the disk drive refer to Using Floppy Disks p 114 1 Press the User Program button 2 Touch lt File gt 3 Touch lt Load gt A Load User Program screen like the following appears User Prooram E 2 UserProgram2 7 4 UserProgram Specifying the set of User Programs to be loaded 4 Touch lt gt Disk or lt gt User Touch lt El gt if you are loading User Programs from a floppy disk touch lt gt if you are loading User Programs from the user memory 5 Touch the name of User Program to load 6 Touch lt Load gt The confirmation message appears 7 Touch lt OK gt The selected User Programs are loaded to the User Program button Never turn off the power or eject the floppy disk from the disk drive while the operation is in progress Doing so will damage the KR s internal memory making it unusable Chapter 6 User Program Registration Deleting Saved User Program Sets You can delete individual User Program sets saved to floppy disks or in user memory When deleting a set of User Programs on a floppy disk first insert the floppy disk in the disk drive gt For more on the use of the disk drive refer to Using Floppy Disks p 114 1 Press the User Program button 2 Touch lt File gt 3 Touch lt Delete gt A Delete User Program screen like the following appears 5555 Delete User Proor
78. of discoloration and or deformation Repairs and Data e Please be aware that all data contained in the unit s memory may be lost when the unit is sent for repairs Important data should always be backed up on a floppy disk or written down on paper when possible During repairs due care is taken to avoid the loss of data However in certain cases such as when circuitry related to memory itself is out of order we regret that it may not be possible to restore the data and Roland assumes no liability concerning such loss of data IMPORTANT NOTES Automatic Keyboard While the automatic keyboard is in operation avoid doing anything that could hamper the action of the keys such as using undue force to press a key or forcing up a depressed key By doing so you risk causing malfunction Additional Precautions Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction or the improper operation of the unit To protect yourself against the risk of loosing important data we recommend that you periodically save a backup copy of important data you have stored in the unit s memory on a floppy disk Unfortunately it may be impossible to restore the contents of data that was stored on a floppy disk and the unit memory once it has been lost Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of data Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit s buttons sliders or
79. on recycled paper Roland Corporation 03126190 04 12 6N
80. one of the Tempo buttons to switch to the Tempo Recording settings Record tempo information In this case tempo recording is canceled when recording ends 143 09 da oO oes Q O lt U Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles Creating Original Styles User Styles Although the KR features a variety of internal Music Styles you can also create your own These original Styles are called User Styles You can use either of the two methods described below to create a User Style Style Composer With this method you combine internal Music Styles to create new Styles You can create a new Style by selecting from among the Rhythm Bass Accompaniment 1 Accompaniment 2 and Accompaniment 3 parts in different styles Style Converter p 146 Create a new Style by extracting the portions you need from songs composed with the 16 track sequencer When you re composing a song there s no need to specify all the chords You can specify just some of the chords and the KR automatically chooses the other chords and arranges the Style Style Converter features an Auto mode that allows you to easily create Styles from songs with a single chord and a Manual mode in which you create Styles from songs with three kinds of chords major minor and seventh chords 144 E Creating New Styles by Combining Internal Music Styles Style Composer You can create a new style by select
81. or un mute the sound Stopping the song 4 Press the m Play Stop button The song will stop Upper Accom Left hand Right hand Part NERO For more on music files refer to Music Files That the KR Can Use p 201 NEP If a single Track button A gt Q O caja 11 A includes more than one instrument and you want to mute just one of those instruments take a look at Modifying the Settings of Each Part p 128 NERO When a single Part is not played it is called Minus One Using Minus One you can mute out a particular instrument and play the part yourself NERO When playing back SMF files for Roland Piano Digital series instruments and the 3 Lower button and 4 Upper button do not correctly control the left right hand performances please change the Track Assign settings Please refer to Changing the Parts Assigned to the Track Buttons During SMF Playback Track Assign p 170 NERO You can adjust the balance between the keyboard and song volume levels Check out Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Part Balance p 75 99 Chapter 4 Practice Functions Setting Markers for Repeated Practice Marker By setting markers at points in a song that you want to practice repeatedly you can then easily go to and repeat play back of the selected measures E Placing a Marker within a Song You can place two sep
82. other controls and when using its jacks and connectors Rough handling can lead to malfunctions Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display When connecting disconnecting all cables grasp the connector itself never pull on the cable This way you will avoid causing shorts or damage to the cable s internal elements A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit during normal operation To avoid disturbing your neighbors try to keep the unit s volume at reasonable levels You may prefer to use headphones so you do not need to be concerned about those around you especially when it is late at night This instrument is designed to minimize the extraneous sounds produced when it s played However since sound vibrations can be transmitted through floors and walls to a greater degree than expected take care not to allow these sounds to become a nuisance to neighbors especially when performing at night and when using headphones When you need to transport the unit pack it in shock absorbent material Transporting the unit without doing so can cause it to become scratched or damaged and could lead to malfunction Do not apply undue force to the music stand while it is in use Use only the specified expression pedal EV 5 sold separately By connecting any other expression pedals you risk causing malfunction and or damage to the unit Use a cable from Roland to make the connection If using some o
83. par p 137 performances Insert Inserts a blank measure p 138 Transposes parts individually p 139 A gt Q pe j 11 N Erases data in measures creating p 139 blank measures car Exchanges the sounds in parts 140 Exchange 5 pom P Allows corrections to be made p 140 note by note Allows editing of the Tones ds changes that occur during a song pores 135 N da oO sien o Le lt Q Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs gt PC stands for Program Change which is a command that tells an instrument to change the sound it s using With songs that rely on the use of a variety of sounds a PC needs to be located at every point within the song where the Tone is to be changed Some edits can t be undone not even by choosing Undo We recommend saving songs to floppy disks or to user memory before editing For more on how to save songs refer to Saving Songs p 116 Editing 4 Touch the item to be edited The background of the item being set turns orange 5 Set the value with the buttons or the dial To cancel the operation once it is underway touch lt Exit gt 6 When you re done making all the settings touch lt Execute gt When you are finished editing the setting return to the Song Edit screen Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Menu screen gt You can play back edited songs by pressing the m Play Stop button in the
84. point Menu Record Playback I gt aa Qi i Record Playback buttons Disk Selecting the song When playing back songs on floppy disks first insert the floppy disk in the disk MEMD drive If the floppy disk is being used for the first time refer to p 6 1 e Press the Select Listen to a Song button The following Genre Selection screen appears Hed Hed Hed Fasy y Classical j Yez2u a J t aster pieces When you touch the genre for the song you want to play the screen changes When selecting a song from a floppy disk touch lt Disk gt The following Song Selection screen appears P 1 43 Chord 0 Annie Laurie 4 Anazingbrace Chord 1 Annie Laurie 4 Ave Harta Chord Londonderry Clock 17 Chapter 3 Song Playback 2 When you touch lt random order When you touch lt in order starting from the selected song When the last song is finished playback resumes from the initial song Touch the name of the song to be played back The selected song name appears at 0 You use the buttons and the dial to select songs Playing back 3 Press the m Play Stop button The button indicator lights up and playback of the song begins Stopping the Song 4 78 Press the m Play Stop button once again The button indicator light goes out and the song stops When the song
85. request servicing N e Dusty or are by your retailer the nearest Roland Service e Subject to high levels of vibration Center or an authorized Roland distributor as AREA RR ANA listed on the Information page when e When installing the piano be sure to fasten the e The power supply cord or the plug has been caster using the supplied caster cup N damaged or e If smoke or unusual odor occurs e Objects have fallen into or liquid has been spilled onto the unit or e Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is level and sure to remain stable Never place it on stands that could wobble or on inclined surfaces e The unit has been exposed to rain or otherwise has become wet or e The unit does not appear to operate normally or e The unit should be connected to a power supply exhibits a marked change in performance only of the type described in the operating instruc e If abnormal sound are produced Hons or ae marked on the potom orun e If error messages Error 61 Error 62 have appeared GO WARNING A CAUTION e In households with small children an adult e The unit should be located so that its location or should provide supervision until the child is position does not interfere with its proper venti N capable of following all the rules essential for the lation sale operation oie uan A e Always grasp only the plug on the power supply e Protect the unit from strong impact cord when plugging into
86. settings will be discarded as soon as the power is switched off Returning the touch screen calibration settings to the original factory settings If you touch lt Factory Reset gt in the above screen the touch screen calibration settings revert to the original factory settings Formatting the User Memory The KR features an internal storage area where you can save recorded performances and User Styles This space is called A gt Q O j 11 the User Memory The following content is stored to the user memory e Content registered to the Favorites p 80 e Sets of saved User Programs p 123 e User Styles saved on user memory p 149 e Image files set with the User Image settings p 163 To delete all of the content held in the user memory and restore the original factory settings carry out the following procedure 165 oO da Q sil o Le U Chapter 9 Various Settings 1 Press the Disk button Even when you press the Music Style User button User Disk screen or the User Program button the rest of the procedure is the same 2 Touch lt File gt 3 Touch lt Format User Memory gt A screen like the one shown below appears Format User Menoru GSE Formats the User memory Favorite Songs Music Styles User Programs User images and other data saved in User memory will be completely erased Do you want to proceed 4 Touch
87. specified number The device that receives this changes to the Tone of the corresponding number When you choose a Program Change message Program Number the Program Number will be transmitted to the MIDI device connected to the KR The MIDI device that receives the Program Number changes the tone to the corresponding Program Number Normally the Tone is selected from the 128 Tones available Some MIDI devices however have more than 128 Tones With such devices the Tone is selected through a combination of Program Change messages and Bank Select messages There are two parts of a Bank Select message the MSB Controller 0 with a value of 0 127 and the LSB Controller 32 with a value of 0 127 A gt Q O mie 1 oll O Some MIDI instruments can t handle Bank Select messages Others can handle Bank Selects but do not recognize the LSB part 175 O da Q sl o O U Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices Connecting to Audio Equipment When you connect the KR to audio equipment you can play the sounds from the KR through the speakers on the audio equipment or record your performances on a tape recorder or other recording device When connecting please use audio cables sold separately with standard phone plugs E Connectors Input R L Mono Input Jacks You can connect another sound source such as audio equipment or an electronic instrument using audio c
88. the Menu button The Menu screen appears Touch to switch the screens 2 Touch lt Play Mode gt A screen like the one shown below appears 3 Music Files Playback Mode GS compliant tones used for playback Result is same as that from any other 65 instrument A Use KR tones for some tones Performance becomes more expressive 3 Touch the icon to choose the setting Ion Explanation Playback uses GS compatible tones for performances that sound like other GS instruments Playback uses KR tones for greater expressiveness However differences may appear when playing back using O 5 Q D O devices other than the KR es 4 Touch lt Exit gt to go back to the Menu screen 5 After changing this setting try selecting the song once again For more detailed information about selecting a song refer to Playing a Song p 77 169 oO da Q oes o Le lt U Chapter 9 Various Settings E Hiding the Lyrics Lyrics Some commercially available music files for use in karaoke as well as some of the internal songs include lyrics data When you play such music files the lyrics automatically appear in the screen If you do not want lyrics to appear automatically set this to OFF 1 Press the Menu button The Menu screen appears J to switch the screens 2 Touch lt Lyrics gt A screen like the one shown below appears 3 Touch Rd t to
89. the Track buttons played parts and keyboard movement 3 Press the gt m Play Stop button Song playback starts and the keys move along with what is played as a result of the flashing Track button or buttons Chapter 9 Various Settings Using the 16 Track Sequencer Screen to Choose the Part That Makes the Keys Move You can get the keys to move along with the performance of parts selected with the 16 Track Sequencer screen 1 Choose the song to play p 77 2 Press the Menu button The Menu screen appears 3 Touch lt 16tr Sequencer gt A screen like the one shown below appears 3 138 EMiGrand Pianol 4 Touch the part you want to have associated with key movement The following shows the relationship between the indication in the display icons played parts and keyboard movement Movement No Movement No sound no performance data for this part No movement No sound no keyboard movement for muted parts No movement Detailed Song Playback Settings E Changing the Tone Settings When Playing Back Songs Play Mode With the normal setting GS tones sounds that are compatible with other GS instruments will normally be used to play back song data By changing this setting you can play back song using KR specific tones for certain portions of the data NERO For detailed information about GS refer to About the KR Sound Generator p 201 1 Press
90. the following appears MD Ensenble SSS S Pad Connect drum pads Al Connect keyboards 4 Select the method for using the MIDI In connector Normal setting Make changes in Tone and other settings from the connected device Select this when you have percussion pads such as Roland s SPD 20 Total Percussion Pad connected to the KR s MIDI In connector You do not need to make any MIDI settings on the KR Select pad Tones and make other settings from the connected pads for further details refer to the Owner s Manual provided with the pads Select this when you have a keyboard such as a Roland A 37 or AX 7 MIDI Keyboard Controller connected to the KR s MIDI In connector You can select tones for the connected keyboard from the KR No MIDI settings need be made on the KR Keyboard 5 When Keyboard is selected in Step 4 above use The connected keyboard plays using the selected Tone 173 A gt Q pe 11 oll O O da Q sa Q Le lt U Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices MIDI Settings You can make MIDI settings like those described below MIDI Setting Screen MID Setting SRS SS Local Control Display Explanation Chooses the MIDI send channel Tx Channel p 174 Switches Local Control on or off Local Control p 174 Program Change Screen Prooran Chane SEE Bank Select Program LSB Change Display Explanation
91. the keyboard the selected Music Style is automatic E Selecting Music Styles on Floppy Disks You can play other User Styles saved to floppy disks or User memory p 149 1 e Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive p 114 MEMD If you re using the disk drive 2 Press the Music Style User button for the first time be sure to read the important notes on p 6 O Kids 4 4 looser STYLE When you touch lt User Disk gt on the lower part of the screen the screen for selecting user memory or disk Styles appears When you touch lt Preset gt the screen for selecting Trad Kids Music Styles appears 3 e Touch E The Music Styles saved on the floppy disk are displayed When you touch lt gt the Music Styles stored in User memory are displayed 4 Select a Music Style and touch the Music Style name 5 New Press the One Touch Program Arranger button You can save multiple user You can now perform in the selected Music Style o look at Saving a User Style p 149 Music Styles selected from floppy disks are stored until the power is turned off Even after ejecting the floppy disk by pressing the Music Style User button you can perform using the most recently selected Music Style 63 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment E Using Keywords to Search for Music Styles Style Search You can search for Music Styles that match
92. the root and ASAS the third key above it Minor Seventh Ex C m7 Play the root ALLEIN the third key above it and the second key below it Diminished Ex C dim Play the root and the sixth key above it NERO You can cancel the Chord Intelligence function For more information see Changing How Chords Are Played and Specified Arranger Config p 159 NERD For more information about chord fingering refer to the Chord List p 194 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment E Viewing Chord Fingerings Chord Finder Whenever you are not sure how a certain chord is fingered you can display the notes of the chord on the screen 1 e On the Basic screen touch lt 4 127 GB Funky Disco 2 Touch the root of the chord you want to learn about The chord fingering appears on screen Cow Em bo Caug Csus4 CYsus4 For example if you wanted to see the fingering for a C chord you would touch lt C gt then touch lt gt Touch lt Exit gt to go back to the Basic screen 61 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Selecting Music Styles Music Style Buttons You can select a variety of different Music Styles by pressing the Music Style buttons Music Styles are divided into six groups with each assigned to one of the Music Style buttons Music Style C O O O O O Que Pop Ballad Oldies BigBand Latin Trad Rock Acoustic Countr
93. the score Score is displayed in the specified key tem Sting E a In some internal songs the fingering is displayed The fingering numbers shown in the screen indicate one possible fingering NERO Chord names can be displayed in some of the internal songs and recorded performances using the KR s Chord Sequencer p 134 Chapter 4 Practice Functions User Part Selects the part to display when User is selected as the part to be displayed User Track Parts 1 16 Lower Part Lower Track Parts 1 16 Selects the part to display when Lower is selected as the part to be displayed Upper Part Selects the part to display when Upper is selected as the part to be displayed Upper Track Part 1 16 E Saving Scores as Image Data 6 Touch 7 You can take scores that are displayed on the KR and save them to floppy disks You can also use saved image data to your computer Insert the floppy disk onto which you want to save the image data in the KR s disk drive Use a floppy disk formatted on the KR For more on formatting disks refer to p 114 Press the Select Listen to a Song button to select a song Press the Score Display button The Score screen appears Touch lt Option gt Touch lt Export gt A screen like the one shown below appears Outputs image data BMP for each parameter to set the range of the image data Touch lt Execute
94. the selected Part to on or off The performance data for the selected part is Clear deleted When you touch lt Clear gt a message asking you to confirm the deletion appears To erase the recorded sound touch lt OK gt If you don t want to erase the recorded sound touch lt Cancel gt Once a performance has been erased it can t be restored You cannot touch lt Clear gt during playback of the song 3 Touch lt Options gt to make more detailed settings for the selected part A screen like the one shown below appears You can change the Tone for the selected Part by pressing a Tone button while this screen is displayed When selecting Part 10 or 11 you can touch lt Drum Set gt to select the drum set or effect sound The Part name and tone name are displayed at the top of the screen 128 4 Touch for the corresponding item to change the setting You can also change the values by touching each parameter slider and then using the buttons and the dial Display Explanation Changes the volume level Reverb Changes the amount of reverb effect applied to the sound Chorus Changes the amount of chorus applied Shifts the direction from which the sound is heard between left and right rappor Touch to shift the sound to the right or touch to shift it to the left What s Panpot Panpot is the control that determines the placement of the sound in the stereo sound field
95. the tempo before you start playing by adding a count in This audible count before the song playback is called a Count In 1 e Press the Metronome button and watch the indicator light up The Metronome screen p 52 appears If you are not using the metronome press the Metronome button so its indicator q da oO sia Q Le Q goes out 2 Touch lt Count In gt The following Count In settings screen appears Count In Settings SS _ Measure Repeat With this setting two measures count down before the song playback starts Cancelling the Count In 1 e Inthe Metronome screen touch lt Count In gt 2 Touch lt Switch gt This sets the KR so that the count sound is not played 98 NEP You can have a count sound be played before the song starts playing back by holding down the Reset button while you press the Play Stop button The status of the lt Count In gt settings won t be affected by your use of this procedure NERD For more about other settings on the Count In settings screen refer to Settings for the Count In p 160 Chapter 4 Practice Functions Muting Some Parts Before Playing Track Buttons With commercially available music files for piano lessons the part for each hand can be played back independently This makes it easy to practice hands separately For example you can follow along w
96. the tempo of the song musical genre or MEMP other criteria you set Only the KR s internal Music You can also search Music Styles using the first character of the Style names Styles are searchable 1 e Press one of the Music Style buttons 2 Touch lt Search gt The following Style Search screen appears Condition Search screen Name Search screen Stule Search 3 E Style Search SRS Specify initial letter of keuword to search then touch lt Search gt Touch here to switch these screens MEMD In a condition search the KR O Searching by Conditions looks for Music Styles satisfying all of the selected 3 Touch the parameter you want to set then use the buttons and the search criteria dial to select the search conditions 4 Touch lt Search gt The search results appear in the display Touch a Music Style name to select a Music Style Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Style Search screen O Searching by Music Style name 3 Touch lt By Name gt Touch lt By Key gt to return to the Condition Search screen 4 Decide which character you ll use for the search The selected character appears in the middle of the screen Enter the character you are searching for For example touching lt ABC gt in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group A B gt C Touch lt A 0 gt to toggle between alphabets and numerals
97. to connect 2 Switch off the power to the KR and the device you re about to connect 3 Set the Computer switch on the underside of the unit to MIDI 4 Usea MIDI cable sold separately to connect the MIDI connectors to each other Please refer to the connection examples below 5 Switch on the power to the KR and the connected device 6 Adjust the volume level on the KR and the connected device 7 You should also set the MIDI settings as needed For details on the MIDI related settings refer to p 174 p 175 Connection Examples Setup with a MIDI Sequencer Roland MT Series Er ut MIDI In Bottom of the KR When the KR is connected to a MIDI sequencer set it to Local OFF Refer to Disconnecting the Keyboard from the Internal Sound Generator Local On Off p 174 Connecting with a MIDI Sound Module Sound Module THRU OUT IN Bottom of the KR Performing in Ensemble with MIDI Instruments MIDI Ensemble You can connect an electronic percussion device or other MIDI instrument to the KR s MIDI In connector for ensemble playing Making the MIDI settings for the instrument connected to the MIDI In connector is easy The sounds from the connected MIDI instrument are played from the KR s speaker 1 Switch to the Basic screen or press the One Touch Program Piano button 2 Touch lt Functions gt 3 Touch lt MIDI Ensemble gt A screen like
98. to select these songs easily NERO You can also register songs on Selecting the Song 7 floppy disks to the Favorites e Press the Select Listen to a Song button For details sefer to Copying Songs on Floppy Disks to Favorites p 120 The Genre Selection screen or the Song Selection screen appears p 77 2 Touch the song name to select the song to be registered Registering to Favorites 3 Touch lt Add gt A screen like the one shown below appears You cannot register songs on Favorites Ho 1 CDs to the Favorites This will be registered to Are you sure 4 Touch lt OK gt The selected song is registered to Favorites Now you can select the registered song by selecting Favorites for the genre in the Song Selection screen 80 Chapter 3 Song Playback E Removing Songs from Favorites This deletes registered songs for Favorites 1 e Inthe Song Selection screen select Favorites for the genre Favorites e O Annie Laurie f 2 Touch the name of the song to be deleted 3 Touch lt Del gt A screen like the one shown below appears OK to delete file Are you sure 4 Touch lt OK gt The song is deleted 81 Chapter 3 Song Playback Playing Back Songs on CDs Only for Instrument Equipped with CD Drive E Cautions Handling CDs Do not leave discs exposed to direct sunlight for extended periods Handle CDs with your finger and thumb holdi
99. tones feature an ample high end component which may make the sound appear to have metallic reverberation added Since this reverberation becomes particularly audible when supplemented by heavy reverb you may be able to diminish the problem by reducing the amount of reverb applied to the sound When listening through speakers Here a different cause such as resonance produced by the KR would be suspect Consult your Roland dealer or nearest Roland Service Center When listening through speakers Playing at loud volumes may cause instruments near the KR to resonate Resonation can also occur with fluorescent light tubes glass doors and other objects In particular this problem occurs more easily when the bass component is increased and when the sound is played at higher volumes Use the following measures to suppress such resonance e Place speakers so they are 10 15 cm from walls and other surfaces e Reduce the volume e Move the speakers away from any resonating objects When listening through headphones Here a different cause such as resonance produced by the KR would be suspect Consult your Roland dealer or nearest Roland Service Center The automatic accompaniment doesn t play correctly Can t select a tone or Music Style Automatic accompaniment is not heard Chord Intelligence can t be used Touch lt Exit gt several times to return to the Basic screen p 24 and then select a t
100. ve found the Program Change you want to modify touch Tone Name on the screen Press a Tone button to select a Tone group then select a Tone with the buttons and the dial When selecting Part 10 or 11 select the drum set or effect sound If you want to delete the Program Change touch lt Delete gt When you re done making all the settings touch lt Exit gt Changing the Beat in the Middle of a Song Beat Map You can create songs that have beat changes during the course of the song 2 You can t change a song s beat once it s been recorded Before recording the performance determine the beat to be used Press the Menu button The Menu screen appears Touch lt Beat Map gt A screen like the one shown below appears 27120 New Sono Measure Use lt lt lt gt lt PP gt in the screen or the lt lt Bwd and gt gt Fwd buttons to move to the measure whose beat you want to change The measure number appears in the top right area of the screen Touch lt Hi gt to move to the beginning of the song Touch lt Pi gt to move to the end of the song in each to set the beat a Q v Touch lt Execute gt N The beat change starts with the measure you selected Repeat Steps 3 5 to make beat settings in other measures as needed Recording the performance 6 Touch lt Exit gt twice The screen displayed before you pressed the
101. when you turn off the power or select another song The next time you press the Transpose button illuminating the indicator the music is transposed by the value set here xample Playing a song in E major while playing the keys for C major In this example C is the root note in the key of C major E the root of E major is the third in C major It is up four keys including the black keys so touch enter 4 for the setting Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance You can easily record performances using the five track buttons A recorded performance can be played back to listen to your own playing or to add additional parts You can use the KR to make the following kinds of recordings e Recording just your own keyboard performance gt Recording a New Song New Song p 106 e Recording performances using Automatic Accompaniment gt Recording With Accompaniment p 108 e Recording along with the internal songs and songs on floppy disks gt Recording Along with a Song p 110 e Re recording gt Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons Redoing Recordings p 111 O If the following screen appears If you ve recorded a song or changed a song s settings see p 128 the following message appears on the screen when you try to choose another song OK to delete Sono Are you sure If it s okay to delete the song touch lt OK gt If you
102. you to read and play You can also use this function to play back a song in a different key When accompanying a vocalist you can easily transpose the pitch to a range that is comfortable for the singer while still playing the notes as written i e with the same fingering positions A gt Q O caja 11 A First make sure you have selected the song to be transposed p 77 1 e Press the Transpose button A Transpose screen like the one below appears gt Transpose Settings Value Song to be played back Keyboard sounds songs being played back 103 Chapter 4 Practice Functions 3 Touch the screen keyboard or d to select the transposition value Each time you press jit transposes the key by a semitone When you touch d a value of 0 is set You can also use the buttons or the dial to change the transposition value When you transpose a song or the keyboard the Transpose button s indicator lights up As you play the keyboard or play back the song the notes are transposed When you touch lt Exit gt the transposition remains in effect and you re returned to the previous screen Cancelling Transposition q ba Q A Q Le U 104 EM 4 Press the Transpose button and the indicator light goes out NEM The transposition value reverts Transposition is cancelled to 0
103. your new keyboard for many years to come please take the time to read through this manual in its entirety Main Features O Piano Sounds with Rich Resonance and Wide Ranging Expressiveness The stereo sampling piano sound generator realistically reproduces even the sound of the hammers striking the strings producing the tones of a high quality concert grand piano Maximum polyphony of 128 notes ensures that you can use the pedal freely without running out of notes The KR features a new speaker system grand piano presence system to provide sounds with depth and spatial realism O Pursuing the Playing Feel of a Grand Piano These instruments feature a progressive hammer action keyboard which duplicates the touch of a grand piano with a heavier touch in the lower register and a lighter touch in the upper register In addition even the distinctive click that you feel when pressing a key on a grand piano has been faithfully simulated escapement mechanism The pedal is designed for good feeling response and allows subtle performance nuances to be expressed O Get Easy Results with the Main Buttons You can play songs display scores play the Automatic Accompaniment select Tones and perform other main KR functions easily by pressing the main buttons found on both sides of the screen With the Select Listen to a Song button you can select over 150 internal songs from songs for piano practice to the lat
104. 161 touch Factory Reset A screen like the one shown below appears Factory Reset SSS This will restore all the internal nenory contents to factory presets Touch lt Execute gt The confirmation message appears on screen Touch lt OK gt to restore the original factory settings When the setting is changed the previous screen returns When you touch lt Cancel gt the settings are left untouched and you re returned to the previous screen Never turn off the power while the display indicates lt Executing gt Doing so will damage the KR s internal memory making it unusable E Calibrating the Touch Screen Touch Screen If you ve been using the touch screen for some time the pointer may be shifted making the KR react incorrectly You should correct this displacement when necessary by performing calibration repositioning At step 3 in Procedure p 161 touch Touch Screen A screen like the one shown below appears gt Touch Screen SSS _ Touch lt Execute gt below to start calibration Touch lt Execute gt Touch the points indicated Do this carefully because touching a location that s different from the one indicated for the pointer may make the displacement even worse Be sure to touch the pointer accurately When the calibration is finished touch lt Write gt to store the settings Tf you don t write them to memory the calibration
105. 4 Practice Functions E Making Detailed Settings for the Score Display You can change the part appearing on the score display and change the manner in 90 which the score is displayed Touch lt Option gt Press the Score Display button to display the Score screen A screen like the one shown below appears Score Options 3A Finger Number Chords Pitches Switch the screens parameter being set to select the value Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Score screen Lyrics Sets whether or not the lyrics appear in the score Finger Numbers Whether or not the fingering appears in the score Chords Whether or not chord names appear in the score Pitches Sets whether or not the note names appear in the music when the score is expanded Clef L Determines whether a treble or bass clef is shown in the score for the left hand part Clef R Determines whether treble or bass clef is shown in the score for the right hand part Key Score is displayed in the specified key The lyrics are displayed Not displayed The fingering is displayed OFF Not displayed The chord names are displayed Not displayed Not displayed The pitch names C D E are displayed Do Re Mi l Fixed The pitch names fixed Do are displayed Do Re Mi The syllable names movable Do are Movable displayed Display is switched automatically G Clef G treble clef is displayed in
106. 5 TCS e Aiea cela QS 14 28 E ECHO ETE AA E magenta E A ET 44 OELE Ol EE E ES E A E S 135 Enero 42 Erect Last ui ile 191 Eject Button CDO DVE tinto clica 14 Eject button Floppy DISK Di Ve dd 114 Emergency eject hole ansias pits 14 82 205 EMCO dal 58 67 Equal 40 Equalizer DUON sce ancssocs std dean 40 Prase Song Edit zioenean iris 139 Erasing Performance on specific tracks scssssesccsssereeeess 112 Recorded pertormanc nal 112 Error Messaros tica 183 EXPO aida 91 Expression Pedal cons 172 Expression Pedal jack spirit iaoea TSE ios 14 Ext Display cOme aan 23 External Display da tatoo 23 163 F Factory RESET usa 165 Factory Setting Touch Scree seehids acca adhanoetaakdnseladasgeualonacbsuatotnaneluadieias 165 Wiser Memory eliana 165 A 80 116 Resiste aten 80 REMO nan 81 E ti A 69 Eb To Oremos 58 Pilly TO Variation ld 58 Finger Numbers insti lotto A Tan 90 Footage nc QS 15 Hopp y Disk Eonia as aude asados 114 Format Fpp diskin as 114 PUMICE OILS oidos 152 155 rl A N A 78 G O QS 5 General MIDE iaa 201 General MIDI doi 201 O 201 ES FOMA bere iaa A 201 H Hammer Response vedad ies 154 E wrrererrr rrr reer rrr ererrrer herrerrer 46 47 A O 1a Headphones nd iia 22 NN 25 OMA is 118 DPU ACK S isa 176 206 Insert Sons EI loans 138 Internal Sone asta 196 o O neniac at as eee ORAE LE 58 66 Matro Endine DUO ata 66 Intro Ename I ype nani distin 66 K Karoke a Ni 51 IA ated E E aeeages
107. 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Saving Songs A recorded performance is discarded when you switch off the power or choose another song Storing recorded performances and other data to floppy disks or the Favorites is called saving Be sure to save important songs to floppy disks or Favorites What are Favorites You can register songs you are currently practicing or particularly like to Favorites allowing you to select these songs easily p 80 When you register a song on a floppy disk to Favorites you can then play back the song without inserting the floppy disk in the disk drive If a recorded performance is saved to Favorites the performance won t be erased when the power is turned off Preparations for Saving Data 116 When saving to floppy disks first check to make sure that the floppy disk s protect tab is set to the Write position p 114 then insert the floppy disk in the disk drive Press the Disk button Touch lt File gt Touch lt Save gt The following Save Song screen appears Save Son NERO When using a new floppy disk first initialize format the floppy disk on the KR Take a look at Formatting Floppy Disks Format p 114 Some commercially available music files cannot be saved because they are copy protected NERO If not handled with care a floppy disk can be damaged or the data on it become corrupted maki
108. 6 42 On the Effects screen touch lt Off gt About the Effect Settings When the effects is set to ON the appropriate effect is applied for the currently selected sound You can also apply different effect types to each tone except GS tones and tones with the a logo Although turning off the power returns effects to their initial settings carrying out Memory Backup p 165 allows you to save and store the settings even after the power is turned off NEP For more on the effect types refer to the Effects List p 191 Selecting a different effect for the left hand Tone than the one applied to the right hand Tone and Layer Tone may not result in the effect you want Select the same effect as that used for the right hand Tone When you select an effect type that starts with GS that type of effect is also applied for the chorus effect for the song or Music Style p 58 selected at that time NERO All Voice button tones with a e or Mh after the tone name have the logo appearing same effect applied to them If the effect for one of the tones with the GS or changed then the effects for the other tones with the GS logo is or a logo are also changed automatically Chapter 1 Performance Adding Effects to Mic Vocals Vocal Effect With a microphone connected you can add effects to the microphone vocals NEP For details o
109. 90 Key Template a QS 3 Key Lona 155 L EA A ata nea Aland was heuete A 162 TESOL cee scot das ete tot O E E O E OET 30 Layer Seta ata QS 14 io PU case 30 reading Das astilla 158 Local Control ad Mie eee 174 WOOP Recording soria 132 Lower Tole 73 O sua ident O 90 170 a e Le DEA E E R 25 M Manual Punch Otto 133 A ced ennsmencscoseanesessanenness 100 160 O 101 MONA caos 101 Pae DO A E E PEE O tater uiatlactauaes mesntesetieds 100 Repertorio 102 Master TUNIDS estantes 162 Melody Intel Sence ina taa 72 Melody Intelligence button cmmooccccnnnnnnannnanonananananinanass LL Memory Backlund 164 NETEONOME culiao 52 Po eee wee E 55 A e ss sacs muaene eunneee 53 A eee 55 SOUMMG N 54 MOC re ra dais 54 Metronome button ia 52 Mi ie QS5 Wie a ACK seis 22 Mie Volume l RIOD eserse aaa a e E a 22 Microphone Lat 22 MIDI o 172 MID Connecti sn 172 A TT ow ieasteass 172 QS refers to the page number in Quick Start MIDI ENS ler 173 MIDI Se BUN SS aii T 174 Minus OMS tada 99 MIX RECONIIDE silla ais 131 Moving Keyes 168 169 Multitracie Recording stos islas 127 Music Assistant buttons QS 10 Music Files a 49 50 Music Holder iria ia 19 Must Sleep les 58 AVI A O eoeniodes 63 Riythim Patterson 65 Music Sty le BULIONS ida 62 Musie Sty le susana 192 193 A AS 99 128 N INGW SOT Bo haids taesis ncreactessuduiacobuts cates E a RA aaia 106 NEINO CO j estia a aaa aaa aa QS 13 Note Edit Sone Edit aussi 140 O cave A A O
110. A S Nordhavnsvej 7 Postbox 880 DK 2100 Copenhagen DENMARK TEL 3916 6200 FINLAND Roland Scandinavia As Filial Finland Elannontie 5 FIN 01510 Vantaa FINLAND TEL 0 9 68 24 020 GERMANY Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH Oststrasse 96 22844 Norderstedt GERMANY TEL 040 52 60090 GREECE STOLLAS S A Music Sound Light 155 New National Road Patras 26442 GREECE TEL 2610 435400 HUNGARY Roland East Europe Ltd Warehouse Area DEPO Pf 83 H 2046 Torokbalint HUNGARY TEL 23 511011 IRELAND Roland Ireland G2 Calmount Park Calmount Avenue Dublin 12 Republic of IRELAND TEL 01 4294444 ITALY Roland Italy S p A Viale delle Industrie 8 20020 Arese Milano ITALY TEL 02 937 78300 NORWAY Roland Scandinavia Avd Kontor Norge Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95 Lilleaker N 0216 Oslo NORWAY TEL 2273 0074 POLAND MX MUSIC SP Z O O UL Gibraltarska 4 PL 03664 Warszawa POLAND TEL 022 679 44 19 PORTUGAL Roland Iberia S L Portugal Office Cais das Pedras 8 9 1 Dto 4050 465 Porto PORTUGAL TEL 22 608 00 60 ROMANIA FBS LINES Piata Libertatii 1 535500 Gheorgheni ROMANIA TEL 266 364 609 RUSSIA MuTek 3 Bogatyrskaya Str 1 k 1 107 564 Moscow RUSSIA TEL 095 169 5043 SPAIN Roland Iberia S L Paseo Garc a Faria 33 35 08005 Barcelona SPAIN TEL 93 308 10 00 SWEDEN Roland Scandinavia A S SWEDISH SALES OFFICE Danvik Center 28 2 tr
111. Bass When this function is turned on the Bass Tone changes when chord inversions are used Usually the tonic of the chord you play sounds as the bass tone What is the rotary effect This adds a sort of spinning effect to the organ sound similar to the sound when a rotary speaker is used Changing the speed increases or decreases the speed of this spinning effect 158 O Functions that can be assigned Pedals Only Function Explanation Pressing the pedal during playback of a song stops the playback When the pedal is released playback resumes from the beginning of the measure that was playing when the pedal was pressed When the pedal is pressed in rapid succession the playback will resume backs up the same number of measures as the number of times the pedal is pressed ited The pedal functions as a soft pedal p 21 Upper The pedal functions as a sostenuto pedal Sostenuto p 21 Lower Applies a damper pedal effect to the sounds Damper in the left hand side of the keyboard Bend Up This raises the pitch of notes you play on the keyboard Bend This lowers the pitch of notes you play on the Down keyboard When the pedal is pressed during a layer performance the Tone volume changes between two levels depending on how firmly the pedal is pressed Pressing the pedal with Pedal EX1 selected increases the layer Tone volume The layer Tone is played at a fixed volume regardless of
112. Cha Cha Cowbell Cha Cha Cowbell Cha Cha Cowbell Vox Tut 57 Pop Crash Cymbal 2 Chinees Cymbal Jazz Crash Cymbal 2 Vox Tyun 59 58 Vibra slap 2 Vibra slap 2 Vibra slap 2 Vox Tdum Pop Ride Cymbal 2 Pop Ride Cymbal 3 Pop Ride Cymbal 2 Vox Afahhhh 0450 a High Bongo 2 High Bongo 2 High Bongo 2 High Bongo 2 61 Low Bongo 2 Low Bongo 2 Low Bongo 2 Low Bongo 2 n_ Mute Conga Mute Conga Mute Conga Mute Conga 63 High Conga 2 High Conga 2 High Conga 2 High Conga 2 on Low Conga 2 Low Conga 2 Low Conga 2 Low Conga 2 Sr High Timbale 2 High Timbale 2 High Timbale 2 High Timbale 2 66 Low Timbale 2 Low Timbale 2 Low Timbale 2 Low Timbale 2 High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo Z Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo co Shaker 3 Shaker 3 Shaker 3 Shaker 3 MWE Shaker 4 Shaker 4 Shaker 4 Shaker 4 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 C5 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Long Low Whistle EXC2 73 Short Guiro EXC3 Short Guiro EXC3 Short Guiro EXC3 Short Guiro EXC3 Co Long Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 GEN Claves Claves Claves Claves 7o High Wood Block High Wood Block High Wood Block High Wood Block 77 mera Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block cm Mute Cuica EXC4 Mute Cuica EXC4 Mute Cuica EXC4 Mute Cuica EXC4 a Open Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 80 Mute Tri
113. Exit gt you re returned to the previous screen while the same function remains assigned to the Pads 71 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Adding Harmony to the Right Hand Part Melody Intelligence You can add harmony to the notes you play on the keyboard While an Automatic Accompaniment is playing the matching harmony is automatically added to the notes you are playing with the right hand This function is called Melody Intelligence Melody Intelligence 1 e Press the Melody Intelligence button and watch the indicator light up When you play something on the right hand section of the keyboard harmony is added The following Melody Intelligence screen appears Melody Intelligence 2 Select and touch a harmony type Then when you play a melody on the keyboard a harmony style is automatically MEMO added With some harmonies Tones When you touch lt Exit gt you re returned to the previous screen while the Melody may change automatically Intelligence function remains selected Also when you play several keys at the same time in some 3 Press the Melody Intelligence button once more and the indicator light cases harmony may be added to one note goes out The Melody Intelligence function is cancelled 72 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Playing Sounds in the Left Hand During a Performance Lower Tone Normally when using Automatic Accompan
114. Fanny Trading Office 9 EBN Hagar A1 Askalany Street ARD E1 Golf Heliopolis Cairo 11341 EGYPT TEL 20 2 417 1828 REUNION Maison FO YAM Marcel 25 Rue Jules Hermann Chaudron BP79 97 491 Ste Clotilde Cedex REUNION ISLAND TEL 0262 218 429 SOUTH AFRICA That Other Music Shop PTY Ltd 11 Melle St Braamfontein Johannesbourg SOUTH AFRICA TEL 011 403 4105 FAX 011 403 1234 Paul Bothner PTY Ltd 17 Werdmuller Centre Main Road Claremont 7708 SOUTH AFRICA TEL 021 674 4030 CHINA Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd 5F No 1500 Pingliang Road Shanghai 200090 CHINA TEL 021 5580 0800 Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd BEIJING OFFICE 10F No 18 Anhuaxili Chaoyang District Beijing 100011 CHINA TEL 010 6426 5050 Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd GUANGZHOU OFFICE 2 F No 30 Si You Nan Er Jie Yi Xiang Wu Yang Xin Cheng Guangzhou 510600 CHINA TEL 020 8736 0428 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co Ltd Service Division 22 32 Pun Shan Street Tsuen Wan New Territories HONG KONG TEL 2415 0911 Parsons Music Ltd 8th Floor Railway Plaza 39 Chatham Road South T S T Kowloon HONG KONG TEL 2333 1863 INDIA Rivera Digitec India Pvt Ltd 409 Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi Flats Compound Off Dr Edwin Moses Road Mumbai 400011 INDIA TEL 022 2493 9051 INDONESIA PT Citra IntiRama J1 Cideng Timur No 15J 150 Jakarta Pusat INDONESIA TEL 021
115. Hz e Vertical scan frequency 60 Hz e Connector 3 row 15 pin D Sub type e Signal Analog Confirm that the display to be used is compatible with the frequencies mentioned above Using a display that is not compatible with the above frequencies may result in incorrect image output when images move and in certain cases may even damage the display E Making the Connections To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections D sub 15 pin D sub 15 pin Mini Mini Ext Display Display Cable KR Bottom Sold separately HA Ext Display Connector External Display 1 Turn off the power to the KR and the display to be connected 2 Use display cable sold separately to connect the display to the Ext Display connector on the KR 3 Switch on the KR 4 Switch on the connected display NERO For more on handling the external display refer to your display s owner s manual Turning the Power Off After use turn off the power using the following procedure 1 Turn the volume all the way down on the KR 2 Turn off the KR 3 Turn off the connected display 23 N h pe Y Q x gt Q NOA 210393 22 oy gt A o O 2t a 2 N Before You Start Playing About the Touch Screen The KR makes use of a touch screen This lets you carry out a wide var
116. IDI sound module O Connecting Audio Equipment p 176 The KR has high quality built in stereo speakers but you can also hook it up a stereo system for an even more impressive sound You can also connect it to a tape recorder or other recording equipment and record your performances OConnecting External Speakers p 177 You can connect an amp or external speaker to the Aux jack and play the accompaniment and reverb sounds through it O Connecting a Computer p 178 You can use a sequencer program such as Roland Visual MT to record performance data from the KR and play performance data from the program on the KR OConnecting an Expression Pedal You can connect an expression pedal to the KR Use only the specified expression pedal EV 7 sold separately By connecting any other expression pedals you risk causing malfunction and or damage to the unit 172 Connecting MIDI Devices By connecting an external MIDI device and exchanging performance data you can control one device from the other For instance you can output sound from the other instrument or switch Tones on the other instrument What s MIDI MIDI short for Musical Instrument Digital Interface was developed as a universal standard for the exchange of performance data between electronic instruments and computers The KR is equipped with MIDI connectors and a Computer connector to let it exchange performance data with e
117. MO irera aE NA A A 142 Bass TONE lis 67 159 Beat Metronome nent 53 IR IY LIEN ae AnA 56 Beat Indicator nada 164 A 164 eE o PR sh alesis tales A 141 Bend Ran penie Ee E EEEE 159 Blank Recording eisprongen irradia 132 Brillance knob sisi lid 22 Bwal DUO id AAA A E 78 C Cabra OR di Uco 165 CD rori A Palatal te 83 171 CD DIVE adios 82 A e a a a 171 Chord Finder camis ensena E 61 Chord Pelli CENCE mesias 60 Chord O 194 Chord Sequencer rd 134 Chord Tones dida 67 159 Chord A eatin E E tennant 60 Chords ateos oe E EO AEN 60 90 NGL A A I 90 QS refers to the page number in Quick Start TCT rivas 90 Compani DUY ons sae ulennnmuiueaaueaueieats 118 Composer MIDE OGE siii tndeseiises 175 Computer arrasa 178 Computer Connector susto aood ooo 178 Computer Wives asueto 178 Connected Expression Pedal taco 172 Connecting AUGIO Eq pment anios 176 Computer ersed eran nE E IRA EE joo raras 178 External Speaker sarias iena a TR 177 MID dEV CE id 172 Contrast e e E E E ed 24 Contrast Knob catalina 24 Copy Sone ECIty srian a EO 136 Copying O 120 User Prost asta lps 125 User Sty LOS sa 151 COMO ia 98 COMING Wir a 68 SOC OS scisisen wicca E taerasaieesp 161 Count In Serial 160 D Damper pedal tii li iii 21 Delete Some Edit aquest alii 138 Deleting AGNE coos sesceadussndesreca O NN 119 USEL SEVIS andanada 150 DISC Trac 14 Dis DIVE garnene n 114 DIVISIONE aaa oo 58 Drant Set Lista 186 POR MIS A O Eai QS
118. Manual nor place heavy objects on it Doing so can damage the cord producing severed elements and short circuits Damaged cords are fire and shock e Do not open or perform any internal modifica Y hazards tions on the unit e This unit either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speakers may be e Do not attempt to repair the unit or replace parts capable of producing sound levels that could within it except when this manual provides SN cause permanent hearing loss Do not operate for specific instructions directing you to do so Refer a long period of time at a high volume level or at all servicing to your retailer the nearest Roland a level that is uncomfortable If you experience Service Center or an authorized Roland any hearing loss or ringing in the ears you should distributor as listed on the Information page immediately stop using the unit and consult an Pe A CRATE a Ree RC audiologist e Never use or store the unit in places A O e Subject to temperature extremes e g direct Si e Do not allow any objects e g flammable material sunlight in an enclosed vehicle near a heating coins pins or liquids of any kind water soft SN duct on top of heat generating equipment or ny drinks etc to penetrate the unit are NE e Damp e g baths washrooms on wet floors erate a e Humid or are e Immediately turn the power off remove the e Exposed to rain or are power cord from the outlet and
119. Menu button appears Press the kq Reset button to return the measure number to 1 Start a recording Record the performance using the procedures described in Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance p 105 Specify the measure then change the beat 141 N da Q les Q Le U Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs Changing the Tempo of Recorded Songs You can change the basic tempo of a composition The basic tempo was initially set when the song was recorded 1 Press the Tempo and buttons to choose a tempo 2 Hold down the Rec button and press the a Reset button The song s basic tempo changes The change in basic tempo is discarded when you turn off the power or choose a different song Save important song data to floppy disks or to user memory p 116 If the song you re working on has tempo changes press the Ha Reset button to go back to the beginning of the song before you carry out this operation Changing the Tempo Within the Song You can add tempo changes to a recorded composition The KR stores song tempo information and performance data separately Therefore when making changes to the tempo in a song you must record the changes in the tempo information independently of the performance data This recording of the tempo is called Tempo Recording E Adjusting the Tempo While Listening to a Song You can add ritarda
120. One Note Edit 140 Modifying the Tone Changes in a Song PC Edit 141 Changing the Beat in the Middle of a Song Beat Map 141 Changing the Tempo of Recorded Songs eects 142 Changing the Tempo Within the Song cece eeeeeeeeeees 142 Adjusting the Tempo While Listening to a Song 004 142 Adjusting the Tempo at a Particular Measure 004 143 Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles sccsesse 144 Creating Original Styles User Styles oooncninncnncnncnnccncnnccnnnnnos 144 Creating New Styles by Combining Internal Music Styles Style COMPOST ad 144 Creating a Style from a Song You Composed Yourself Style CONE 146 Savine a User le tas iii 149 Deleting Saved User Styles vns iii 150 Copying Styles on Floppy Disks to the User Memory 151 Copying Styles Saved in the User Memory to IOP PY DIES ii coa 151 Contents Chapter 9 Various Settings ccconcccconnncnonanonenanonos 152 Changing the Settings for One Touch Piano eee 152 a A O A E a 152 Adjusting Resonance Resonance cccccccninnnnonnonananianianicinano 152 Changing the Tuning TUNINgB occncnncnnonicnninccnninnnanininaninnnaninns 153 Changing How Rapidly Sounds Are Expressed According to the Force Used to Play the Keys Hammer Response 154 Adjusting the Resonant Sounds String Resonance 154 Adjusting the Keyboard Touch Key Touch 155 Changing the Settings for One Touch Ar
121. Roland KR 1 V2 then o Owners Manual Before using this unit carefully read the sections entitled IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS p 2 USING THE UNIT SAFELY p 3 4 5 and IMPORTANT NOTES p 6 7 8 These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation of the unit Additionally in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit Owner s Manual should be read in its entirety The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference Copyright 2003 ROLAND CORPORATION All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION CAUTION The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK u gt uthi DO NOT OPEN presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the produc s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons ATTENTION RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK intended to alert the user to the presence of important NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL ictal re
122. SA MSD MSE Song Standard MIDI Files Format 0 Roland Original Format i Format Music Style MSE Read Only Playable Disc Audio CD CD DA Data CD SMF Playable Software Save CD Drive lt Internal Memory gt Internal Songs Song Search by terms Over 170 songs and by letters Max 200 songs on Favorites Max 99 User Styles Max 99 User Program sets lt Others gt Rated Power Output 70W x 4 70W x 2 Speakers 20cmx2 16cmx2 8cmx2 5cmx2 20cmx2 5cmx2 Display Bouncing Beat Indicator Graphic Color LCD 320 x 240 dots backlit LCD Grand staff G Clef staff F Clef staff with note name lyrics chords fingering Languages English Japanese Germany French Spanish Lyrics Yes built in external display MIDI output Control Volume Brilliance Volume Balance Contrast Mic Volume One Touch Program One Touch Piano One Touch Arranger Damper Pedal half pedal recognition Soft Pedal half pedal recognition 36 functions assignable Pedals Sostenuto Pedal 36 functions assignable Vocal Effects Echo Voice Transformer Vocal Keyboard Harmonist Output jacks L Mono R Aux Output jacks L Mono R Input jacks L Mono R Mic Input jack Phones jack Stereo x 2 MIDI In connector MIDI Out connector Computer connector Pedal connector 8 pin DIN Connectors type Expression Pedal jack Ext Display connector 15 pin D Sub type Power Supply AC 117 V AC 230 V AC 240 V Power Consump
123. SB MIDI interface cable sold separately to connect the KR to your computer If the KR is connected to a computer in which sequencer software such as Roland s Visual MT is installed a song you ve recorded on the KR can be saved on your computer Connection examples To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections In order to make connections to your computer you must install MIDI driver software on your computer For details refer to the owner s manual for your MIDI interface Use a USB MIDI interface cable to connect the USB connector of your computer to the MIDI connectors of the KR Set the Computer switch on the KR s bottom panel to MIDI then turn on the power to the KR Bottom of the KR input R L Mono Computer a Mac PC 1 77 MIDI IN MIDI OUT 0 Y USB Connector of your Computer UM 1 etc Computer 178 E Connect to the Computer Connector You can connect a computer on which a sequencing program such as Roland Visual MT is installed and save songs recorded on the KR on the computer E Connectors Computer mibi pcz Mac Computer Connector You can connect a computer to this connector to exchange performance data Use a computer cable sold separately to make the connection The type of cable required will
124. Symph Ballad SunnyFeelin Soft Ballad Guitar Pop Pop Ballad Latin Guitar Piano Ballad Soulful Sax Slow Pop Piano Night Swing Ballad 8BeatBallad1 8BeatBallad2 12 8 Ballad Chapel Crystal Piano Latin Piano Waltz ClasiclPolka PianoClasic1 PianoClasic2 Guitar Bossa Gtr Fast Pop Guitar Waltz Harp Strings P Pop 1 P Classic 1 P Slow Waltz P Night P Bossa Nova P Pop 2 P Ragtime P Stride P Concerto 1 P Classic 2 P Ballad 1 P Ballad 2 P Swing Pop P Rock nRoll P Waltz P Concerto 2 P Concerto 3 P Swing P Shuffle P Boogie P Slow Swing P 50s Rock P Latin Oldies Country Rock n Roll1 Oldies 1 Rock n Roll2 Cntry Dreams CountryBalad HonkyTonkin Slow Dance Twist Surf fun Country Gtr Slow Oldies OldtimeCntry Rock n Roll3 JB Soul Blues D Country Twostep CountrySwing 50s R amp B Summer Days Oldies 2 Cajun Train Beat CountryWaltz PianoRagtime Charleston Bluegrass Country Country Song P Country Gt Arpeggio Outlaw Big Band Swing Smooth Jazz LooseBigBand Scat Swing 2 Fast Swing Jazzy Choir Organ Swing Big Serenade Big Band Big Band Pop Medium Swing A Cappella Stride Piano Dixie Jazz Waltz Dixieland Jazzy Brush Brush Swing Jazz Quintet Hula Hawaiian Cool Swing Scat Swing 1 Slow Swing Piano Jazz Swing in Foxtrot 1 Foxtrot 2 Boogie Piano Boogie PianoShuffle Gospel Latin Rhumba 1 Salsa Trad Tango GospelBallad Gospel Soft Gospel Mambo 1 L
125. YRIA Technical Light amp Sound Center Rawda Abdul Qader Jazairi St Bldg No 21 P O BOX 13520 Damascus SYRIA TEL 011 223 5384 TURKEY Ant Muzik Aletleri Ithalat Ve Ihracat Ltd Sti Siraselviler Caddesi Siraselviler Pasaji No 74 20 Taksim Istanbul TURKEY TEL 0212 2449624 U A E Zak Electronics amp Musical Instruments Co L L C Zabeel Road Al Sherooq Bldg No 14 Grand Floor Dubai U A E TEL 04 3360715 NORTH AMERICA CANADA Roland Canada Music Ltd Head Office 5480 Parkwood Way Richmond B C V6V 2M4 CANADA TEL 604 270 6626 Roland Canada Music Ltd Toronto Office 170 Admiral Boulevard Mississauga On L5T 2N6 CANADA TEL 905 362 9707 U S A Roland Corporation U S 5100 S Eastern Avenue Los Angeles CA 90040 2938 U S A TEL 323 890 3700 As of August 20 2004 ROLAND For EU Countries This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89 336 EEC and LVD 73 23 EEC For the USA FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the inst
126. You can exchange the notes recorded for a particular part You can make corrections in a recorded performance one with the notes recorded for another part This process of note at a time This process of making changes in individual exchanging parts is called part exchange notes is called note editing e You can make these corrections by using note editing At Step 3 of Selecting the editing function p 135 select l l e Deleting misplayed notes lt Part Exchange gt e Changing the scale of a single note A screen like the one shown below appears e Changing the force used in playing a single key velocity S Part Exchne EREE At Step 3 of Selecting the editing function p 135 select lt Note Edit gt A screen like the one shown below appears SES Note Edit Part 6 SSE Execute Touch each to choose Parts you want to exchange Location Pitch Velocity The note location display uses Measure Beat Tick as the format A tick is a unit of time that s shorter than a beat to select the part with the note to be corrected The Part number appears at the top of the screen Use the 4 Bwd button and the P gt Fwd button or use lt gt lt gt in the upper part of the screen to find the note to be corrected N da oO sien o Le lt Q When you ve found the note you want to correct touch Pitch or Velocity for the note Use the
127. You can scroll the display to one side or the other and show other choices by touching NEP You cannot have the metronome or automatic accompaniment play simultaneously with the Rhythm When you start playing the metronome or automatic accompaniment while a Rhythm is playing the Rhythm stops NEP Depending on the beat there may be only one Rhythm to choose form NEP For more on the Rhythm types refer to the Rhythm Pattern List p 199 Chapter 1 Performance O Changing the volume The rhythm volume can be adjusted to ten different levels 1 e On the Rhythm screen touch lt Volume gt The available choices for volume level appear at the bottom of the screen 2 Select a volume icon the selection moves to the side allowing you to access other volume levels I E j Choosing X sets the volume to the lowest level and choosing X D sets it to the highest level Choose for to silence the Rhythm sound 37 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Music Styles and Automatic Accompaniment What is Automatic Accompaniment MEMD For instructions on playing the Press the One Touch Program Arranger button for Automatic Accompaniment s l Automatic Accompaniment optimum settings Automatic Accompaniment is a function that provides you with refer to Selecting Music Styles accompaniment in a variety of musical genres just by specifying chords in the left Music Style Buttons
128. a Q sl Q Le lt U Chapter 9 Various Settings 3 Touch the name of the parameter you want to set Refer to the corresponding page for each function 4 Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Functions screen E Changing Standard Pitch Master Tune Standard pitch generally refers to the pitch that is heard when you play middle A When performing in an ensemble with other instruments adjust the standard pitch so that the instruments of the ensemble match Tuning all the instruments to a standard pitch is called master tuning At Step 3 in Procedure p 161 touch lt Master Tune gt A screen like the one shown below appears Master Tune 5 Touch ge the pitch Standard pitch can be set to any value from 415 3 466 2 Hz The setting is at 440 0 Hz when the KR is powered up E Changing the Language Language Five choices are available for the language used in displaying information on the screen At Step 3 in Procedure p 161 touch lt Language gt A screen like the one shown below appears Language Touch guage Available settings English Japanese German French Spanish German Spanish and French are displayed for some functions Other screens will be displayed in English 162 E Changing the Screen Message When the Power Is Turned On Opening Message You can modify this screen to show your favorite phrase when the power is tu
129. a touch lt Erase gt O Image data that KR can display 320 x 240 pixels for KR display 640 x 480 pixels for external display 1 4 8 bit 2 16 256 colors BMP format The KR cannot deal with compressed image data _ Tf you use a character that cannot be used in a name it will be replaced by another character when displayed 1 8 characters in length lowercase is ok A filename extension of BMP uppercase characters must be added after the name The following characters can be used to name an image ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTU VWXYZabcdefghijklmnopgqrs tuvwxyZzZ0123456789 amp 164 E Turning Off the Beat Indicator Beat Indicator The beat indicator normally flashes in time with the metronome Music Style or song tempo However if you wish it can be set to remain off at all times At step 3 in Procedure p 161 touch lt Beat Indicator gt A screen like the one shown below appears Beat Indicator 3 Touch to turn the setting ON or OFF so the beat indicator remains off E Remembering the Settings Even When the Power is Turned Off Memory Backup Normally the various settings revert to their default values when the power is turned off However you can specify that the settings will be remembered even when the power is turned off This function is called Memory Backup gt For more on the settings stored using Memory Backup refer to Parame
130. a keyboard performance the performance will be assigned to the track buttons as follows e Normal performance playing a single Tone from the entire keyboard The performance is recorded to the 1 Whole button Layer performance The performance is recorded to the 1 Whole button Split performance The left hand part of the keyboard is recorded to the 3 Lower button and the right hand part of the keyboard is recorded to the 4 Upper button Layer performance and Split performance The left hand part of the keyboard is recorded to the 3 Lower button and layer performance in the right hand part of the keyboard is recorded to the 4 Upper button Drum set or sound effect performance Recorded on the R Rhythm button Any performance that has been recorded is deleted when the power to the KR is turned off If you do not want a performance deleted then save it to a floppy disk or to Favorites Refer to Saving Songs p 116 107 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Recording With Accompaniment Try recording a performance along with the Automatic Accompaniment Settings for recording performances 1 e Press the One Touch Program Arranger button This chooses the setting for Automatic Accompaniment 2 Decide on the Music Style When you have finished choosing the settings touch lt Exit gt to display the Basic screen Recording Settings 3 Press the Rec button
131. a result you hear overlapping or intermittent sounds To prevent this from happening route 1 must be disabled by setting the unit to what is known as Local Off 1 Local On Sequencer Sound Generator Memory Ys 2 Soft Tru On Each note played is sounded twice Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices Local On The keyboard and internal sound generator are hea Sending Recorded connected Performance Data to a MIDI Sound is emitted Device Composer MIDI Out When Composer Out is active you can send performance data recorded with the KR to a connected MIDI device or Local On When you turn on the power this is set to OFF data is not sent 1 Press the Menu button 2 Touch lt Composer MIDI Out gt Local Off The keyboard and internal sound generator are separated No sound will be produced by the keyboard when Conposer MD Wt 33 it is played No sound produced Sound Generator Local Off gt When connecting a unit in the Roland MT series you don t need to switch off Local Control MT units transmit Local Off 4 Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Menu screen messages when their power is switched on If you first switch on the KR then the MT series device Local Control is automatically switched off on the KR E Sending Tone Change Messages Program Change Bank Select MSB Bank Select LSB A Program Change is a message that means change to the Tone of the
132. ables sold separately Play the sounds from the connected device through the speakers on the KR If the input of the connected device is monaural you must use the L Mono jack You cannot use the KR to adjust the volume of the connected sound generating device Output Main Jacks You can connect audio equipment using audio cables sold separately and play the sounds from the KR through the speakers on the connected equipment or record your performances on a tape recorder or other recording device If the input of the connected device is monaural you must use the L Mono jack Output Aux Jacks Select this when playing the keyboard performance through the KR s internal speaker and the accompaniment sound through an amp or speaker connected to the Output Aux jack E Making the Connections To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections 176 Playing Sounds from the KR Through the Speakers on Audio Equipment or Recording Your Performances on a Recording Device Input R L Line In Aux In Bottom of the KR al 1 Turn the volume all the way down on the KR and on the device you re about to connect 2 Turn off the power to the KR and other connected equipment 3 Use audio cables sold separately to make the connection A Switch on the KR 5 Switch on the connected d
133. ally Press the ka Reset button to return to the beginning of the song 84 NE If there is recorded song data the Delete song screen appears OK to delete Song Are you sure If it s okay to delete the song touch lt OK gt If you do not want to delete the song touch lt Cancel gt and either save the song to a floppy disk p 116 or register the song to the Favorites p 80 NEP Song Number lt 0 gt In the Song Selection screen the title of the currently selected song appears at 0 Song Number 0 is used by all genres Recorded performances are also stored to 0 The song in Song Number 0 is erased when the power is turned off Chapter 3 Song Playback Using the Remote Control Only for Instrument Equipped with CD Drive You can use the included remote control to easily start and stop performances and No remote control is included switch songs with models that are not equipped with a CD drive E Installing Batteries in the Remote Control Install the batteries provided in the remote control 1 e Open the battery cover on the back of the remote control 2 Insert the supplied AA batteries as shown in the figure of remote Be careful to observe control the correct polarity direction when installing de Close the battery cover the batteries E How to Use the Remote Control When using the remote control aim the remote control
134. an Cu 1 User Program 4 Touch lt Disk gt or lt User gt Touch lt Disk gt if you are deleting User Programs from a floppy disk touch lt User gt if you are deleting User Programs from the user memory 5 Touch to be deleted to select the set of User Programs 6 Touch lt Delete gt A screen like the one shown below appears OK to delete file Are you sure 7 Touch lt OK gt The selected User Programs are deleted Touching lt Cancel gt cancels deleting the file Never turn off the power or eject the floppy disk from the disk drive while the operation is in progress Doing so will damage the KR s internal memory making it unusable Copying Sets of User Programs on Floppy Disks to the User Memory You can copy sets of User Programs saved on floppy disks and to user memory You can also copy sets of User Programs saved in user memory and to floppy disks 1 Insert the floppy disk with the settings to be copied in the disk drive 2 Touch the User Program button 3 Touch lt File gt 4 Touch lt Copy gt A Copy User Programs screen like the following appears Copy User Progran 5 A gt Q pe maja 11 oO Programs you want to copy When All is selected all of the sets of User Programs on the floppy disk are copied to user memory Specifying the copy destination 6 Touch lt User gt to select the copy
135. an clearly point up the differences in accompaniment for each individual chord Points to note when creating songs e Record your performance with the three chord types of diminished seventh major and minor e It is convenient to record the sounds shown below for the Parts of the 16 track sequencer gt The chords all share the same Rhythm Part gt If you want to use the performance of other part check out Changing an Extracted Part p 148 Creating songs l Use the 16 track sequencer to record the song Record the song after referring to Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts 16 Track Sequencer p 127 and other related sections When using music data first select a song p 77 148 Displaying the Style Converter screen 2 Press the Menu button 3 Touch lt Style Converter gt The Style Converter screen appears 4 Touch lt Conv Mode gt then use the buttons or the dial to switch the mode to Manual This makes the setting for the Manual mode After that the steps are the same as for Creating Styles in Auto Mode p 147 When you touch lt Play gt in the lower part of the screen you can listen to the performance of the part selected with lt Options gt O Changing an Extracted Part You can extract and change part of a song created with 16 track sequencer l At the Style Converter screen p 147 touch lt Options gt A screen like the one
136. ance Pads changes For details refer to p 71 and p 157 Display Explanation Basie This is the simplest arrangement Advanced 1 Va This is a more involved arrangement When simple Music Styles are poa selected there may be no Full o This is the most elavorate arrangement l change in the arrangement even when you use the Style Orchestrator function 70 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment E Playing Phrases Phrase You can play sound effects and other short phrases Performance Pad Basic Advanced 1 Advanced 2 Full 1 e Press the Phrase button and watch the indicator light up The instrument is set so that phrases play with the Performance Pads A screen like the one shown below appears Phrase Settino SSE NERO When you switch Music Styles ro r r Pop Sunth 3 lFusion Brazs fll Guitar Solo Hand Clap the phrases assigned to the Performance Pads are a y switched If you do not want to Pad2 Pad 5 have the phrase settings change when you change Music Styles refer to Changing Music Styles Without Changing the Tone or to choose the type of phrase Tempo One Touch Setting p 156 3 Press one of the Pads The selected phrase plays When the phrase continues playing press the Pad once more to stop it With certain phrases the accompaniment stops while the phrase is playing When you touch lt
137. and Music Style tempos If songs seem difficult to play at their original speed you may find it helpful to first practice with the tempo slowed down Then after becoming more familiar with the song you can practice it at a gradually faster tempo Changing the tempo has no effect on the pitch of the notes And you can change the tempo even when the song is in progress Adjusting the tempo with the Tempo buttons Pressing the button once increases the tempo by one unit Holding down the A gt Q O caja 11 A button makes the tempo increase continuously Pressing the button once decreases the tempo by one unit Holding down the button makes the tempo decrease continuously Pressing the buttons simultaneously returns the selected Music Style or song to the basic tempo Adjusting the tempo with the dial When the tempo is displayed at the upper left area of the screen except at the Rhythm screen p 56 you can use the dial to adjust the tempo Turn the dial clockwise to speed up the tempo Turn the dial counterclockwise to slow the tempo 95 Chapter 4 Practice Functions E Setting the Tempo by Pressing the Button in Time Tap Tempo You can also set the tempo by pressing the Performance Pad This feature is called Tap Tempo By using the Tap Tempo function you can quickly set the tempo you are thinking of without specifying the tempo in numerical
138. and the KR s internal speaker When you touch lt Exit gt the Surround effect is activated and you return to the previous screen Cancelling the Effect 4 E Changing the Amount of Surround Reverb 2 3 4 Press the Surround button and watch the light go out The Surround effect is eliminated and the effect is no longer applied to any of the parts NEP Press the Surround button and watch the indicator light up You can use the Memory Backup function to store these Touch lt Surround Reverb gt to display the Surround Reverb screen DOS Touch lt Options gt Touch the External and Internal sliders to adjust the volume levels of the external speaker and the KR s speaker The Surround Reverb volume is adjusted When you touch lt Exit gt you return to the Surround screen 37 Chapter 1 Performance Adding Three Dimensional Breadth to the Sounds You Play Advanced 3D You can add three dimensional breadth to the sounds you play with automatic accompaniment p 58 or to internal songs or music files With this effect called Advanced 3D you seem to be surrounded by the sound of the performance You cannot use both Surround Accomp and Surround Reverb simultaneously with Advanced 3D S rround Reverb Equalizer Cc q 1 e Press the Surround button and watch the indicator light up 2 Touch lt Advan
139. ange the tempo The tempo is indicated on the upper left of the screen 22127 EB Funky Disco ntro Ending Tupe Pressing the buttons simultaneously returns the selected Music Style or song to the basic tempo You can change the tempo of Automatic Accompaniment even while the accompaniment is playing 65 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Starting and Stopping the Accompaniment Pressing the One Touch Program Arranger button activates Sync Start for the accompaniment which starts the accompaniment simultaneously when you play on the lower section of the keyboard and automatically sets an appropriate intro for the accompaniment You can also change the way the accompaniment starts and stops Intro Start Ending Stop a Sync E Having the Accompaniment Start Simultaneously When You Play the Keyboard Sync NEM 1 e Press the Intro Ending button and Start Stop button simultaneously Sync Start is set immediately causing the indicators of both buttons to flash after the One Touch Program Arranger button is pressed The Sync Start settings go into effect 2 Play a chord on the lower part of keyboard As you play the keys the intro and accompaniment begins simultaneously O Changing the intro When set for Sync Start the indicators of both the Intro Ending button and Start Stop button are flashing you can use the following procedur
140. angle EXC5 Mute Triangle EXC5 Mute Triangle EXC5 Mute Triangle EXC5 acc Open Triangle EXC5 Open Triangle EXC5 Open Triangle EXC5 Open Triangle EXC5 23 GZ Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell 00 84 ara Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree bog Castanets Castanets Castanets Castanets 86 Mute Surdo EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 87 Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 Cana Cana Cana Cana 89 pera Falamenco Hi Timbale Falamenco Hi Timbale Falamenco Hi Timbale Falamenco Hi Timbale 90 Falamenco Lo Timbale Falamenco Lo Timbale Falamenco Lo Timbale Falamenco Lo Timbale O1 arean Falamenco Tmbl Flam Falamenco Tmbl Flam Falamenco Tmbl Flam Falamenco Tmbl Flam 92 Shekere 1 Shekere 1 Shekere 1 Shekere 1 os Shekere 2 Shekere 2 Shekere 2 Shekere 2 Samm Low Bongo Mute Low Bongo Mute Low Bongo Mute Low Bongo Mute o5 High Bongo Mute High Bongo Mute High Bongo Mute High Bongo Mute C7 Falamenco HC Falamenco HC Bongo Cowbell Drum Set List Em No sound EXC will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number an a 26 p 29 ra Sr 33 os E ue on p 43 ran as a p Em a pn y 57 s PE oo ea 65 pra Sa co aa a a on 77 ur 79 a a1 a i eo 87 STANDARD Set Bar Chime Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Sticks Square Click Metronome Clic
141. ant to set then use the buttons and the dial to select the search conditions With lt Data gt songs are searched according to data included in the internal songs You can use four different criteria in searches Chords Lyrics Fingering fingering numbers and Any By selecting a song containing any of this data then displaying it in the KR s score you can display information about the selected data Touch lt Search gt The search results appear in the display Touch the song name to select the song Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Song Search screen O Searching by song name 3 4 Touch lt By Name gt Touch lt By Key gt to return to the Condition Search screen Decide which character you will use for the search The selected character appears in the middle of the screen Enter the character you are searching for For example touching lt ABC gt in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group A 3 B C Touch lt A 0 gt to toggle between alphabets and numerals Touch lt Search gt The search results appear in the display Touch the song name to select the song Touch lt Exit gt several times to return to the previous screen 79 Chapter 3 Song Playback Registering the Songs You Like Favorites You can register songs you are currently practicing or enjoy playing to Favorites allowing you
142. ap Tempo SSE _ KA 4 134 7 You can start the song by Count into the mc at desired tenpo the music then plays at that tempo microphone For more detailed giving the count through the information refer to Enabling A gt Q pe pg 11 A the start of songs and automatic accompaniment with the sound of your voice 4 Count to four One two three four into the mic Vocal Count In p 48 The tempo is set to the beat you used speaking into the microphone The new tempo setting is indicated in the screen After setting the tempo touch lt Exit gt and you re returned to the Metronome screen E Playing Back at a Fixed Tempo Tempo Mute If a song has tempo changes it helps to practice the song first at a steady tempo Overriding tempo changes is called Tempo Muting 1 e Hold down the m Play Stop button and press one of the Tempo buttons When tempo muting is in effect the tempo display appears in reverse video CE When you play back the song it will play at a constant tempo Cancel the tempo mute setting 1 e Hold down the m Play Stop button and press one of the Tempo buttons Tempo muting is canceled Tempo Mute will also be cancelled when you select a different song 97 Chapter 4 Practice Functions Match the Tempo Before You Begin Playing Count In When you re playing along with a song you can listen to
143. ar Bass WireStr Bass ResoSH Bass SH101 Bass Mute PickBs Mr Smooth Open Hard Dazed Guitar Acid Guitar Hawaiian Gt Ukulele Banjo Koto Shamisen Gt Harmonics Strings Velo Strings Dolce Strings SlowStrings2 Tremolo Str Suspense Str EX Orchestra Choir Str Harp Strings Warm Strings Violin Slow Strings Cello St Harp JV Strings DecayStrings Legato Str Strings Oct Strings PizzicatoStr Mellow Pizz Bell Strings Orchestra OrchestraHit Warm JP Str Slow Violin Contrabass Timpani Syn Strings1 Syn Strings2 Syn Slow Str Strings 2 JP Saw Str OB Strings Euro Hit 6th Hit Bass Hit Philly Hit Sax Brass Super Tenor EX Tenor Sax Sax Section Romantic Tp TromboneSoft AltoSax Tp Flute Soprano Sax Clarinet MutedTrumpet Oboe Flugel Horn Power Brass St Brass ff AltoSax Soft English Horn EX Tp amp Shake BrassSection Bs Clarinet Tenor Sax f Brite Brass Brass ff OrchestraBrs Grow Sax Baritone Sax Alto Sax EX Trumpet Tp Shake Tenor Sax GS Bari Sax SuperF Horns Fr Horn Solo Jump Brass Soft Brass DeepSynBrass Trombone Trombone 2 Tuba Piccolo Pan Flute GS Pan Flute Blow Pipe Bottle Blow BottleBlow2 Bassoon Recorder Trumpet French Horn Synth Brass1 Synth Brass2 Shakuhachi Brass 1 Brass 2 Ocarina Voice Boys Choir Kids Choir Jazz Scat Rich Choir Holy Voices Jz Scat Vib Opera Voice Jz Scat Doet Humming Dreamy Choir Jz Scat Vib2 Doos Voice Doot Accent
144. arate markers Marker A and Marker B in one song These markers are placed at the beginning of a measure to make the beginning and end of a section of music Placing markers is a handy way to start playback at the same place as many times as you like You can add markers or move to a marker even while playback is in progress Access the Marker screen First select the song in which you ll set the markers p 77 1 e Press the Menu button Touch to switch the screens da oO o Le U 2 Touch lt Marker gt The Marker screen appears Placing Markers 3 e Goto the measure where you want to set a marker using the lt lt Bwd and gt gt Fwd buttons 4 Touch lt gt for Marker A Marker A is placed at the beginning of the measure you selected on the screen will change to the number of the measure where you placed the MEMO marker Markers can also be assigned in units of beats rather than 5 e Inthe same way touch the Marker B lt gt to set Marker B measures Refer to Placing a Marker in the Middle of a It is not possible to assign marker B to the same location or a measure before marker A Measure p 160 100 Chapter 4 Practice Functions E Playback from a Marker Location 1 e Atthe marker screen touch the measure number of the marker you want to go to Playback will start from wherever Marker A or Marker B are set With the song pla
145. ard Touch to Adjusting the Keyboard Touch Touch Key Touch p 155 Spit Point Sets the key at which the keyboard is divided the split point p 156 One Selects the setting to be specified when the Touch One Touch Program Arranger button is Setting pressed p 156 Pedal Assigns functions to the pedal and Setting performance pad p 157 A gt Q O j 11 Arranger Sets the way the Automatic Accompaniment Config plays sounds p 159 Refer to Changing the Tuning Tuning p Tuning 153 3 Touch the name of the parameter to be set Refer to the corresponding page for each function 4 Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Basic screen 155 oO da Q sil o Le U Chapter 9 Various Settings E Changing the Keyboard s Split E Changing Music Styles Without Point Split Point Changing the Tone or Tempo This sets the point the split point where the keyboard is One Touch Setting divided when specifying chords in the left hand while using Normally when you select a Music Style the Tone and the Automatic Accompaniment and when playing split tempo settings suitable for that Music Style are selected performances p 31 automatically However you can also set it so the tempo and The setting is at F 3 when the KR is powered up Tone settings don t change when you change Music Styles At Step 3 Procedure p 155 touch lt One Touch Setting gt
146. articular passage over and over This is convenient when you want to focus on a passage 1 e First set Marker A and Marker B to define the measures you want to repeat For instance suppose you want to play back the passage from the fifth through eighth measures over and over You should place Marker A at the beginning of the fifth bar and Marker B at the beginning of the ninth bar OFF ON J 138 Em Sonate 2 Touch lt Repeat gt in the Marker screen The setting is made for repeated playback of the passage from marker A to marker B When you play the song the marked section of music plays back repeatedly Cancelling repeat playback 3 Touch lt Repeat gt in the Marker screen and the icon returns to the original color Repeat playback is cancelled 102 NE When lt Repeat gt is On e If neither Marker A nor Marker B is set the song is played back from the beginning to the end e If you only place marker A playback repeats from marker A to the end of the song e If you only place marker B playback repeats from the beginning of the song to marker B Chapter 4 Practice Functions Transposing Keyboard Sounds and Songs Played Back Transpose By using the Transpose function you can transpose your performance without changing the notes you play For example even if the song is in a difficult key with many sharps E or flats b you can transpose it to a key that is easier for
147. asa Maracas Short Hi Whistle Long Low Whistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block Mute Cuica Open Cuica Mute Triangle Open Triangle Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo EXC7 EXC7 EXC1 EXC1 EXC1 EXC2 EXC3 EXC3 EXC4 EXC4 EXC5 EXC5 EXC6 EXC6 POWER Set Bar Chime Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Sticks Square Click Metronome Click Metronome Bell Std Kick 2 MONDO Kick Side Stick Gated SD Hand Clap Snare Drum 2 Room Low Tom 2 Closed Hi hat 1 Room Low Tom 1 Pedal Hi hat 1 Room Mid Tom 2 Open Hi hat 1 Room Mid Tom 1 Room Hi Tom 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Room Hi Tom 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibra slap C EXC7 EXC7 EXC1 EXC1 EXC1 b High Bongo Low Bongo Mute High Conga Open High Conga Low Conga High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Cabasa Maracas Short Hi Whistle Long Low Whistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block Mute Cuica Open Cuica Mute Triangle Open Triangle Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo EXC2 EXC3 EXC3 EXC4 EXC4 EXC5 EXC5 EXC6 EXC6 ELECTORONIC Set Bar Chime Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Sticks Square Click Metronome Click Metronome Bell S
148. atin Festa ModernChaCha Gospel Shout Gospel Pop P Gospel Anthem Revival Samba 1 Samba 2 BossaNova 1 BossaNova 2 BossaNova 3 Fast Bossa Slow Bossa LatinTrumpet Mambo 2 Rhumba 2 ChaCha 1 ChaCha 2 Son Calypso Reggae Tango Plena Bomba Merengue Slow Beguine Beguine Latin Pop Latin Asian Rhumba Trad Kids Raindrops Music Hall Slow Waltz Kids Shuffle Kids Kids Dance Broadway Stage Waltz Fast Waltz Little Steps Parade MarchingBand Polka March Irish Tejano Celtic Circus Party Waltz Vienna Waltz Musette Scotland Japan Ireland Festival Cinema WesternMovie Balloon Trip Blacks White SFX Movie Western Screen Fanfare Waltzing SimpleMarch1 SimpleMarch2 Simple Waltz Kids 4 4 Kids 6 8 Lullaby 4 4 Music Box Music Style List KR 15 Pop Rock Funky Disco AmericanPop1 AmericanPop2 60s Feelin EZ Listening Contemporary Funky Pop 70s 1 70s 2 Cool Al Shuffle Pop ShufleFusion Asian Pop Swing Pop Groovin Medium Pop Michael sPop OrchestraPop Light Pop 70s 8 Beat British Pop 60s R amp B Fusion West Coast Rollin Light Fusion Shuffle Rock Power Pop Power Rock Hard Rock Heavy Metal Hip Hop Techno House Pop Euro Dance Ballad Acoustic Scat Ballad Piano Pop Guitar Trio 6 8 Ballad Love Songs Slow Pop SunnyFeelin Piano Night Guitar Pop Latin Guitar Symph Ballad Soulful Sax Swing Ballad Pop Ballad 8BeatBallad1 8BeatBallad2 So
149. ation Vari Fill To Ori From the fill in to the original ng ae Only one measure can be extracted when Fill To Vari or Fill To Ori is selected for the Division The number of measures may also be limited in other Divisions 147 A gt Q O ps 117 0 09 da Q sex Q O U Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles 7 Touch lt From gt and lt For gt then use the buttons or the dial to select the measures to be extracted Touching lt Play gt at the bottom of the screen you can listen to performance of the portion which you chose 8 Repeat Steps 5 7 to create Styles for all of the Divisions If no setting is made for a Division tt uses a simple drum pattern Deciding on a Style 9 When you re done making all the Division settings touch lt Execute gt The User Style is recorded to the User button If you turn off the power or record a new User Style any User Style you ve previously recorded is lost If you do not want to delete the Style save it to a floppy disk or to user memory Take a look at Saving a User Style p 149 The following data is saved to the User Style If a song includes data other than this the results you get might not be what was intended e Keyboard performance data e Amount of Reverb effect applied e Amount of Chorus effect applied O Creating a Style in Manual Mode When you create a Music Style in the Manual mode you c
150. aving Performance Settings User Program p 122 Parameters that switch immediately after the User Pro gram name is touched when lt Option gt on the User Pro gram screen is set to Delayed Rotary effect Slow Fast Footage Upper Lower Percussion Selected Right hand Tone Octave Shift Tone Layer Effect Type Depth On Off Tone OP P ARR Left hand Tone Bass Tone Chord Tone Part Balance Keyboard Parts Melod J On Off Type Intelligent Split On Off Layer On Off Lower On Off Keyboard Transpose Split Point Functions assigning to the left pedal and center pedal Style Orchestrator User Function Keyboard Mode Pedal Settings Performance f User Function Phrase Pad Settings Style Orchestrator values assigning the Pads Keyboard settings One Touch Piano One Touch Arranger Others On Off Type Depth On Off Echo Type Depth Transformer Type Harmonist Type Reverb Vocal Effects Transformer Harmonist Music Files Part Bend Range MIDI Settings for PC Number Bank Select LSB User Program Bank Select MSB Program Change On Off Each Sliders level Master Level Parameters that switch after the User Program name is touched for a few moments when lt Option gt on the User Program screen is set to Delayed Music Style Tempo Part Balance Accompaniment Part Accompaniment On Off Chord Intelligence On Off Leading Bass On Off Original Variation
151. between left and right speakers By altering the Panpot setting you can change the perceived location of the sound between the _ left and right speakers When you press the m Play Stop button you hear what the song sounds like as you change the settings When you press the m Play Stop button playback of the song stops 3 Touch to make settings for other parts The Part name appears at the upper part of the screen Change the settings for other parts as needed 6 Hold down the Rec button and press the a Reset button This operation set the changes in the settings The song can then be saved to a floppy disk or to user memory If you do not want to delete a song after changing the settings for the individual parts save the song to a floppy disk or to user memory p 116 You cannot save the settings that determine whether sounds for each individual part are played or not solo and mute Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs If the following message appears If you try to display another screen after you ve changed the song s settings for each Part a message like the one below may appear Song setup was modified change original setup Touch lt OK gt to change the song s settings Touch lt Cancel gt to discard the changes you re made E Getting the Most Suitable Part Tones for the Musical Genre Tone Set Tone Set is a function that aut
152. bout the Symbols Used for instructions intended to alert The A symbol alerts the user to important instructions the user to the risk of death or severe or warnings The specific meaning of the symbol is WARNING injury should the unit be used determined by the design contained within the improperly triangle In the case of the symbol at left it is used for general cautions warnings or alerts to danger Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly The symbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried out are forbidden The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it Material damage refers to damage or means that the unit must never be disassembled other adverse effects caused with A CAUTION The symbol alerts the user to things that must be respect to the home and all its carried out The specific thing that must be done is furnishings as well to domestic indicated by the design contained within the circle In animals or pets gt the case of the symbol at left it means that the power cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet es ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING Before using this unit make sure to read the e Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord instructions below and the Owner s
153. button settings to their original condition The TONE button is set to piano tone This changes the part that is currently active when the keyboard is played The tone TONE is switched each time you press the button Each press of the button takes you to the next selection among the available choices which are in order song list lyrics score score keyboard and user screen image DISPLAY You can press the DISPLAY button while the Tempo screen or Volume screen is displayed to clear the Tempo screen or Volume screen Some songs may not feature screens with lyrics or scores When you press the e button while the song is stopped the previous song is This adds greater breadth to the sound When the Surround button is set to Advanced 3D pressing this button toggles the Advanced 3D effect on and off When the Surround button is set to Surround each press of this button takes you to the next choice among the available selections which are Surround Effect selected Pressing the kea button while a song is playing returns you to the beginning of that song This starts and stops playback of the song gt a Playback alternately starts and stops each time you press the m button You can also assign functions to the button p 167 When you press the gt gt button the next song is selected You can adjust the volume Tf the volume is set to 0 with the VOL buttons then n
154. ccompaniment e Press the One Touch Program Piano button then press one of the Tone buttons then touch lt Exit gt Before You Start Playing NOA 210393 N ma pe j Y Q x Q E Using the Main Icons You can many other screens besides the Basic screen to do things The on screen graphics that appear three dimensional work like buttons These are called Icons The main icons you can use on these screens are as follows Some screens consist on two or more pages You can display the next page or the previous page of the screen by touching these icons Touch this to cancel the currently editing setting or exit the screen that is currently displayed You can usually display the Basic screen by touching lt Exit gt several times When you select an internal song or music files that includes the lyrics data this icon appears in the Piano screen or Basic screen Touch this to display the lyrics The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict what should typically be shown by the display Note however that your unit may incorporate a newer enhanced version of the system e g includes newer sounds so what you actually see in the display may not always match what appears in the manual 25 Chapter 1 Performance Playing the Keyboard Like a Piano One Touch Piano You can create the optimal settings for a piano performance with the press of a single button
155. ce segment to be transposed data to erase Number of measures to be transposed All Track button or part number to be transposed All performance data including notes tempos tones switches volume changes etc are erased Content When All is selected the same portion of all parts is transposed Tempo Tempo data is erased Erasing the tempo data for all measures results in a single constant tempo You can select the range to transpose the data from 24 two octaves down to 24 two Prog Change on octaves up adjustable in semitones Erases the data for switching Tones p 136 Note Erases only notes The range of transposition You cannot transpose performances of the drum sets and sound effect sets such as the Rhythm Track Except Notes Erases all of the performance data except for the E Making Measures Blank notes Erase A gt Q O mj 11 NI Expression You can delete the performance data in a specified block of Erases Expression volume change information measures turning them into blank measures without reducing the length of the song This process is called erasing Ex To erase measures bars 5 8 TAEI s EIE Seo a Blank measures Follow the steps in Selecting the editing function p 135 to choose lt Erase gt 139 Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs E Exchanging Parts E Correcting Notes One by One Part Exchange Note Edit
156. ce settings continue into the second page p 152 3 Touch lt Remote Controller gt A screen like the one shown below appears Renote Control Changing the PLAY Button Functions 4 Touch lt PLAY gt j to assign functions to 1 PLAY button Display Explanation Songs are played back continuously in sequence starting from the currently selected song Internal Song Songs in the selected genre are played back continuously All Song Songs on Floppy Disks and CDs Songs within the selected folder are played back continuously Only the selected song is played back One Song Playback stops when the song is finished Changing the TEMPO Button Functions 4 Touch lt TEMPO gt TEMPO button to assign functions to Display Explanation Changes the tempo Pressing slows the Tempo tempo down pressing speeds up the tempo You cannot change the tempos for CDs This adjusts the timing of the piano accompaniment during playback of CD Sync Player Piano CDs When is pressed the piano sound is played earlier when is pressed the piano sound is played later Transposes the song Pressing lowers the pitch in semitone steps pressing Transpose P ae pop 8 raises the pitch in semitone steps You cannot transpose songs on CDs Fast forwards and rewinds the song When is pressed the song rewinds when is pressed the so
157. ced 3D gt The following Advanced 3D screen appears Advanced 3D SSS WY 3 Advanced 3D eat teak Ca Rhuthn peT Rhythm EE ON OFF 3 Touch the icon to switch the effect on or off for each individual part Three dimensional breadth is added to the performance part you ve selected When you touch lt Exit gt the Advanced 3D effect is activated and you return to the previous screen Cancelling the Effect 4 Press the Surround button and watch the indicator goes out The Advanced 3D effect is eliminated and the effect is no longer applied to any of the parts 38 NERO If all of the parts are switched off the Surround button s indicator won t light up when you press the button Chapter 1 Performance O Selecting the tone to which the effect is applied With Keyboard in Advanced 3D set to On you can select the parts to which the 3D effect is to be applied when the keyboard is played 1 e Press the Surround button and watch the indicator light up 2 Touch lt Advanced 3D gt 3 On the Advanced 3D screen touch lt Option gt Advanced 3D Option 3 The effect ts applied to all parts played on the keyboard Layer The effect ts applied to eee layered part 4 Touch lt All Parts gt or lt Layer Part gt Display Explanation The effect is applied to all tones played with the keyboard the left hand tone right hand tone and layer to
158. cel gt and either save the song to a floppy disk p 116 or register the song to the Favorites p 80 When you start playback of songs the measure number on the Basic screen appears in reverse video The performance data is being loaded while the indication is highlighted please wait a few moments for this to be completed NERO Song Number lt 0 gt In the Song Selection screen the title of the currently selected song appears at 0 Song Number 0 is used by all genres Recorded performances are also stored to 0 The song in Song Number 0 is erased when the power is turned off When using markers to specify a section to be repeated p 102 you can rewind and fast forward only within the range between Marker A and Marker B Chapter 3 Song Playback E Using Keywords to Search for Songs Song Search You can search for songs that match the conditions you set regarding the song tempo MEM or genre You can also search the songs using the first character of the song name Press the Select Listen to a Song button Touch lt Search gt The following Song Search screen appears Condition Search screen Name Search screen Sono Search SS gt 2 gt Sono Search SSS _ Specify initial letter of keyword to search then touch lt Search gt O Searching by conditions Only the KR s internal songs are searchable 3 Touch the parameter you w
159. d Explanation m Dotted quarter not Half note intervals otted quarter note intervals Dotted eighth note intervals Quarter note intervals Eighth note intervals Sixteenth note intervals Single back beat added Triplet rhythm added Shiu Shuffle rhythm added 55 Chapter 1 Performance E Playing Rhythm The KR features numerous internal rhythm patterns which like the metronome can be played and stopped with the press of a single button Playing rhythm patterns instead of the metronome lets you enjoy performances that feel like live sessions Press the Rhythm button and watch the indicator light up The Rhythm will sound The following Rhythm screen appears 2 108 New Sono o Beat o beat 2 o Beat 3 lb Beat 1 lb beat 2 lb Beat 3 When you touch lt Exit gt the Rhythm sound continues to play as you return to the previous screen Stopping the Rhythm 2 Press the Rhythm button once more and the indicator light goes out E Changing the Rhythm settings O Changing the Rhythm Touch a Rhythm name on the Rhythm screen The selected Rhythm plays The Rhythms available for selection will depend on the beat to switch the screens and show other choices O Changing the beat of Rhythm 2 36 In the Rhythm screen touch lt Beat gt The available choices for the beat appear at the bottom of the screen Choose the beat by touching your choice
160. d faithfully by the piano This is different than a CD since the music file does not contain a recording of the sound itself This makes it possible to erase certain parts or to change instruments tempos and keys freely allowing you to use it in many different ways Regarding Copyright Use of the song data supplied with the Data Disk attached to this product for any purpose other than private personal enjoyment without the permission of the copyright holder is prohibited by law Additionally this data must not be copied nor used in a secondary copyrighted work without the permission of the copyright holder E The KR allows you to use the following music files Floppy disks saved ona Roland MT Series or Roland Piano Digital HP G R and KR Series instrument O Roland Digital Piano Compatible Music Files Roland s original music file is made specifically for practicing the piano Some follow an instructional curriculum allowing for a complete range of lessons such as practicing each hand separately or listening to only the accompaniment O SMF Music Files 720KB 1 44MB format SMEs Standard MIDI Files use a standard format for music file that was formulated so that files containing music file could be widely compatible regardless of the manufacturer of the listening device An enormous variety of music is available whether it be for listening for practicing musical instruments for Karaoke etc If you wi
161. d to the KR At step 3 in Procedure p 161 touch lt External Display gt A screen like the one shown below appears External Display Setting LineColor BouncingBall Touch the parameter to make the settings Settings Setting Value Explanation The display of scores lyrics score keyboard and image utp data are switched automatically ES The Score screen is normally Score displayed The Lyrics screen is normally displayed However lyrics Lyrics are displayed only when playing back music files that contains lyrics data Score and The score and keyboard are Keyboard displayed ELA Selects the screen s White Black background color Backgro Red Yellow rae sane Bitmap displays a image und Green Blue er Cyan data set in User Image Magenta Display p 163 White Black Line Red Yellow Selects the color used for Green Blue h Color lines and text in the display Cyan Magenta White Black Red Yellow Selects the color used for the Bouncin Ball Green Blue bouncing ball on the score g Cyan and lyrics displays Magenta E Selecting Images To Be Shown on the KR and External Displays User Image Display You can have image data from computers and other devices shown on the onboard display or on an external display you ve connected You can store two types of image data KR display use data and external display use data gt KR
162. depend on your computer Computer Switch The setting for this switch is made depending on the computer connected Mac PC 1 PC 2 When this switch is set to MIDI this connector cannot be used E Making the Connections To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections 1 Turn off the KR and the computer 2 Using a compatible computer cable sold separately connect the Computer connector on the underside of the KR with the computer s serial port 3 Set the computer switch on the underside of the KR to match the type of computer connected Please refer to the connection examples below Change the setting of the Computer switch only after the power to the unit ts off 4 Turn on the KR 5 Turn on the computer Make the settings for baud rate transmission speed for the computer and the software gt For more information on this procedure please refer to the owner s manual for your computer 7 You should also make the settings for the MIDI send channel and Local Control ON or OFF as needed p 174 Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices Connection Examples Connection with an Apple Macintosh computer Use a computer cable sold separately to connect the Computer connector on the KR to the modem port or printer port on the Apple Macintosh Set the Computer switch to Mac When u
163. disks and copy them to Favorites NOTE You can also copy songs in Favorites to floppy disks You cannot copy songs on CDs to Favorites Insert the floppy disk with the song to be copied in the disk drive Press the Disk button Touch lt File gt Touch lt Copy gt The following Copy Song screen appears Copy Sono SSS E Disk 2 Favorites to select the song you want to copy When Copy All is selected all of the songs on the floppy disk are copied to Favorites Specifying the Copy Destination 6 120 Touch lt Favorites gt to select the copy destination for the song If a song name is displayed with a number a song is already saved to that number If you select a number with previously saved song data and proceed to copy to that location the previously saved song will be erased If you don t want to erase a previously saved song choose a number with no song name appears in the destination column NOTE Touch lt Execute gt Never turn off the power while the operation is in Do not eject the floppy disk from the disk drive until the copy is finished progress Doing so will The song from the floppy disk is copied to Favorites damage the KR s internal memory making it unusable Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance E Copying Songs Saved in Favorites to Floppy Disks Songs that ve been saved to Favorites can be copied onto floppy disks In this cas
164. display use images appear on the KR s display when the instrument s power is turned on Refer to the procedure in Changing the Settings for Showing Images with the External Display External Display p 163 to set the instrument so the external display use image is displayed on the external display At Step 3 in Procedure p 161 touch lt User Image Display gt A screen like the one shown below appears R User mage Display 5 Select the screen for displaying the User image Selecting the display to be set 1 Touch lt KR Display gt or lt Ext Display gt Select the setting either for KR display use or external display use images Selecting the images to be displayed First take a floppy disk to which the image data stored in the KR has been saved and insert the floppy disk in the disk drive 2 Touch lt File gt A screen like the one shown below appears P 142 M 4 KRBMPOOS A gt Q O j 11 KABMPO00 2 KABMPOO 5 KRBMPOO4 KRBMPOO b KABMPOOS 163 oO da Q sil o Le U Chapter 9 Various Settings 3 Touch the name of the stored image data When you touch lt Preview gt you can then show the selected image data on the display selected in Step 1 4 Touch lt Save gt The selected image data is stored 3 Touch lt Exit gt to return to the previous screen To clear the stored image dat
165. dversely affect the operation of the drive and or damage floppy disks When the unit has been moved allow it to become accustomed to the new environment allow a few hours before operating it To insert a disk push it gently but firmly into the drive it will click into place To remove a disk press the EJECT button firmly Do not use excessive force to remove a disk which is lodged in the drive Never eject a disk while reading or writing is in progress since that can damage the magnetic surface of the disk rendering it unusable The disk drive s indicator will light up at full brightness when the drive is busy reading or writing data Ordinarily the indicator will be less brightly lighted or be extinguished Remove any disk from the drive before powering up or down To prevent damage to the disk drive s heads always try to hold the floppy disk in a level position not tilted in any direction while inserting it into the drive Push it in firmly but gently Never use excessive force To avoid the risk of malfunction and or damage insert only floppy disks into the disk drive Never insert any other type of disk Avoid getting paper clips coins or any other foreign objects inside the drive Handling Floppy Disks Floppy disks contain a plastic disk with a thin coating of magnetic storage medium Microscopic precision is required to enable storage of large amounts of data on such a small surface area To preserve the
166. e in the Copy Song screen in Step 4 above touch the large arrow icon in the center to point the arrow upwards This sets the KR to copy the song in Favorites to the floppy disk NEP The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying songs from floppy Some song data cannot copy disks to Favorites because they are copy protected 121 da oO sen o Le lt Q Chapter 6 User Program Registration Saving Performance Settings User Program Any collection of settings including those describing the current status of your data selections or settings Automatic Accompaniment can be saved to the User Program button You can then call up the stored settings by pressing the User Program button Saving your preferred combinations of Music Styles and Tones as well as other frequently used settings makes it more convenient You can register up to 36 User Programs to the KR gt For more on what can be registered to a User Program refer to Parameters Stored in the User Program p 200 1 Set the Music Style Tone and other data until the settings are the way you want them 2 Press the User Program button A User Program screen like the one shown below appears P 1 6 E 1 Doollap Group a 4 Modern Jazz lo StraightRock E Symphony 4 Rock n Fever 6 South Wind 3 Touch lt Write gt A Write User Program screen like the followin
167. e Computer connector at the same time 10 Ext Display connector Connect an external display You can put scores on the screen and display lyrics p 23 Right Side of Bottom Panel Instrument with Moving Key AA 14 16 17 14 Access Indicator This indicator will light when the inserted CD is being read 15 Disc Tray Place the CD to be loaded on this tray 16 Emergency eject hole This hole allows the disc tray to be opened in case of an emergency 17 Eject Button Press this button to eject the CD You cannot eject the CD unless the power is on USING THE IN SAB A doo 3 IMPORTANTE NOTES condi dad iaa 6 INTFOQUCTION isnroooiiinai ti ii 9 Mam Led rus cast achaeks Siena vues N aeeaceogs 9 How To Use This Maritial id 11 Conventions Used in This Manual ooonconnccnnnonncinnnnnnnccnncncnnncnns 11 Panel DESCrIDUONS seua ioaea inaa 12 Before You Start Playing ccsssseeseesseeeenseeeeeneees 18 Opening and Closing the Top KR 17 oooonnncnicnonicanoninnnnnninnannnnnos 18 Opening and Closing the Top KR 15 oooionnncnicncniconnninnncnnncncnannos 19 Raising the Music Stand as 19 Using the Music Holders KR 15 ooociociccionicnicnccnconicncanccnnancnos 19 Opening rand Closing tne lidad 20 Connecting the Power Cord 20 Conne ct the Pedal Cable la 21 luring the Power On and Ola tena metab ett 21 About the Redal A 21 Adjusting the Sound s Volume and Brilliance eee 22 Connechne Headphones siiis p naa
168. e is below freezing These occur due to the nature of a liquid crystal display and do not indicate a malfunction They can be minimized by adjusting the brightness of the screen p 24 The positioning of the touch screen may become displaced if some time has passed since it was last used Take a look at Calibrating the Touch Screen Touch Screen p 165 to correct the positioning Is the pedal connected correctly Make sure the pedal cord extending from the stand is securely connected to the pedal connector on the rear of the unit p 20 Has a different function been assigned to the pedal See Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads Pedal Setting User Functions p 157 Normal pedal operation is automatically enabled when the One Touch Program Piano button is pressed p 21 Could you be using a connection cable that contains a resistor Use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor Is the external display properly connected p 23 Is the external display s power turned on Are you using a display that is compatible with the KR Refer to Displays That Can Be Connected to This Instrument p 23 Are the KR s settings correct Follow the instructions in Selecting Images To Be Shown on the KR and External Displays User Image Display p 163 to set the External Display image Also refer to Changing the Settings for Showing Images with the
169. e original 4th Down Adds harmony a major fourth below the original Adds harmonies matching the chords designated with the keys Chords You can change the way harmonies are added with the Melody Intelligence type p 72 Cancelling the Effect 3 Touch the Harmonist type you selected in Step 2 again The Harmonist function is cancelled Touch lt Exit gt to go back to the Vocal Effects screen 47 Chapter 1 Performance O Enabling the start of songs and automatic accompaniment with the sound of your voice Vocal Count In You can start songs and the Automatic Accompaniment by counting into the microphone 1 e Touch lt Vocal Count In gt in Step 2 of How to select Vocal Effect p 43 Vocal Count n 3 J 108 Arranger Start Auto Accompaninent Start Sono Playback 2 Touch lt Arranger gt or lt Song gt Display Explanation Automatic Accompaniment starts at the tempo used for the count Song The song starts at the tempo used for the count 3 Count to four One two three four into the mic Count out the number of beats per measure in the time signature of the selected song or Music Style For example if you select a time signature of 4 4 then count to four count to three when 3 4 time is selected The tempo is automatically set according to the interval between the counts as you speak into the microphone and the song or Arranger begins Touch lt Ex
170. e shown below appears A gt Q pe j 11 NI C A Measure number of the first measure of the segment to be quantized Number of measures to be quantized Track button or part number to be quantized Tr Pt Choosing All quantizes the same passage in all Parts Quantization timing Select one of the following values 1 2 half note 1 4 quarter note Resolution 1 6 quarter note triplet 1 8 eighth note 1 12 eighth note triplet 1 16 sixteenth note 1 24 sixteenth note triplet 1 32 thirty second note When finished with the Quantize settings return to the Song Edit screen 137 Chapter 7 Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs E Deleting Measures Delete You can delete a part of a performance measure by measure When a portion of a performance is deleted the rest of the performance is shifted up to fill the gap Erasing measures in a specified passage is called deleting Ex To delete measures bars 5 8 1 1 gt 1 e 1 1 At Step 3 of Selecting the editing function p 135 select lt Delete gt A screen like the one shown below appears Delete SS SSR S LSE Execute Content Measure number of the first measure of the segment to be deleted Number of measures to be deleted Track button or part number to be deleted When All
171. e to change the intro or prevent the intro from playing Starting without an intro Press the Intro Ending button and watch the indicator go out Now when you play a chord with the keyboard the accompaniment starts without the intro To start with a short intro added On the Basic screen touch the Intro Ending Type lt 2 gt trorEndina Type Now when you specify a chord with the keyboard a short intro is played and the accompaniment starts 66 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment O Starting at the press of a button 1 e Press the Intro Ending button and Start Stop button simultaneously and the indicators lights go out The Sync Start function is cancelled 2 Play a chord on the lower part of keyboard Choose the chord to be played when the accompaniment begins playing 3 Press the Intro Ending button or the Start Stop button When you press the Intro Ending button the intro plays and the accompaniment starts When you press the Start Stop button the accompaniment starts without the intro When you press the Intro Ending button after touching Intro Ending Type lt 2 gt on the Basic screen a short intro plays Chord Tones and Bass Tones When you play the keys in the left hand side of the keyboard while the Start Stop button s indicator is not lit chords play This note is called the Chord Tone and the root of the chord being played at the same time is called the Ba
172. eeeoess 125 Count In settings screen aii 98 Countdown settings screen coommommmmsonossosiincioniacionosso 68 Delete Song Screen uns AE En i 119 Delete Style screens did ea 150 Delete User Program screen cocooonccnnonononnnnnncnnnaanncn nos 125 EMechscre Nai ini 42 Equalizer creada ia 40 ati A ncaa tes A 161 Gente SELECTION screen nte 77 Load User Program sr 124 Marker Screen aqrecoadorprt id 100 Melody Intelligence Screen coonooccccnonnnonnnnninanananancnnnnans 12 Metronome Screen a a N 92 MIDI Sets Screen seben 174 ParbBalance Screen 79 Piano SCHEIN A eked eas 24 26 Program Change Screen seesseseerssseereeseererseererseeressees 174 208 R e Mode SCreert sic 131 Rename SCreeN oeron eE EREE 117 122 149 Reverb screen oria a E E AA 33 a teeta 56 DAWG SONS SOTEER N N 116 Save Style A eadsceansenns 149 Save User Programi Se rt ai 123 SCOE SCTE Hed eee a heat ta naiees oa raecaeitedassee 88 Song Hail Sres 135 song File serena 115 sl O erena EARE 79 Song Selection Screen aara a RS 77 83 Style Composer SCLCCM id 145 Style Conyert r Scree sidad 147 Style Search Screo ssl 64 Style Selechon screen 62 Surround ACCOMP SCTeen pesriosoresa a iran 35 Surround Reverb SCLEEM sissy ennea 37 TOME search screen assi 29 TONE Selecon screen multado N 27 is A uid T 103 User ProStreet 122 Vocal Effects Screen as 43 Write User Programados 122 Search Must lios 64 DONS nd 79 O aaleas Sage dinner onetime Toe eas O S 29 Select
173. een or the Countdown settings screen appears 3 4 Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Metronome screen of each item to make settings E Settings for the Count In gt For detailed information about count in refer to Match the Tempo Before You Begin Playing Count In p 98 Count In Settings ZA Measure Repeat Parame Value Explanation ter Name Count in M eantinanlibaaddes 1 be added sumen ON OFF See ON or not OFF Stick Click Electronic Voice JP Voice ENG Wood Block Triangle Castanets Handclap Animal Specify the count in sound Specify the length number of measures of the count in When Repeat is turned ON on the Marker screen p 102 this specified whether the count in will sound each time the range between the markers is repeated or only the first time Repeat First Every Chapter 9 Various Settings E Settings for the Countdown Other Settings gt For detailed information about count in refer to Having a Count Sound Play at the End of the Intro Countdown p 68 You can change the tuning the language shown on the display and other settings to make the KR easier to use E Procedure 1 Switch to the Basic screen or press the One Touch Countdown Settings Program Piano button 2 Touch lt Functions gt When you touch lt Functions gt on the Basic screen the first page displayed shows the parameter
174. effect is to be applied Press the Surround button and watch the indicator light up Touch lt Surround Accomp gt to display the Surround Accomp screen On the Surround Accomp Screen touch lt Option gt Touch Ss to switch the screen Surround Option SRS _ The effect is applied to all parts played on the keuboard ME The effect is applied to Layer layered part Touch lt All Parts gt or lt Layer Part gt Display Explanation All Parts The effect is applied to all tones played with the keyboard the left hand tone right hand tone and layer tone The effect is applied only to the layer part When not using a layer performance p 30 the Surround effect is not applied to the keyboard performance even if lt Keyboard gt on the Surround Accomp Screen is set to On Layer Part When you touch lt Exit gt you return to the Surround Accomp Screen Chapter 1 Performance E Broadening the Reverb Sound l 2 3 Connect amp or external speaker to the Aux jack You cannot use both Surround Accomp and Advanced 3D simultaneously with Surround Reverb When Surround Accomp is on the Press the Surround button and watch the indicator light up p 35 Touch lt Surround Reverb gt The following Surround Reverb screen appears reverb sound is broadened as well Surround Reverb 3 Surrauri The reverb sounds from the external speaker
175. eights When you select an internal song or music file that includes the lyrics data lt ES appears in the Piano screen or Basic screen Touch this to display the lyrics 26 Chapter 1 Performance Performing with a Variety of Tones Tone Buttons NERD The KR comes with a many built in instrument sounds and effects This lets you For more about the names of enjoy perform in a wide range of musical styles Tones take a look at the Tone The built in sounds are called Tones The sounds are organized into six tone List p 184 groups which are assigned to the Tone buttons OOOOO Piano Organ Guitar Strings Sax Bass Brass 1 e Press any one of the Tone buttons to select a tone group You ll see that button s indicator light up The screen displays the tone names included in the tone group you ve selected Ex rand Pianol i PianoStrings EX Piano Choir PS E This screen is called the Tone selection screen You can touch lt Audition gt for an audio demonstration of a particular tone Touch to switch the screen and display the next selection You can touch lt Effects gt to add effect sounds to a variety of tones p 42 You can touch lt Search gt to find tones according to the search criteria you specify p 29 2 Touch a tone name to select the tone You ll hear the tone you ve selected when you play the keyboard You can
176. elect the part to be recorded or the part whose settings are to be changed The button for the selected part changes color Z 1434dpy This Part to be played back The Part not to be played back Muted Part Parts that do not have performance data recorded to them Solo Only the selected Part is played back This allows you to prevent the sound for the selected part from playing The performance data for the selected part is Clear deleted This displays the Part Settings screen in which you can make detailed settings for each part For details refer to p 128 127 N da Q les Q Le U Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs Icon Explanation Tone Set The Tone Set screen appears For details refer to p 129 E Modifying the Settings of Each Part You can change the Tones and volume as well as mute the playback for each individual part in songs recorded with the 16 track Sequencer and the internal songs gt Because commercially available Roland SMF music files are also made up of 16 Parts you can change the settings for the individual Parts and play them back in the same way First select the song for which the settings are to be made p 77 1 Display the 16 track Sequencer screen p 127 2 Touch the screen to choose the Part for which you want to make settings Change the settings for the selected Part Solo Only the selected Part is played back Toggles playback of
177. en new sounds are recorded you ll find that you can record songs easily by using this method in combination with other recording methods Replace Recording p 131 This is the normal method for recording New material is recorded as previously recorded material is erased Mix Recording p 131 New notes are recorded on top of notes previously recorded This convenient feature makes it easy for you to record melodies over prerecorded accompaniment Loop Recording p 132 Specified measures are recorded repeatedly while new notes are combined with existing music A convenient feature for creating rhythm parts Loop Recording allows you to record over and over within a selected segment adding a different percussion sound with each pass Punch in Recording p 133 You can re record only a specified passage as you listen to a recorded performance gt Immediately after the power is turned on Replace Recording is selected Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs Changing the Recording Method 1 Press the Menu button The Menu screen appears Composer Menu SS Chon ae coe a Stule artes 2 Touch lt Rec Mode gt A Rec Mode screen like the following appears Rec Mode SSS l Arranger Sto P Rec Stop 3 Touch lt Rec Mode gt t to select the recording mode come Recording Method Replace Recording Recording Mix Recording Loop Loop Recording
178. eproduction of the original performance may be unobtainable when using GS devices other than Roland Pianos and Music Players Touch lt Save gt or lt As SMF gt to start saving The resulting file format will be different depending on whether lt Save gt or lt As SMPF gt is chosen as described below Display Explanation Saves the song in this unit s format You can listen to songs saved in this format on the Roland HP G R series and KR series keyboards as well as on Roland MT series devices This format is called i format Saves the song as an SMF Standard MIDI Files Songs saved in this SMF format can be listened to on many instruments that can Save As SMF play SMF music files p 201 A song recorded using commercial music files can t be saved in Save As SMF format for reasons of copyright protection The time required for saving ranges from several seconds to half a minute or more Don t take the floppy disk out of the disk drive until the saving process is finished Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Song File screen You can only save songs in one format on a single floppy disk Never turn off the power while the saving operation is in progress Doing so will damage the KR s internal memory making it unusable NEP It s a good idea to get into the habit of moving the write protect tab on the floppy disk to the Protect position when you ve finished saving your data Keeping t
179. eration format You can play back any XG music files using an XGlite tone generator However keep in mind that some music files may play back differently compared to the original files due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects 201 gt o 0 3 a A O N DIGITAL PIANO Date Dec 1 2002 Model KR 17 15 MIDI Implementation Chart Version 1 00 Function Basic Default 16 Channel Changed iG 6 Default Mode 3 Mode 3 Messages x Mode 3 4 M 1 Altered kkkkkkkkkkkk kxk Note l 15 113 Number True Voice kkkkkkkkkkkkkk l Note ON Velocity Note OFF x 8n v 64 After Key s Touch Ch s Pitch Bend Bank select Modulation Portamento time Data entry Volume Panpot Expression Hold 1 Portamento Sostenuto Soft Portamento control Reverb Effect depth Chorus Effect3 depth 98 99 NRPN LSB MSB 100 101 RPN LSB MSB Prog 0 127 Change True ity ene ee 127 o number 1 128 Song Pos System Song Sel X X Common Tune xX X Control Change 0000000000000000 a 0000000000000000 PO System Clock Real Time Commands All sound off A Reset all controllers UX Local Control Message All Notes OFF Active Sense Reset xOxXxxx x O 1 Ox is selectable by SysEx 2 Recognized as M 1 even if Mx1 Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO O Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO X No 202 Main Specifications ee ou CO
180. ers 4 Touch lt Exit gt The User Program screen returns to the display Touch lt Write gt to save the setting to the User Program For more detailed information refer to Saving Performance Settings User Program p 122 Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts 16 Track Sequencer Multitrack recording always you to listen to previously recorded material while continuing to add performances of other parts The KR is capable of multitrack recording of up to sixteen parts Since each part s performance is recorded using one tone you can layer performances using up to sixteen tones for the data in one song The function used to layer these sixteen parts one at a time is called the 16 Track Sequencer 16 Track Sequencer You can record performances for up to 16 parts overlaying them part by part to create a single song Part 1 Flute Part rt 2 Fiano Pan ight and 16 Track Sequencer and Track Buttons In addition to the 16 Track Sequencer function the Track Buttons p 99 are another of the unit s playing recording functions These five Track buttons are used for organizing the 16 Track Sequencer s sixteen parts This allows you to use the 16 Track Sequencer to add more sounds to performances recorded with the Track buttons and make even more detailed edits of the songs You can easily play back the original song data with t
181. est hits Pressing the Score Display button lets you display not only the score for any of the internal songs but for your own recorded songs and songs on floppy disks With the Music Assistant button you can select a song you want to play call up Automatic Accompaniment settings that match that song and while looking at the chord score perform with accompaniment added Thanks to the Select Various Tones button which is used to select suggested Tones from the more than 600 internal Tones the Song Stylist button which allows you to listen to a variety of arrangements of the internal popular songs and transform them into rock jazz or other forms of music and the Session Partner button which lets you leave the chords and rhythm to the backing band and give your performances the feel of a group session you can enjoy playing the KR in a great variety of creative ways Introduction O A Variety of Support Functions for Fostering Rich Musical 10 Abilities You can use the DigiScore feature which lets you specify the information to be shown in the score display including notes fingerings and even a bouncing ball that keeps the rhythm for the current performance You can have specified segments be repeated allowing you to practice the part over as you like easily play back and record each hand separately and enjoy a number of other handy practice features available only with digital pianos Other use
182. etal Pad Halo Pad Sweep Pad Ice Rain Soundtrack Crystal Syn Mallet Atmosphere Brightness Goblin Echo Drops Star Theme Sitar Banjo Shamisen Koto Kalimba Bagpipe Fiddle Shanai Tinkle Bell Agogo Steel Drums Woodblock Taiko Melo Tom 1 Synth Drum ReverseCym Fret Noise BreathNoise Seashore Bird Telephone 1 Helicopter Applause Gun Shot Tone with a symbol appended to their name may not play back satisfactorily on other GS sound generating devices gt o 0 3 a A O N 185 N 0 O Q Q Q lt Em No sound EXC will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number 186 Falamenco HC Falamenco HC Bongo Cowbell Falamenco HC Falamenco HC Bongo Cowbell Falamenco HC Falamenco HC Bongo Cowbell POP Set ROCK Set JAZZ BRUSH Set VOX DRUM Set at R amp B Snare R amp B Snare R amp B Snare R amp B Snare 23 22 Rock Snare Pop Snare m Pop Snare m Rock Snare Rock Snare Pop Snare m Pop Snare m Rock Snare 24 re Pop Snare m Pop Snare m Pop Snare m Pop Snare m 25 Pop Snare Ghost Pop Snare Ghost Pop Snare Ghost Pop Snare Ghost 26 Pop Snare m Pop Snare m Pop Snare m Pop Snare m 27 Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap aas 707 Claps 707 Claps 707 Claps 707 Claps Espa Hand Clap EXC7 Hand Clap EXC7 Hand Clap EXC7 Hand Clap EXC7 30 Hand Clap2 EXC7 Hand Clap2 EXC7 Hand C
183. ete file Are you sure Touch lt OK gt The selected Style is deleted If you touch lt Cancel gt the Style won t be deleted Never turn off the power while the operation is in progress Doing so will damage the KR s internal memory making it unusable Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles Copying Styles on Floppy Disks to the User Memory You can take User Styles saved on floppy disks and copy them to user memory You can also take User Styles saved in user memory and copy them to floppy disks 1 Insert the floppy disk with the Style to be copied in the disk drive 2 Press the User button A User Style screen like the following appears O New Style l User Stule 1 2 User Style 2 If the User Style screen is not displayed touch lt User Disk gt in the lower part of the screen 3 Touch lt File gt 4 Touch lt Copy gt A Copy Style screen like the following appears Copy Stule 3 E Disk 5 Touch lt Disk gt to copy When All is selected all of the Styles on the floppy disk are copied to user memory Specifying the Copy Destination 6 Touch lt User gt for the Style j to select the copy destination If a Style name is displayed a style is already saved to that number If you select a number with a previously saved Style and then copy to that number the previously saved Style is deleted If you do not want to
184. evice 6 Adjust the volume level on the KR and the connected device Recording KR Performances on a Recording Device 7 Start recording with the connected device 8 Play the keyboard 9 When the performance ends stop recording on the connected equipment Playing Audio Equipment Sounds Through the Speakers on the KR Output R L al 5 Bottom of the KR 6 2 1 Turn the volume all the way down on the KR and on the device you re about to connect 2 Turn off the power to the KR and other connected equipment 3 Use audio cables sold separately to make the connection 4 Turn on the connected equipment Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices 5 Turn on the KR 6 Adjust the volume level on the KR and the connected device After use turn off the power using the following procedure l Turn the volume all the way down on the KR and on the device you re about to connect 2 Turn off the KR 3 Turn off the connected equipment E Changing the Aux Jack Settings Aux Out 1 Switch to the Basic screen or press the One Touch Program Piano button 2 Touch lt Functions gt When you touch lt Functions gt on the Basic screen the first page displayed shows the parameters for the Automatic Accompaniment settings p 155 When you touch lt Functions gt on the Piano screen the parameters for the piano performance settings continue into the second page p 152 3 T
185. ft Ballad 12 8 Ballad Chapel Crystal Piano Latin Piano Waltz ClasiclPolka PianoClasic1 PianoClasic2 Guitar Bossa Gtr Fast Pop Guitar Waltz Harp Strings P Pop 1 P Classic 1 P Slow Waltz P Night P Bossa Nova P Pop 2 P Ragtime P Stride P Concerto 1 P Classic 2 P Ballad 1 P Ballad 2 P Swing Pop P Rock nRoll P Waltz P Concerto 2 P Concerto 3 P Swing P Shuffle P Boogie P Slow Swing P 50s Rock P Latin Oldies Country Rock n Roll1 Oldies 1 Rock n Roll2 Cntry Dreams CountryBalad HonkyTonkin Slow Dance Twist Surf fun Country Gtr Slow Oldies OldtimeCntry Rock n Roll3 JB Soul Blues D Country Twostep Country 50s R amp B Summer Days Oldies 2 Cajun Train Beat CountryWaltz PianoRagtime Charleston Bluegrass CountrySwing Country Song P Country Gt Arpeggio Outlaw Big Band Swing Smooth Jazz LooseBigBand Scat Swing 2 Fast Swing Jazzy Choir Organ Swing Big Serenade Big Band Big Band Pop Medium Swing A Cappella Stride Piano Dixie Jazz Waltz Dixieland Brush Swing Jazz Quintet Hula Hawaiian Cool Swing Scat Swing 1 Slow Swing Piano Jazz Swing in Foxtrot 1 Foxtrot 2 Boogie Piano Boogie PianoShuffle Gospel Latin Rhumba 1 Salsa Trad Tango GospelBallad Gospel Soft Gospel Mambo 1 Latin Festa ModernChaCha Gospel Shout Gospel Pop P Gospel Anthem Revival Samba 1 Samba 2 BossaNova 1 BossaNova 2 BossaNova 3 Fast Bossa Slow Bossa LatinTrumpet
186. ful practice features include a Replay pedal that you can press to stop the performance and go back when you have trouble with what you re playing and Touch the Note a function that lets you confirm how a note sounds by touching the note on the screen Features geared specifically for young children include Wonderland where kids can enjoy touching a variety of instruments and the Game an ear training feature which helps build their listening abilities with all the fun of a game Connector for External Display of Enlarged Scores and Lyrics The KR features a built in connector for external displays By displaying scores and lyrics on a bigger screen everyone playing in your group should be able to get a clear view Superior Player Piano Function Only Instrument Equipped with Moving Key The KR includes an automatic Moving Key function that actually moves the keys while playing songs Use the CD drive to play the enclosed CD and CDs for automatic player pianos as well as audio CDs You can also connect an external display for a more expanded view of your work and use the remote control to select start and stop songs Connect to External Speakers for Concert Hall Presence Connect external speakers amps or other devices to the KR Then play the reverb or accompaniment sounds through the external speaker and experience the sensation of being surrounded by an orchestra Color Screen Makes Operation Ea
187. g Rerecording the accompaniment part of automatic accompaniment 6 When rerecording an Automatic Accompaniment performance set Sync Start p 66 then specify a chord or press the Start Stop button Press the m Play Stop button to stop recording If you also want to rerecord the ending of the Automatic Accompaniment press the Intro Ending button NERO Recorded performances are recorded to lt 0 Song Name gt NERO When you want to record over again after deleting all of the previous recording refer to Erasing Recorded Performances p 112 NERO The song tempo is stored within the song you selected If you want to change the tempo of the recorded song refer to Changing the Tempo of Recorded Songs p 142 and Changing the Tempo Within the Song p 142 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Erasing Recorded Performances You can use the following method to delete a recorded performance 1 e Hold down the Select Listen to a Song button and press the O Rec button A screen like the one shown below appears OK to delete Sono Are you sure 2 Touch lt OK gt This deletes the recorded song When you touch lt Cancel gt the previous screen appears and the recorded song is not erased E Erasing the Performance on Specific Tracks You can select and erase performances on specific tracks 1 e Hold down the Track button
188. g appears SS SF Write User Prooran 5 122 Determining the name of the User Programs 4 Touch lt Rename gt A Rename screen like the following appears When you touch the icon for the character to be input the character appears of the cursor potion For example touching the lt ABC gt icon in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group A gt B gt CA Each touch of lt A a 0 gt cycles the type of characters through English upper case English lower case IN Ml numerals symbols then back to English upper case When you touch lt Del gt the character at the cursor position is deleted When you touch lt Ins gt a space is inserted at the cursor position 5 When you have finished with the name touch lt Exit gt You re returned to the Write User Program screen Determining the write destination 6 Touch to select the write destination number 7 Touch lt Write gt The confirmation message appears 8 Touch lt OK gt The current performance settings are saved to the User Program button Never turn off the power while the display indicates lt Writing gt Doing so will damage the KR s internal memory making it unusable gt You can restore the content registered to the User Program button to the original factory settings Refer to Restoring the Factory Setting
189. g the SCOle c scat ot 88 Touching Notes to Confirm the Sounds Touch the Notes 89 Making Detailed Settings for the Score Display 90 Saving Scores as Image Data ni enno aI AENT 91 Practicing Songs with the Practice Function 0 0 cece 92 Ad stne the LEO aa 95 Setting the Tempo by Pressing the Button in Time Chap Lempa a 96 Use Your Voice to Select the Tempo Vocal Tap Tempo 97 Playing Back at a Fixed Tempo Tempo Mute 97 Match the Tempo Before You Begin Playing Count In 98 Muting Some Parts Before Playing Track Buttons ocoo o 99 Setting Markers for Repeated Practice Marker cee 100 Placing a Marker within a SONB ccconcnnnnonnnnnnnninninninnnanicnncnnano 100 Playback from a Marker Location cccoioicnonininnnnnonincnnnninnnnncnnss 101 Erasing a Marker didas tds 101 Movie a Marker ossia ieis inaia E R EA 101 Playing Back the Same Passage Over and Ovet 0c008 102 Transposing Keyboard Sounds and Songs Played Back TWAT IS POSI A A 103 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance 105 Recording a New Song New Song eccccccoccccnncncnnnncnncnanacnnrncincnnnnos 106 Recording With AccoMpadiMeN E ccconcnicnncnicnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnncnnannnns 108 Recording Along with a SONM8 invada aiii bad 110 Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons Redone Recortes iia 111 Erasing Recorded PerfOrmanctes ssnsenconoias nsonoinaias nsanonaciasinnanonaca n 112 E
190. gle Open Triangle Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause EXC1 EXC1 EXC1 EXC2 EXC3 EXC3 EXC4 EXC4 EXC5 EXC5 EXC6 EXC6 GS ROOM Set Bar Chime Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Sticks Square Click Metronome Click Metronome Bell Std Kick 2 Std Kick 1 Side Stick Snare Drum 1 Hand Clap Snare Drum 2 Room Low Tom 2 Closed Hi hat 1 Room Low Tom 1 Pedal Hi hat 1 Room Mid Tom 2 Open Hi hat 1 Room Mid Tom 1 Room Hi Tom 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Room Hi Tom 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibra slap Ride Cymbal 2 High Bongo Low Bongo Mute High Conga Open High Conga Low Conga High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Cabasa Maracas Short Hi Whistle Long Low Whistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block Mute Cuica Open Cuica Mute Triangle Open Triangle Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo EXC7 EXC7 EXC1 EXC1 EXC1 EXC2 EXC3 EXC3 EXC4 EXC4 EXC5 EXC5 EXC6 EXC6 GS BRUSH Set Bar Chime Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Sticks Square Click Metronome Click Metronome Bell Std Kick 2 Std Kick 1 Side Stick Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Low Tom 2 Closed Hi hat 1 Low Tom 1 Pedal Hi hat 1 Mid To
191. gt m Play Stop button The indicators for the Rec and m Play Stop buttons both light up then after two measures of the count sound recording begins Without performing anything record only the required number of measures then press the gt m Play Stop button The indicators for the Rec and m Play Stop buttons both go out and recording stops 2 In the Rec Mode screen p 131 select lt Loop gt Touch lt Exit gt to return to the menu screen The recording method changes to loop recording 3 Press the O Rec button 4 Press the Track button for the track to be recorded The KR is put in recording standby 132 5 Press the gt Play Stop button to begin recording Recording starts from Marker A When the song reaches Marker B it then returns to Marker A where recording continues Each time the recording is looped the newest sounds are layered over previously recorded sounds 6 When you press the gt Play Stop button recording stops After you have finished with loop recording return to the usual replace recording mode p 131 Loop Recording Shortcut You can also use the method described below to set Loop Recording 1 Place A and B markers at the beginning and end of the passage you want to record Take a look at Setting Markers for Repeated Practice Marker p 100 If you haven t recorded anything
192. h The power will turn on and the Power indicator at the left front of the KR will light After a few seconds you will be able to play the keyboard to produce sound Use the Volume knob to adjust the volume This unit is equipped with a protection circuit A brief interval a few seconds after power up is required before the unit will operate normally oOo e 7 Power Roland Co AL Ese O ae Ss AA AA ATA ATA AAA O E o moo Power Indicator To turn the power off turn the Volume knob all the way to the left and press the Power switch The Power indicator at the left front of the KR will go dark and the power will be turned off Ifyou need to turn off the power completely first turn off the POWER switch then unplug the power cord from the power outlet Refer to Power Supply p 6 About the Pedals The pedals have the following functions and are used mainly for piano performance Soft Pedal Damper Pedal Sostenuto Pedal Damper pedal right pedal While this pedal is pressed notes will be sustained even after you take your fingers off the keys On an acoustic piano holding down the damper pedal will allow the remaining strings to resonate in sympathy with the sounds that you played from the keyboard adding a rich resonance The KR simulates this sympathetic resonance NERO You can change the amount of resonance applied with the damper pedal P
193. he 16 Track Sequencer screen Recording the performance 4 Press the ma Reset button Recording will start at the beginning of the song If you want to record from a point other than the beginning use the lt q Bwd and gt gt Fwad buttons to select another measure to begin 5 Press the Rec button and watch the indicator is light up The KR is put in recording standby 6 Press the m Play Stop button A two bar count in sounds then recording starts You cannot use the performance pads when recording with the 16 track sequencer 7 Press the m Play Stop button Recording stops When one part is recorded continue by selecting and recording another part Continue layering parts to finish recording the song gt You only need to follow the procedure described in Step 1 Prepare for Recording when you re recording the first Part For the second Part and after you can skip step 1 and proceed from Step 2 Start Recording Any performance that has been recorded is deleted when the power to the KR is turned off It is a good idea to save song data to a floppy disk or user memory For more information refer to Saving Songs p 116 130 Changing the Recording Method Rec Mode You can use any of the four methods below to record with the KR Although you will normally be using Replace Recording where previously recorded material is erased wh
194. he markers range by touching lt Prev gt or lt Next gt Accomp Original Tempo A Little Slower Slower Much Slower On Quiet Off Selects the practice tempo When On is selected song accompaniment parts are also played back When Quiet is selected song accompaniment parts are played back at a lower volume When Off is selected song accompaniment parts are muted Do Re Mi Original Selects the tone played when the notes are touched When Original is selected a original tone for the song is selected When Do Re Mi Voice is selected the notes are sung as Do Re Mi Score Keyboard Selects whether the score display or the keyboard display is used in demonstrating the example performance and your own recorded performance in the Check screen 2 Touch the icon for the parameter you want to set The selections appear 3 Touch the setting icon Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to set each of the parameters Set the tempo practice range and other variables to the values you prefer 4 Touch lt Audition gt The practice range is played back using the selected settings 5 e Touch lt Exit gt You re returned to the Practice screen 94 MEM When the Transpose function p 103 is set to ON the original tone plays even if Tone is set to Do Re Mi Chapter 4 Practice Functions Adjusting the Tempo This changes the song
195. he 16 Track Sequencer mute parts by pressing the Track buttons and more The Track buttons correspond to 16 track sequencer parts as shown below raci n Pa Since the 16 Track Sequencer records one tone to one part you cannot use Layer performance p 30 Split performance p 31 or other such functions to record two or more tones simultaneously Also you can t record the performance with Automatic Accompaniment When you want to record with Automatic Accompaniment then you should use the Track buttons for recording Refer to Recording With Accompaniment p 108 Commercially Available Music Files Commercially available song file recorded in Roland s SMF format is also composed of sixteen parts By loading the song file from the floppy disk and using the 16 Track Sequencer you can then also edit the song file gt Although with commercially available Roland SMF music data Part 11 is included in the 2 Bass Accomp track button other tracks match to the corresponding Track buttons With some commercially available music files you cannot edit the data E The 16 Track Sequencer Screen When recording with 16 track Sequencer display the 16 track Sequencer screen 1 Press the Menu button The Menu screen appears 2 Touch lt 16trk Sequencer gt A 16 track Sequencer screen like the one shown below appears 2138 EiGrand Pianol Icon Explanation Touch to s
196. he keyboard p 72 30 Tone buttons Select the Tones that will be played from the keyboard p 27 Record Playback Reset Play Stop Panel Descriptions 3334353637 39 Record Playback 31 Menu button You can select functions for playing back recording or editing a song p 127 p 144 32 Track buttons Used to play back or record each track of a song p 99 p 111 33 Reset button Resets the song playback start location to the beginning of the song 34 gt 8 Play Stop button Starts and stops playback or recording a song 35 Rec button When pressed this button places the instrument in recording standby p 106 p 127 36 lt lt Bwd button Rewinds the song 37 gt gt Fwd button Fast forwards the song 38 Transpose button Transposes the pitch of the keyboard or the song being played p 103 39 Vocal Effect Button Applies a variety of effects to vocals from the microphone p 43 40 Disk Drive You can insert a floppy disk for playing back or saving songs p 77 p 116 41 Eject Button Ejects a floppy disk from the disk drive p 114 13 Panel Descriptions Bottom Panel Expression Pedal 1 AC Inlet Connect the included power cable to this inlet p 20 2 Input jacks These jacks can be connected to another sound generating device or an audio device so that the sound of that device will be output from the KR
197. he keys only the tone indicated on the screen is sounded NERD You can change the split point refer to Changing the Keyboard s Split Point Split Point p 156 NEP When you select an internal song or music file that includes the lyrics data lt EE appears in the Basic screen Touch this to display the lyrics NEP When you touch Octave lt gt lt gt in the tone selection screen the pitch of the keyboard s sound is changed in octave units To learn more see Shifting the Keyboard Pitch in Octave Steps Octave Shift p 32 NEP You can change the volume balance between the left and right hand parts of the keyboard refer to Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Performance Part Part Balance p 75 31 Chapter 1 Performance Turning On Layer and Split Performance Simultaneously Turning on both layer performance and split performance allows you to split the keyboard into two sections while playing two layered Tones in the right hand part J 108 E New Sono E Shifting the Keyboard Pitch in Octave Steps Octave Shift 32 When using layer performance p 30 or split performance p 31 you can change the pitch of the keyboard s sound in octave units This function is called Octave Shift For example when using a layer performance you can change the pitch of each sound and layer the sounds You can make the pitch of the keyboard s left hand
198. he previously recorded song the song will be recorded at the first recorded tempo Please erase the previously recorded song before you re record p 112 Any performance that has been recorded is deleted when the power to the KR is turned off or a song is selected A performance cannot be restored once it s been deleted Be sure to save it on a floppy disk or User Memory before you turn off the power p 116 Error Messages Indica tion To protect the copyright this music file cannot be F Emeron saved as an M Also the music file can not be saved If you want to save it please save on the same floppy disk You can only read the music file It can not be saved Error 01 on a floppy disk or user memory The protect tab on the floppy disk is set to the Eroa Protec position p 6 Change it to the Write position Repeat the procedure This floppy disk cannot store the format or save any Error 03 data Insert a different disk and repeat the procedure The data cannot be saved onto this floppy disk Error 04 because the format is different Use the floppy disk in the same format A new song cannot be written on this song Select a Error 05 different song number or use a different floppy disk and repeat the procedure No disk is connected to the disk drive Error 10 Insert the disk correctly and repeat the procedure There is not sufficient space left on the floppy disk odds or User memory for the
199. he song tempo is stored within the song you selected Only drum sets or SFX set are recorded to the R Rhythm button Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Listening to the recorded performance Z Press the a Reset button then press the m Play Stop button The recorded performance is played back When you press the gt m Play Stop button recording stops Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons Redoing Recordings 3 When you want to re record specify the Track button for the performance you want to re record and then record again When you select a previously recorded Track button and re record everything from the point at which you begin recording up to the point where you stop recording will be replaced by the newly re recorded performance Use the lt q Bwd and gt Fwd buttons to go to the measure where you want to begin recording Press the Rec button A screen like the one shown below appears Do you want to record a new song or add on to the current song Add On iL NewSono Touch lt Add on gt Press the Track button for the track you want to re record The indicator for the selected Track button starts blinking The m Play Stop buttons indicator flashes and the KR is put in recording standby To cancel recording press the Rec button once more Press the m Play Stop button to begin recordin
200. he tab at Protect prevents operations that could erase your songs by mistake Depending on the playback instrument some notes may drop out or sound different Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Deleting Saved Songs This deletes songs that have been saved on floppy disks or to Favorites To delete a song on a floppy disk first insert the floppy disk in the disk drive Press the Disk button Touch lt File gt The Song File screen appears Touch lt Delete gt A Delete Song screen appears Delete Sono SoS Touch lt Disk gt or lt Favorites gt Touch lt Disk gt if you are deleting a song from a floppy disk touch lt Favorites gt if you are deleting a song from Favorites Touch to select the song to be deleted Touch lt Delete gt A screen like the one shown below appears OK to delete file Are you sure Touching lt Cancel gt cancels the operation Touch lt OK gt Never turn off the power The selected song is deleted l l l l l e while the operation is in Do not eject the floppy disk from the disk drive until the operation is finished progress Doing so will Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Song File screen damage the KR s internal memory making it unusable 119 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Copying Songs on Floppy Disks to Favorites eS gt You can take songs saved on floppy
201. hestrator lt User Programs gt Q9 ON Floppy Disk Max 99 sets lt Rhythm Partner gt Metronome Rhythm Quarter note 20 250 2 2 0 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 3 8 6 8 9 8 12 8 10 levels Tempo Beat Volume Metronome Pattern 11 patterns Metronome Sound Rhythm Pattern 8 types 59 patterns lt Composer gt Tracks 5 tracks 16 tracks 1 song Note Storage Approx 30 000 notes Resolution 120 ticks per quarter note Recording Method Realtime Replace Mix Auto Punch In Manual Punch In Loop Tempo Step Chord Sequencer Beat Map Copy Quantize Delete Insert Erase Transpose Part Exchange Note Edit PC Edit Song Select Reset Play Stop Rec Bwd Fwd All Song Play Random Play Track Select Count in Control Countdown Playback Balance Marker Set Repeat Tempo Mute Touch the Notes Replay Select Various Tones Song Stylist Session Partner Wonderland Game Quick Tour Other Functions Audition Panel Lock gt Ke E 0 3 a A O N N O GQ N 0 O Q Q Q lt Main Specifications NU Sud LO KIN e E lt Disk Drive Disk Storage gt 3 5 inch Micro Floppy Disk Disk Format 720 K bytes 2DD 1 44 M bytes 2HD Fies Max 99 songs Max 99 User Styles Max 99 User Program Sets Note Storage Approx 120 000 notes 2DD Approx 240 000 notes 2HD Song Standard MIDI Files Format 0 1 Roland Original Format i Format Music Style M
202. his is not effective with the internal songs 1 Press the Menu button The Menu screen appears Touch J to switch the screens 2 Touch lt Track Assign gt A screen like the one shown below appears ZERE Track Assion 2 5 3 Touch Rd t to select the setting Display Explanation The part assigned to each track will be determined automatically depending on the song data Part 1 will be assigned to the right hand 2 1 Part track part 2 to the left hand track and part 3 to the user track Part 4 will be assigned to the right hand 3 4 Part track part 3 to the left hand track and part 1 to the user track 4 Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Menu screen After changing this setting try selecting the song once again For more detailed information about selecting a song refer to Playing a Song p 77 Chapter 9 Various Settings Changing the CD Settings E Synchronizing the Timing of the Piano and Accompaniment With certain CDs designed to be used with the player function the timing of the piano and accompaniment sounds may not be synchronized However you can synchronize the piano and accompaniment 1 Press the Menu button The Menu screen appears 2 Touch lt CD gt A screen like the one shown below appears fp 2 3 Touch the lt Sync gt slider to adjust the timing of the piano sound 4 Touch lt Exit gt to go back to the Menu screen
203. ic screen the first page displayed shows the parameters for the Automatic Accompaniment settings p 155 When you touch lt Functions gt on the Piano screen the parameters for the piano performance settings continue into the second page p 152 3 Touch lt Moving Key gt Movino Key A to turn the setting ON or OFF Display Keyboard Function 4 Touch ON o The keys play along with the performance OFF The keys do not move 5 Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Functions screen NERO You can also select lt Moving Key gt from the Menu screen 1 Press the Menu button The Menu screen appears 2 Touch lt Moving Key gt The Moving Key screen appears 168 E Changing the Part That Makes the Keys Move Using the Track Buttons to Choose the Part That Makes the Keys Move Upon power up the instrument is set so the keys move along with the performances of the Whole Upper and Lower tracks You can choose a different part to make the keys move by pressing the Track buttons and changing the buttons that are lighted 1 Choose the song to play p 77 2 Press the Track button you want to have associated with key movement a number of times until the button s light is flashing Each time you press a Track button its light changes to the next state in this order lighted gt extinguished gt flashing gt lighted gt The following shows the relationship between
204. iety of actions just by touching the screen lightly The touch screen is operated by touching it lightly with your finger Pressing hard or using a hard object can damage the touch screen Be careful not to press too hard and be sure to use only your fingers to operate the touch screen The positioning of the touch screen may become displaced due to changes in the surrounding environment and over time If this happens follow the steps in Calibrating the Touch Screen Touch Screen p 165 to correct the pointer position Do not place items on the touch screen E Adjusting the Contrast of the Screen To adjust the contrast of the screen turn the Contrast knob located at the right side of the screen Song Collection Select Listen to a Song Disk 24 Main Screens E Piano Screen Immediately after the power is turned on the Piano screen like the one below is displayed For details refer to p 26 4 4 E Basic Screen The following screen is called Basic screen Song name or Tempo Music Style name Beat Measure The Tone names are selected appear These information are displayed when you use the automatic accompaniment You can usually display this screen by touching lt Exit gt several times Follow either of the procedures described below to display it e Press the One Touch Program Arranger button The Basic screen appears and the settings are made for automatic a
205. iginal color and the layer performance is cancelled Now when you play the keys only the tone indicated on the screen is sounded 30 Chapter 1 Performance Playing Different Tones with the Left and Right Hands Split Dividing the keyboard into right hand and left hand areas then playing different sounds in each section is called split performance The boundary key is called the split point The split point key is included in the left hand keyboard area Each time power to the keyboard is turned on the split point is reset to F 3 Split Point Acoustic Bass At the Basic screen touch lt Split gt 2 108 E New Sono Acoustic Bs Grand Pianol qa Functions of the keyboard and the tone indicated at the left of the screen is played in the left hand section of the keyboard Here the tone appearing at the right part of the display is called the right hand tone and the tone appearing at the left part of the display is called the left hand tone Changing the Tones 2 3 4 Touch the name of the tone to be changed The tone name will be highlighted in orange Press a Tone button to select the tone p 27 When you have selected the tone touch lt Exit gt The display returns to the Basic screen Cancelling the Split 3 Touch lt Split gt The lt Split gt icon returns to the original color and the split performance is cancelled When you play t
206. iment in a performance sounds are not produced by playing the left hand part of the keyboard When you touch the lt Lower gt icon you can have Tones from the left side of the keyboard play simultaneously with the Automatic Accompaniment 1 e Press the One Touch Program Arranger button This sets the Automatic Accompaniment 2 On the Basic screen touch lt Lower gt Now when you play a chord in the left hand keyboard area the notes you play will sound and the accompaniment chord changes 4 127 GB Funky Disco e brand Pianol as Stopping the sound in the left hand 3 Touch lt Lower gt The lt Lower gt icon returns to the original color and the left hand Tones stop playing 73 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Playing the Piano with Accompaniment Added Piano Style Arranger Usually with Automatic Accompaniment you play chords on the left hand side of the keyboard and the melody on the right hand side Chords can also be recognized over the entire keyboard allowing you to perform using Automatic Accompaniment without splitting the keyboard This function is called Piano Style Arranger This makes it possible to add an accompaniment automatically as you play a song by playing chords in the ordinary way without giving any thought to the location of a keyboard split 1 e Press the One Touch Program Arranger button 2 Touch lt Split gt to turn the Split function off 4 127 Funk
207. iment stops E T E Please refer to Changing the Keyboard s Split Point Split Point p 156 59 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment E About Chords A chord is produced when several notes are played simultaneously Chords are indicated by the pitch of the fundamental note of the chord the root and the chord type which is determined by the other notes of the chord For example the C m chord is expressed in terms of the root note C and the chord type m minor C m is made up of the three notes C Eb and G C m is indicated as the chord name on the Basic screen Chord Type E Root Note O Root Note All chord roots are indicated as a letter sometimes with f or b added and correspond to the notes shown below DAD E en Fey i ia Fi MO E Playing Chords with Simple Fingering Chord Intelligence Chord Intelligence is a feature that chooses the accompaniment chords the moment you play a key To play a C chord for example you normally have to play the three keys C E and G But with Chord Intelligence you only have to press the C key to start a C chord accompaniment e How to play chords in the Chord Intelligence mode Major Ex C Play the chord root Seventh Ex C7 Play the root and MIJAS the second key above it Major Seventh Ex C maj 7 Play the root and the first key below it 60 Minor Ex Cm Play
208. in part from actual screens and colors e On screen text is enclosed in angled brackets lt gt as in lt Exit gt e The act of lightly contacting the Touch Screen with your finger is called touching e An asterisk or a at the beginning of a paragraph indicates a note or precaution These should not be ignored e p refers to pages within the manual Panel Descriptions The panel diagrams shown in this owner s manual are those of the KR 17 oo Son Sa E A as an C3 O O OOO OOO O O O O O Que a a Song C Game Part Balance A Style Phrase User Pop Ballad Oldies BigBand Latin Trad Metronome Rhythm gt S rround Reyerb Equalizer Orchestrator Function Rock Acoustic Country Swing Gospel Kids Disk Balance Performance Pad Rhythm Partner OC Stylist User Intro Start Volume Brilliance Program Basic Advanced 1 Advanced 2 Full To Variation To Original Ending Stop C Ors Assistant Accomp e Keyboard Fill In Sync Tempo KR Desi INTELLIGENT IANO Power switch Pressed to switch the power on and off p 21 The KR 15 s Power switch is positioned to the left of the keyboard Volume knob Adjusts the overall volume p 22 Brilliance knob Adjusts the brightness of the sound p 22 Wonderland Game button Here you can learn about instruments while having fun See the Quick Start Balance 5 Part Balance button This adjusts the relative volume levels of each
209. ing from among the Rhythm Bass Accompaniment 1 Accompaniment 2 and Accompaniment 3 parts in different Styles This function is called the Style Composer You can only combine the KR s built in Styles Displaying the Style Composer Screen 1 Press the Menu button The Menu screen appears Composer Menu 2 Touch lt Style Composer gt Ifa User Style has already been recorded a message like the one shown below appears OK to delete Stule Touch lt Cancel gt to return to the Menu screen Save User Styles to floppy disks or to user memory p 149 When you touch lt OK gt the previously recorded User Style is deleted and a new User Style is created Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles A Style Composer screen like the one shown below appears All Clear Deletes all of the settings You can mute the sound of particular Parts in specific Divisions For more information take a look at Muting Parts for a particular division p 145 Deletes the Styles in selected parts The Part Settings screen is displayed allowing you to make detailed settings to each part For more information take a look at Editing the volume and effect settings for each Part p 146 Records the created Style to the Music Style User button Touch this when you have finished creating the Style Selecting the Styles assigned to each part 3 Touch the part to be set
210. ings p 41 Low frequency range This is the range of 60 0 60 frequencies for instruments like drums bass organ guitar and strings Mid low frequency range This is the range of 60 0 60 frequencies for lower brass and woodwind instruments Raising the overall volume with the Master Level slider and the Volume knob when the frequency sliders are already at high levels not only may distort the sound and cause ear pain it can also place unreasonable strain on the built in speakers and internal circuitry Use the KR at a moderate volume level NEP When lt Flat gt is selected when all sliders are at 0 then even when Equalizer is pressed the indicator does not light up Chapter 1 Performance Settings i Displayed Explanation Midrange This is the range of frequencies where 60 0 60 most instrument sounds are concentrated Mid high frequency range The ear is most 60 0 60 ne sensitive to this frequency range High frequency range These frequencies add 60 0 60 a brilliance to the sound You can temper the distortion in the sound by Master Level 60 0 60 lowering the level Raising the level too much may cause the sound to become distorted You can also move the slider with the buttons and the dial Pressing the buttons simultaneously returns the slider to 0 When you touch lt Exit gt the equalization is placed in effect and you return to the
211. ion 1995 Roland Corporation 1998 Roland Corporation 2001 Roland Corporation 1995 Roland Corporation 1995 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation Masterpieces Standchen Humoreske Blumenlied Alpenglockchen Menuett Gdur Beethoven Venezianisches Gondellied Alpenabendrote Farewell to the Piano Brautchor Waterloo WienerMarsch Le Coucou Menuett Gdur Bach Spinnerlied Gavotte Heidenroslein ZigeunerTanz Cinquantaine Csikos Post Dolly sDreaming Awakening La Violette Frohlicher Landmann Sonatine36 1 Clementi Sonatine20 1 Kuhlau SonatineNo 5 Beethoven 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1992 Roland Corporation 1996 Rola
212. ip Gun Shot Machine Gun Lasergun Explosion Dog Horse Gallop Birds Rain Thunder Wind Seashore Stream Bubble Cat Bird BabyLaughing Boeeeen Glass amp Glam Ice Ring Crack Bottle Pour Bottle Car Horn R Crossing SL 1 Female Yodel Female Yodel Female Yodel Female Yodel Female Yodel Female Yodel Male Yodel Male Yodel Male Yodel Male Yodel Male Yodel Male Yodel Male Yodel Male Yodel Male Yodel Male Yodel Male Yodel Male Yodel Boys Amen Boys Amen Boys Amen Boys Amen Boys Amen Boys Amen Boys Amen Boys Amen Boys Amen Boys Amen Boys Amen Boys Amen Ole Ole Ole Ole Ole Ole SL 2 Seal Fancy Animal Elephant Bike Car Engine 2 Small Club Display Explanation GS Chorus 1 Applies a light chorus effect with slow undulations GS Chorus 2 Applies o light chorus effect with quick undulations GS Chorus 3 Applies a deep chorus effect with slow undulations Applies a deep chorus effect with quick undulations D A A soft sound with a flanger effect Chorus An effect that sounds like a jet plane s ascent descent GS Short Delay A short echo effect GS Short Delay oe Feedback A short echo with many repetitions Modulation Delay per a wavering effect to the delayed Triple Tap Delay A three way delay Quadruple Tap Delay A four way delay Phaser Adds undulations to the sound Stereo Flanger Adds metallic reverberations A flanger that varies the
213. ir integrity please observe the following when handling floppy disks e Never touch the magnetic medium inside the disk e Do not use or store floppy disks in dirty or dusty areas e Do not subject floppy disks to temperature extremes e g direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle Recom mended temperature range 10 to 50 C 50 to 122 E e Do not expose floppy disks to strong magnetic fields such as those generated by loudspeakers 7 IMPORTANT NOTES Write Protect Tab Floppy disks have a write protect tab which can protect the disk from accidental erasure It is recommended that the tab be kept in the PROTECT position and moved to the WRITE position only when you wish to write new data onto the disk Rear side of the disk Write can write new data onto disk Protect prevents writing to disk The identification label should be firmly affixed to the disk Should the label come loose while the disk is in the drive it may be difficult to remove the disk Store all disks in a safe place to avoid damaging them and to protect them from dust dirt and other hazards By using a dirty or dust ridden disk you risk damaging the disk as well as causing the disk drive to malfunction Disks containing performance data for this unit should always be locked have their write protect tab slid to the Protect position before you insert them into the drive on some other unit except the PR 300 or a product in
214. is displayed performance data is being loaded from floppy disk or internal memory It may take thirty seconds to a minute or more to read the data Please wait e The displayed scores are based on music files Priority is placed on the readability of the displayed music not on the accurate rendition of difficult high level performances Thus there may be discrepancies seen when compared with commercially available printed music The display is not intended for viewing advanced songs requiring precisely detailed scores or complex songs e On the score display screen lyrics and notes may extend beyond the range displayed on the screen and may not be visible e Playback may start over from the beginning if you display the score or change A gt Q O cojo 11 A the displayed part during playback of the song E Touching Notes to Confirm the Sounds ay Touch the Notes el MEM In the Score screen you can have notes played by touching the notes on the screen You can operate the keys on instruments featuring the When you touch lt gt to show the keyboard on the screen the touched note is Moving key function p 168 indicated by the corresponding note on the keyboard This allows you confirm notes by sight sound and touch In addition when you trace part of the score with your finger the traced segment is played back This allows you to easily play back phrases you like 89 Chapter 4 Chapter
215. is finished playback stops automatically Press the kd Reset button to return to the beginning of the song Record Playback Buttons R 1 2 O 00000 Rhythm Whole Bass Lower Upper Record Playback ma gt E O a gt gt Reset Play Stop Rec Bwd Fwd Track buttons Each performance part of the song being played back is assigned to a track button Use these buttons to select the performance parts that are muted or played For more detailed information refer to p 99 ka Reset button Returns to the beginning of the song gt E Play Stop button Plays back the song or if the song is currently being played it stops the song Rec button Records the performance For more detailed information refer to p 105 lt lt Bwd button Moves back the playback position of the song one measure each time the button is pressed When held down the song rewinds continuously gt gt Fwd button Advances the playback position of the song one measure each time the button is pressed When held down the song is forwarded continuously Holding down the gt Play Stop button and pressing the BP Fwd button moves you to the end of the song NEP If there is recorded song data the Delete song screen appears DK to delete Sono Are you sure If it s okay to delete the song touch lt OK gt If you do not want to delete the song touch lt Can
216. is selected the same portion of all parts is deleted 138 E Inserting Blank Measures Insert You can add a blank measure at a location you specify This addition of a blank measure is called insertion Ex To insert measures bars 5 7 a I I I Sa I a I malay o 1 Ta SN I gt a Ts 6 7 10 At Step 3 of Selecting the editing function p 135 select lt Insert gt A screen like the one shown below appears Insert i 3 2 EN Ca Measure number of the first measure of the segment to be inserted Number of measures to be inserted Track button or part number where data will be inserted When All is selected blank measures are inserted at the same place in all parts Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs H Tra n sposing Individ ual Pa rts A screen like the one shown below appears Transpose You can transpose specified parts and tracks individually E At Step 3 of Selecting the editing function p 135 select lt Transpose gt A screen like the one shown below appears Transpose Content Measure number of the first measure of the segment to be erased i Number of measures to be erased Execute Track button or part number to be erased When All is selected the same portion of all parts is erased Measure number of the first measure of the Select from the following types of performan
217. isplayed Refer to Hiding the Lyrics Lyrics p 170 31 Chapter 1 Performance Using the Metronome and Rhythm NEM Rhythm Pa rtner During playback of a song or when performing with automatic accompaniment the The KR features a built in metronome Additionally you can have Rhythm patterns T ip mieaoneme eps play in the same manner as the metronome just by pressing the Rhythm button time with the beat of the song The combination of the internal metronome and rhythm functions is called Rhythm or accompaniment Partner Metronome Rhythm E Using the Metronome 1 e Press the Metronome button and watch the indicator light up MEMD It is not possible to use the Y ill hear th t ou will hear the metronome metronome and rhythm p 56 The following Metronome screen appears simultaneously 27108 E New Sono You can touch lt Exit gt to have the metronome continue to play while you return to the previous screen Stopping the metronome 2 Press the Metronome button once more and the indicator light goes out 52 Chapter 1 Performance E Changing the Metronome Settings O Adjusting the tempo You can adjust the tempo of the metronome The tempo of the metronome changes automatically if you use an Automatic Accompaniment or play back a song Press the Tempo or buttons to adjust a tempo You can adjust the metronome tempo over a range of
218. it gt to return to the Vocal Effects screen O Playing instrument sounds at vocal pitches Vocal Keyboard You can have melodies sung into the microphone played with the KR s internal Tones 1 e Touch lt Vocal Keyboard gt in Step 2 of How to select Vocal Effect p 43 3 3 Vocal Keyboard 48 2 3 Chapter 1 Performance If the lt OFF gt icon is selected touch the lt ON gt icon Touch any of the icons to select a Tone You can also select the Tone by pressing the Tone button When you sing into the microphone the sung pitches are played using the selected Tone Cancelling the effect 4 Touch lt OFF gt The Vocal Keyboard function is cancelled Touch lt Exit gt to go back to the Vocal Effects screen O Adding harmonies to a specified part Music Files Models Equipped With Moving Key When you sing while playing back a specified part from song data harmony is added based on pitches of the specified part Select the song to which you want to add harmony If selecting a song ona floppy disk insert the floppy disk in the disk drive For more on how to select songs refer to Playing a Song p 77 Touch lt Music Files gt in Step 2 of How to select Vocal Effect p 43 Music Files Select the performance part to be used for the harmony Touch the icon for the part to which you want to add harmony When you sing into the microphone harmony
219. ith your right hand while you listen to that same right hand part be played or youcan practice the left hand part while the right hand part plays A music file for piano lessons may be assigned to the five Track buttons as shown below Rhythm Whole Bass Lower Accomp Drums SFX paniment Par By using these Track buttons you can eliminate the sound of specific parts This is referred to as muting By recording your own performances to the Track Buttons in this fashion you can mute parts the same way For details refer to Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons Redoing Recordings p 111 1 e Select the song that you wish to play back p 77 Selecting the part that you ll be playing 2 e Press any one of the Track buttons to make the button s indicator light go dark The sound for the selected part no longer plays For example when practicing the right hand press the 4 Upper button When you play back the song the right hand performance will not sound Practice your right hand performance along with the left hand playback Playing back a song 3 Press the m Play Stop button The song will begin playing back The part you selected in step 2 will not sound Once again press the button you selected in step 2 The button s indicator will light up and the part will be heard once again Even while the song is playing you can press the track buttons to mute
220. k Metronome Bell Std Kick 2 Kick 1 Side Stick Std Snr 1 Hand Clap Std Snr 2 Low Tom 2 Closed Hi hat 1 Low Tom 1 Pedal Hi hat 1 Mid Tom 2 Open Hi hat 1 Mid Tom 1 High Tom 2 Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibra slap Ride Cymbal 2 High Bongo Low Bongo Mute High Conga Open High Conga Low Conga High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Cabasa Maracas Short Hi Whistle Long Low Whistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block Mute Cuica Open Cuica Mute Triangle Open Triangle Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo EXC7 EXC7 EXC1 EXC1 EXC1 EXC2 EXC3 EXC3 EXC4 EXC4 EXC5 EXC5 EXC6 EXC6 ROOM Set Bar Chime Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Sticks Square Click Metronome Click Metronome Bell Kick1 Room Kick Side Stick Room Snr 1 Hand Clap Std Snr 1 Room Low Tom 2 Closed Hi hat 1 Room Low Tom 1 Pedal Hi hat 1 Room Mid Tom 2 Open Hi hat 1 Room Mid Tom 1 Room Hi Tom 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Room Hi Tom 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibra slap Ride Cymbal 2 High Bongo Low Bongo Mute High Conga Open High Conga Low Conga High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Cab
221. lap2 EXC7 Hand Clap2 EXC7 Bleed Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap 32 Pop Pedal HH EXC1 Pop Pedal HH EXC1 Pop Pedal HH EXC1 Pop Pedal HH aa Gospel Hand Clap Gospel Hand Clap Gospel Hand Clap Gospel Hand Clap Samm Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll Vox Dut enm Pop Kick Rock Kick Pop Kick Vox Dom 02 35 aa Pop Kick Rock Kick Pop Kick Vox Tuush 37 Pop Side Stick Rock Side Stick Jazz Snare Swing Vox Hehho 33 Pop Sanre s Rock Sanre s Jazz Sanre Vox Doyear 39 Pop Snare Ghost Rock Snare Ghost Pop Snare Swing Vox Thu Ma Pop Snare s Rock Snare s Jazz Sanre Vox That 41 pore Pop Low Tom f Rock Low Tom f Jazz Low Tom f Vox Aahhh 42 Pop CHH 1 EXC1 Rock CHH 1 EXC1 Pop CHH 1 EXC1 Vox Tu can Pop Low Tom Rock Low Tom Jazz Low Tom Vox Dooh 44 Pop CHH 2 EXC1 Rock CHH 2 EXC1 Pop CHH 2 EXC1 Vox Ptu 45 Pop Mid Tom f Rock Mid Tom f Jazz Mid Tom f Vox Down a7 GLA Pop OHH EXC1 Rock OHH EXC1 Pop OHH EXC1 Vox Pa Pop Mid Tom Rock Mid Tom Jazz Mid Tom Vox Bom calas aman Pop High Tom f Rock High Tom f Jazz High Tom f Vox Toear 49 Pop Crash Cymbal 1 Rock Crash Cymbal Jazz Crash Cymbal 1 Vox Aahhu jus Pop High Tom Rock High Tom Jazz High Tom Vox Toya 51 Pop Ride Cymbal 1 Rock Ride Cymbal 1 Jazz Ride Cymbal 1 Vox Thu sa Pop Chinees Cymbal Pop Chinees Cymbal Jazz Chinees Cymbal Vox Cheey S Pop Ride Bell Pop Ride Bell Jazz Ride Cymbal 2 Vox Cymm 54 Tambourine 2 Tambourine 2 Tambourine 2 Vox Tub 55 a Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Vox Pruru JJ
222. lease refer to Adjusting Resonance Resonance p 152 Sostenuto pedal center pedal This pedal sustains only the sounds of the keys that were already played when you pressed the pedal Soft pedal left pedal When you hold down this pedal and play the keyboard the sound will have a softer tone NERO You can assign functions to the pedal Refer to Assigning Functions to the Pedal and Performance Pads Pedal Functions User Functions p 157 21 N h pe Y Q x gt Q NOA 210393 2 2 oy gt A o O 2t a 2 N Before You Start Playing Adjusting the Sound s Volume and Brilliance Turn the Volume knob to adjust the overall volume Turn the Brilliance knob to adjust the brightness of the sound Volume Brilliance e Ca G MEM Mellow Bright The mark at the top of the Volume knob indicates the volume level typically produced by an acoustic piano This is usually the most appropriate volume for your piano performances Devices Equipped with CD Drives If your device is equipped with a CD drive you can use the remote control to change the volume Turning up the Volume knob will not increase the volume if the remote control for the CD drive equipped device is set to 0 If the volume level for either unit is set to O minimum no sounds will be played even when the volume setting on the other unit is increased Connecting Headphones The KR has two
223. like the following appears O New Style If the User Style screen is not displayed touch lt User Disk gt in the lower part of the screen 2 Touch lt File gt 3 Touch lt Save gt A Save Style screen like the following appears This function is not available with songs on CDs Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles Determining the name of the Style to be saved 4 Touch lt Rename gt A Rename screen like the following appears Renae 3 When you touch When you touch the icon for the character to be input the character appears at the cursor position For example touching the lt ABC gt icon in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group A gt B gt C A Each touch of lt A a 0 gt cycles the type of characters yy through English upper case English lower case IN hh numerals symbols then back to English upper case When you touch lt Del gt the character at the cursor position is deleted When you touch lt Ins gt a space is inserted at the cursor position 5 When you have finished with the name touch lt Exit gt Determining the save destination 6 Touch lt Disk gt or lt User gt Touch lt Disk gt if you are saving to a floppy disk touch lt User gt if you are saving to user memory 149 A gt Q pe eee O 0 09 da oO oes Q O lt U Chapter
224. lose the Style being saved select a number in the save destination column that does not yet have a name 7 Touch lt Execute gt The Style on the floppy disk is copied to user memory Never turn off the power while the operation is in progress Doing so will damage the KR s internal memory making it unusable E Copying Styles Saved in the User Memory to Floppy Disks You can take Styles saved in user memory and copy them to floppy disks In this case touch the large arrow icon in the center of the Copy Style screen in Step 4 above so that the arrow points upwards Turn the KR will copy user memory Styles to the floppy disk The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying Styles from floppy disks to user memory 151 A gt Q me j 1 00 Oo da Q sl Q Le lt U Chapter 9 Various Settings Changing the Settings for One Touch Piano You can make detailed settings such as those for the keyboard touch and tunings allowing you to set up the KR just the way you want for your piano performances gt For more information about the Piano screen refer to Playing the Keyboard Like a Piano One Touch Piano p 26 E Procedure 1 Press the One Touch Program Piano button The Piano screen appears 2 Touch lt Functions gt Touch lt Exit gt to go back the Piano screen Display Display p 153 String Resonance Key Touch
225. m 2 Open Hi hat 1 Mid Tom 1 High Tom 2 Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibra slap Ride Cymbal 2 High Bongo Low Bongo Mute High Conga Open High Conga Low Conga High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Cabasa Maracas Short Hi Whistle Long Low Whistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block Mute Cuica Open Cuica Mute Triangle Open Triangle Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo EXC7 EXC7 EXC1 EXC1 EXC1 EXC2 EXC3 EXC3 EXC4 EXC4 EXC5 EXC5 EXC6 EXC6 Drum Set List 189 gt o 0 3 a A O N N 0 O Q Q Q lt 190 No sound SFX Set 1 EXC will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number SFX Vox Set Quatro One Two Three Four Female Yodel Female Yodel Female Yodel Female Yodel Female Yodel Female Yodel Scratch Push EXC7 Scratch Pull EXC7 Sticks Square Click Metronome Click Metronome Bell Guitar sliding Finger Guitar cutting noise up Guitar cutting noise down String slap of double bass Fl Key Click Laughing Screaming Punch Heart Beat Footsteps1 Footsteps2 Applause Door Creaking Door Scratch Wind Chimes Car Engine Car Stop Car Pass Car Crash Siren Train Jetplane Helicopter Starsh
226. more information about Quick Tour refer to the Quick Start Disabling Functions Other Than Piano Performance Panel Lock The Panel Lock function locks the KR in a state where only piano performance can be used and all buttons will be disabled This prevents the settings from being inadvertently modified even if children press the buttons accidentally In the Panel Lock state only the grand piano sound can be played 1 Turn down the volume all the way 2 Press the Power switch to turn off the power 3 While holding down the Wonderland Game button press the Power switch and turn on the power Then continue to hold down the button for a few seconds All buttons except for piano play are disabled Adjust the volume When you play the keyboard the grand piano sound will be heard To undo the Panel Lock function turn the volume down to the minimum and turn on the power once again Chapter 9 Various Settings Changing the Functions of the Remote Control s Buttons You can change the functions assigned to the remote control s buttons 1 Switch to the Basic screen or press the One Touch Program Piano button 2 Touch lt Functions gt When you touch lt Functions gt on the Basic screen the first page displayed shows the parameters for the Automatic Accompaniment settings p 155 When you touch lt Functions gt on the Piano screen the parameters for the piano performan
227. n the performance is played back 3 Playback stops when you press the gt Play Stop button once more E inputting Chords without Playing the Keyboard You can use lt Chords gt at the bottom right of the Chord Sequencer screen to specify chords on the screen l At the Chord Sequencer screen touch lt Chords gt A screen like the one shown below appears 3 28 Chord Selector SSE in each to specify the chords 3 Touch lt Execute gt to enter the chord You are returned to the Chord Sequencer screen Editing Songs There are many ways you can edit performances recorded using the KR Track button or 16 track sequencer E Basic Operation of the Editing Functions While songs are being loaded the measure number in the upper right of the screen is highlighted text and background are inverted Start editing the song only after the measure number is no longer highlighted Selecting the editing function 1 Press the Menu button and watch the indicator light up The Menu screen appears 2 Touch lt Song Edit gt A Song Edit screen like the following appears Sono Edit NS 3 Touch an editing function to select that function For more detailed information refer to the corresponding page for each function Undoes editing operations that 136 have been performed P Co Copies measures and internal p 136 py rhythm patterns p 137 Quantize Evens out sounds in recorded
228. n connecting a microphone refer to Adding effects to the vocals is referred to as Vocal Effect Connecting a Microphone p 22 O How to select Vocal Effect 1 e Press the Vocal Effect button The Vocal Effects screen appears Models Featuring Moving Key Models Without Moving Key Vocal Effects SSS Vocal Effects Music Filez Ze Touch any one of the icons een Elation Page Echo Aaj the microphoneecho BE Harmonist Addsharmoniestotheorginalvoie p7 Vocal Count In Allows you to start songs and Automatic Accompaniment using your own tempo Vocal Keyboard Allows you to produce sounds conforming to the vocal scale You can play a specific part as harmony while playing back a song 3 When you touch lt Exit gt the effect is applied and you return to the previous screen 43 Chapter 1 Performance Cancelling the Vocal Effect 4 Press the Vocal Effect button and watch the indicator light go out The Vocal Effect function is cancelled O Adjusting the Echo Echo 1 e Touch lt Echo gt in Step 2 of How to select Vocal Effect p 43 Echo Tupe 2 Touch the bar graph to adjust the amount of echo applied to the vocal 3 Touch the Echo Type lt 1 gt or lt 2 gt to change the echo type el Adds basic reverberations fe Adds reverberations for a karaoke type echo Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Vocal Effect
229. n is cancelled Touch lt Exit gt to go back to the Vocal Effects screen 50 Chapter 1 Performance E Enjoying Karaoke Performances with Music Files I 2 Connect a microphone Adjust the volume level and the amount of echo applied On the KR use the Vocal Effect function to adjust the echo p 44 You can also enjoy this effect with the Voice Transformer function p 45 and Harmonist function p 46 47 Select a song If selecting a song on a floppy disk insert the floppy disk in the disk drive For instructions on how to select songs refer to Playing a Song p 77 Adjust the tempo as required with the Tempo buttons If necessary change the key of the song p 103 When you press the m Play Stop button the accompaniment starts playing Sing along with the accompaniment When you play back a Music File with lyrics the lyrics appear on screen Press the m Play Stop button to stop the accompaniment NEP Commercial music files designed for karaoke sing along are also available Consult your KR dealer when purchasing music files Refer to Music Files That the KR Can Use p 201 NERO On the KR lyrics can also be shown on an external display Refer to Connecting an External Display p 23 and Selecting Images To Be Shown on the KR and External Displays User Image Display p 163 NEP You can stop lyrics from being d
230. n like the one shown below appears i E song or music file that includes d 127 Funky Disco 1 4 H the lyrics data lt ES appears in the Piano screen or Basic screen Touch this to display the lyrics NEP IntrofEndina Tup Normally when you change a Music Style the tempo and tone change to selections that go well with the selected Music Style If you do not want Observe the settings to change the tempo and tone e The keyboard is split into left and right hand parts with accompaniment refer to Changing Music chords specified for the left hand side of the keyboard Styles Without Changing the Tone or Tempo One Touch Setting p 156 NERO 2 Play a chord on the lower part of keyboard For instructions on selecting Music Styles refer to e A tone appropriate for the selected Music Style is chosen e The tempo and beat for the selected Music Style is set The accompaniment begins starting from the intro Selecting Music Styles Music Play chords with the left hand and the melody with the right Style Buttons p 62 NERO For instructions on starting When you change chords in the left hand the accompaniment also changes Split Point F 3 and stopping the accompaniment refer to Starting and Stopping the The range specifyed a chord Accompaniment p 66 3 Press the Intro Ending button MEMO You can change the range in After the ending plays the accompan
231. nGt Feedback Gt Gt Harmonics Gt Feedback GS Ac Bass GS Fing Bass Picked Bs Fretless Bs Slap Bass Slap Bass 2 SynthBass101 Synth Bass 1 Synth Bass 2 Synth Bass 3 Synth Bass 4 Rubber Bass Violin Slow Violin Viola Cello Contrabass Trem Str PizzicatoStr GS Harp Timpani GS Strings Orchestra GS SI Str Syn Strings1 Syn Strings2 Syn Strings3 Choir Aahs Choir Pop Voice SynVox OrchestraHit GS Trumpet Trombone Trombone 2 Tuba MutedTrumpet French Horn Fr Horn 2 Brass 1 Brass 2 Synth Brass1 Synth Brass2 Synth Brass3 Synth Brass4 AnalogBrass1 AnalogBrass2 GS Sop Sax Alto Sax Tenor Sax GS Bari Sax GS Oboe English Horn Bassoon Clarinet Piccolo GS Flute Recorder GS Pan Flute Bottle Blow Shakuhachi Whistle Ocarina Square Wave Square Sine Wave Saw Wave Saw Doctor Solo Syn Calliope Chiffer Lead Charang Solo Vox 5th Saw Wave Bass amp Lead Fantasia Warm Pad Polysynth Space Voice Bowed Glass Metal Pad Halo Pad Sweep Pad Ice Rain Soundtrack Crystal Syn Mallet Atmosphere Brightness Goblin Echo Drops Echo Bell Echo Pan Star Theme Sitar Sitar 2 Banjo Shamisen Koto Taisho Koto Kalimba Bagpipe Fiddle Shanai Tinkle Bell Agogo Steel Drums Woodblock Castanets Taiko Concert BD Melo Tom 1 Melo Tom 2 Synth Drum 808 Tom Elec Perc Reverse Cym Gt FretNoise Gt Cut Noise String Slap Breath Noise Fl Key Click Seashore Rain Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Bird
232. nd Corporation 1999 Roland Corporation HoneybeeMarch 1999 Roland Corporation Jingle Bell 1999 Roland Corporation Little Fox 1999 Roland Corporation Little Row 2001 Roland Corporation LondonBridge 1999 Roland Corporation Mary Lamb 1999 Roland Corporation OldMacDonald 1999 Roland Corporation The Cuckoo 1999 Roland Corporation Twinkle 1999 Roland Corporation Internal Song List Practice Beyer 15 Beyer 21 Beyer 25 Beyer 29 Beyer 34 Beyer 38 Beyer 42 Beyer 46 Beyer 51 Beyer 55 Beyer 60 Beyer 64 Beyer 67 Beyer 73 Beyer 78 Beyer 81 Beyer 90 Beyer 93 Beyer 98 Beyer 103 Czerny100 1 Czerny100 10 Czerny 100 20 Czerny 100 30 Czerny 100 38 Czerny 100 43 Czerny 100 60 Czerny100 75 Czerny 100 86 Czerny 100 96 Openness Arabesque Pastoral SmallGathering Innocence Progress Clear Stream Gracefulness 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation
233. nd Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation All rights reserved Unauthorized use of this material for purposes other than private personal enjoyment is a violation of applicable laws Rhythm Pattern List Patterns That Can Be Selected with the Rhythm Button gt Playing Rhythm p 56 Mar 16 Beat 1 16 Beat 2 16 Beat 3 4 4 2 2 Patterns That Can Be Selected with the Edit Functions Copying Rhythm Patterns to Create Rhythm Parts p 137 Pattern Name Beat Measures E CN Samba 2 4 Waltz 2 3 4 CC CI E CI CI CI CI ET CI E CI CTC CI CS CI EC CT Waltz 1 3 4 BR M N FI N N AT NM DM Pattern Name Beat Measures Triplet 4 4 March 1 4 4 March 2 4 4 Tango 1 4 4 Tango 2 4 4 MIES CIC CI CCC CI CC CI CC CI 8 Beat6 4 4 7 4 7 4 MP MO N 3 8 3 8 reas Co UCI ECO UCI CE e wo CI TO CI E NI C InSwing 4 4 Fill In3 4 4 MO MO N NI N HY HY aj FA Fill In1 4 4 Fill In2 4 4 199 gt o 0 3 a A O N N 0 O Q Q Q lt Parameters Stored to Internal Memory Parameters Stored in the User Program gt S
234. ndo and other such gradual tempo changes Setting the Rec Mode to Tempo l Press the Menu button The Menu screen appears 2 Touch lt Rec Mode gt A screen like the one shown below appears Rec Mode SSS Rec Stop 142 3 Touch the lt Rec Mode gt This makes the setting for tempo recording Touch lt Exit gt a number of times to switch to the screen where the measure number is indicated in the upper right of the screen When the KR goes into Tempo Recording the tempo indication is highlighted Recording the Tempo 4 Use the lt lt Bwd and gt Fwd buttons to move slightly before the measure where you want to change the tempo 5 Press the O Rec button and watch the indicator is flashing The KR is put in recording standby 6 When you press the gt Play Stop button recording begins 7 When you get to the place where you want to change the tempo use the Tempo and buttons or the dial to vary the tempo as desired 8 When you press the gt Play Stop button recording stops The song s tempo changes You cannot record performances while in Tempo Recording mode When you re finished tempo recording go back to the ordinary Replace Recording Take a look at Changing the Recording Method Rec Mode p 130 Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs E Adjusting the Tempo at a Particular Measure You can create a tempo change a
235. ne The effect is applied only to the layer part When not using a layer performance p 30 the Advanced 3D effect is not applied to the keyboard performance even if lt Keyboard gt on the Advance 3D screen is set to On Layer Part When you touch lt Exit gt you return to the Advanced 3D screen 39 Chapter 1 Performance Adjusting the Sound to Achieve the Preferred Tone Quality Equalizer 40 The KR features a built in five band digital equalizer An equalizer boosts or cuts specific sound pitches frequency ranges to adjust the sound balance for the overall performance For example you can boost the highs to get a crisper sound or boost the low end for a more powerful sound You can also adjust the sound to compensate for the acoustical characteristics of the performance space If raising the slider for each frequency ends up distorting the sound you can correct the distortion with the Master Level slider Press the Equalizer button The Equalizer screen appears Master Level e Display Explanation Piano The optimal settings for piano performance are selected Boosts both the low and high frequency ranges Lows and highs are restrained for a pleasant sounding tone This setting slightly boosts the midrange for a simple pop feeling This setting boosts the high frequencies for a brilliant sparkling sound All slider values are set to 0 Store your own preferred sett
236. ne been changed p 159 Some Chord Tone and Bass Tone notes may be sounded continuously During automatic accompaniment changing the Music Style automatically changes the Tones and tempo of the upper part of the keyboard to match the new Music Style If you want to change only the Music Style without also altering the tempo and Tone check out Changing Music Styles Without Changing the Tone or Tempo One Touch Setting p 156 When a performance made along with a Music Files tune has been recorded recording the performance to button 1 Whole may make the Tones for buttons 3 Lower and 4 Upper change as well Since the KR s piano sounds faithfully reproduce the sense of spaciousness and reverberation of an actual acoustic piano s sound a certain amount of reverberation is still perceptible even with the reverb effect deactivated On an acoustic piano notes in the upper one and a half octaves of the keyboard continue to sound until they decay naturally regardless of the damper pedal There is a difference in the timbre as well Roland pianos faithfully simulate such characteristics of the acoustic piano The range that is unaffected by the damper pedal will change depending on the Key Transpose setting Troubleshooting A High pitched whine is produced The bass range sounds odd or there is a vibrating resonance When listening through headphones Some of the more flamboyant and effervescent piano
237. ng back music files that carry either the General MIDI or General MIDI 2 logo In some cases the conventional form of General MIDI which does not include the new enhancements is referred to as General MIDI 1 as a way of distinguishing it from General MIDI 2 GS Format S The GS Format is Roland s set of specifications for standardizing the performance of sound generating devices In addition to including support for everything defined by the General MIDI the highly compatible GS Format additionally offers an expanded number of sounds provides for the editing of sounds and spells out many details for a wide range of extra features including effects such as reverb and chorus Designed with the future in mind the GS Format can readily include new sounds and support new hardware features when they arrive Since it is upwardly compatible with the General MIDI Roland s GS Format is capable of reliably playing back GM Scores equally as well as it performs GS music files music files that have been created with the GS Format in mind This product supports both the General MIDI 2 and the GS Format and can be used to play back music data carrying either of these logos XG lite XGlite XG is a tone generator format of YAMAHA Corporation that defines the ways in which voices are expanded or edited and the structure and type of effects in addition to the General MIDI 1 specification XGlite is a simplified version of XG tone gen
238. ng is fast forwarded CD Volume Changing the volume of the Song on CDs Changing the FUNC Button Functions Bwd Fwd 4 Touch lt FUNC gt FUNC button Display Explanation Each time the FUNC button is pressed Moving Key the piano player function is switched on or off The songs are played back in random order Each time the FUNC button is pressed Track 3 the left hand track is switched on or off When turned off the sound from the left hand track does not play j to assign functions to Each time the FUNC button is pressed Track 4 the right hand track is switched on or off When turned off the sound from the right hand track does not play Each time the FUNC button is pressed the EQ is switched on or off A gt Q O j 11 he The display of the song list is expanded 5 Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Functions screen The remote control buttons original function assignments are restored when the power is turned off If you want to save the changed settings carry out the memory backup p 164 167 oO da Q oes o Le lt U Chapter 9 Various Settings Enabling the Moving Key E Changing the Moving Key Settings You can have the keyboard play automatically along with the performance 1 Switch to the Basic screen or press the One Touch Program Piano button 2 Touch lt Functions gt When you touch lt Functions gt on the Bas
239. ng playback impossible We recommend saving your songs on two different floppy disks NEP When you want to clear all of the content saved to the Favorites and restore the settings to the original factory condition on the KR refer to Formatting the User Memory p 165 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Determining the name of the song to be saved 4 3 Touch lt Rename gt The following Rename screen appears When you touch the icon for the letter or character to be input the character appears at the cursor location For example touching lt ABC gt in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group A gt B gt C Each touch of lt A a 0 gt cycles the type of characters through English upper case IN Mh IN Mh English lower case numerals symbols then back to English upper case When you touch lt Del gt the character at the cursor position is deleted When you touch lt Ins gt a space is inserted at the cursor position When you have finished with the name touch lt Exit gt Determining the Save Destination 6 Touch lt Disk gt or lt Favorites gt Touch lt Disk gt if you are saving to a floppy disk touch lt Favorites gt if you are saving to Favorites Touch to select the save destination song number If a song name is displayed with a number a song is already
240. ng the disc by the center hole and outer rim Do not touch or scratch the disc s recording surface the green side Do not drop or stack discs Do not place heavy objects on discs or subject them to strong impact e Do not affix stickers or other such materials on the label side Placing stickers on the disc may result in errors when data writing and scratch the disc Use a felt tip marker or other soft tipped implement to write titles and other information on the label side of discs Store discs in their original cases or other suitable cases for protection Before using the CD please read the warning on the CD cover Cleaning Discs If a disc becomes dusty or soiled gently wipe the disc with a soft cloth Always wipe outwards from the center using light gentle strokes Do not wipe the disk in a circular pattern Precautions Concerning Use of the CD CD R RW discs to which audio tracks have been added and CDs with mixed audio tracks and data will not play back properly The KR is capable of playing back only commercial CDs that conform the official standards those that carry the COMPACT DISC DIGITAL AUDIO logo The usability and sound quality of audio discs that incorporate copyright protection technology and other non standard CDs cannot be guaranteed For more detailed information on audio discs featuring copyright protection technology and other non standard CDs please consult the disc vendor You can
241. nge to the The following Song Selection screen CD appears Song Selection CD screen NEP New Sono Sono 0247 _ If using the CD drive for the 1 Sono 02 35 4Sona 03381 _ first time refer to p 82 2 Sono 02 15 SSona 02 47 The selected song is played back This changes to lt a gt while the song is playing back playback stops when you touch lt a gt By touching an item with the lt fen gt the songs in that folder will be displayed By touching an item with the lt mn gt you can close the folder 83 Chapter 3 Song Playback 3 Press the remote control s 4 button or pp button to select a song to play back Use the buttons and the dial to select songs When Selecting Songs in Folders You can also use the remote control s me pp buttons buttons and dial to select songs After a moment a list of songs in the folder is displayed Touch a song from the list that appears to select the song you want to play back The selected song name appears at 0 Depending on the number of songs contained in a folder this may take some time Playing back 3 Press the m Play Stop button The button indicator lights up and playback begins Stopping the Song 4 Press the m Play Stop button once again The button indicator light goes out and the song stops When the song is finished playback stops automatic
242. ngl Harpsichord UprightPiano Grand Piano2 Bell Piano Piano Oohs Bright Piano E Grand MIDI Piano1 E Piano 1 St FM EP FM SA EP Hard FM EP Harpsi o Coupled Hps Soft Marimba EG Rhodes 1 EG Rhodes 2 Hard Rhodes Vibra Bells Celesta Glockenspiel Soft E Piano 60 s E Piano E Piano 2 Xylophone Music Box Balafon Detuned EP 1 Detuned EP 2 Hard E Piano Hard Clav Soft Clav Reso Clav Phase Clav Pop Vibe Pop Celesta Tubular bell Santur Kalimba Air Grand Piano 1 Piano 2 Piano 3 MIDI Piano2 Synth Harpsi SynRingClav Analog Clav 184 Organ Jazz Organ Full Organ 1 Lower Organ Theater Org Diapason 8 Bandneon Perc Organ Full Organ 2 Lower Organ2 Church Organ Rock Organ1 Blues Harp Pop Organ L Organ Trem Flute Accordion Nason flt 8 Organ Flute Jazz Organ2 Jazz Organ3 Jazz Organ4 CheeseOrgan Full Organ 3 Full Organ 4 Rotary Org S Rotary Org F Rock Organ2 Pipe Org Bs Organ Bass Metalic Org VS Organ Organ 1 Organ 2 Digi Church Guitar Bass EX Ac Guitar Flamenco Gtr Steel Guitar Jazz Guitar Requint Gtr 12str Guitar Nylon Steel Nylon Guitar Mandolin Gut Guitar Acoustic Bs A Bass Cymbl JC E Guitar DistortionGt Rock Rhythm Rock Rhythm2 Overdrive Gt Power Guitar Power Gt 2 Muted Dis Gt Fingered Bs Picked Bs Fretless Bs Slap Bass Steel Vox Muted Gt Muted Gt 2 Mellow Gt 5th Dist Feedback Gt2 Synth Bass 1 Synth Bass 2 SynthBass101 Jungle Bass Modul
243. nicnonccnnnnnonincnnannnnrncnacnnonanos 176 Connect Sii eA eit ain ase 176 Making the Connections pci 176 Changing the Aux Jack Settings Aux Out oe 177 Setup Examples With Aux Set to Surround 177 Connecting a Computere enn EE 178 Connect to the MIDI Connectors ooooccnocccnnoncnonnncnnnncnonnnconnnannoss 178 Connect to the Computer Connector ecccccnccnccncnnnananinananinananios 178 Connector na aa a a a 178 Makine The ConnecHon S icsi hii 178 PUD DENGICES rai Ea 180 Troub ke Noo Ne nosan anana O 180 Error Messa ohir ai DA 183 Ton iia 184 Diron Sep LAS Er A a 186 A a NTA 190 A O Ee Saaa reas re taer Fone naenereD 191 Maisie Style List KR 17 sisi ide 192 Music Style List KR 15 iii clinica 193 Chota listar ca 194 internal Sone ista i 196 Rhythm Patterns 199 Parameters Stored to Internal Memory coocococicononinononnnnnonaninnnonenos 200 Music Files That the KR Can Use ooooococccnocccoonnnconnnconnccnonancnnncnnanoss 201 The KR allows you to use the following music files 201 About the KR Sound GeneratoT oooooconocccnooncconnncnonccnoncncnnnnnnanoss 201 MIDI Implementation Chata diri 202 AU a A O 203 o EEEa TAE EAA nae EEE A OE A TAE 205 17 2 ke gt Q da le la o a O A a 3 A oe da O ofan N Before You Start Playing Opening a nd losi ng the Top 3 While holding up the top with one hand lift up the top KR 1 7 stick and insert its end into the appropriate top slip O
244. no Slow Strings Strings Choir Doos Voice 159 oO da Q odes Q Le U Chapter 9 Various Settings Parame Value Explanation ter Name The function that allows the KR to recognize accompaniment chords when you press only one or two keys during uate ON OFF Automatic Accompaniment is called the Chord Intelligence function p 60 When set to Off play all of the notes to specify chords E Placing a Marker in the Middle of a Measure A marker is normally placed at the start of the selected measure but you can also set it so that a marker is placed at a position partway through a measure gt For detailed information about Marker refer to Setting Markers for Repeated Practice Marker p 100 1 Press the Menu button The Menu screen appears 2 Touch lt Marker gt The Marker screen appears 3 Touch lt Option gt A screen like the following appears Marker Setting SSE Resolution 4 Touch lt Resolution gt setting Thisletsyouplaceamarkeratthe lets you place a marker at the beginning of the measure Beat This lets you place a marker at the beginning of the beat 5 Touch lt Exit gt to go back to the Marker screen 160 Changing the Settings for the Count In and Countdown 1 Press the Metronome button The Metronome screen p 52 appears 2 Touch lt Count In gt or lt Countdown gt The Count In settings scr
245. not save songs and styles to CDs and you cannot delete songs or styles recorded to CDs Furthermore you cannot format CDs The prescribed format for CD R RW discs is ISO9660 Level 1 Mode 1 You may be unable to read using other formats 82 Insert the CD in the CD Drive 1 Press the eject button and open a disc tray 2 Puta CD ona disc tray 3 Press the eject button again to close the disc tray Removing a CD 1 Press the eject button and open a disc tray 2 Remove the CD from the disc tray If a disc tray does not open If the power is turned off with the disc still in the drive such as due to a power failure the disc tray cannot be opened by pressing the eject button In this case you can insert a piece of wire to force the tray open Emergency eject hole Make sure the KR s power has been turned OFF before attempting to engage the emergency eject hole If you insert something while the power is on the disc could be damaged or unexpected problems may occur Chapter 3 Song Playback E Playing Back Songs on CDs You can play back the enclosed CD and CDs for player piano as well as audio CDs Select Listen to a Song Disk Selecting the song EM 1 e Insert the CD you want to play back in the CD drive MEMp Wait a few moments after placing the CD in the CD drive 2 Press the Select Listen to a Song button for the display to cha
246. o Mute High Conga Open High Conga Low Conga High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Cabasa Maracas Short Hi Whistle Long Low Whistle EXC2 Short Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block Mute Cuica Open Cuica Mute Triangle Open Triangle Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo EXC7 EXC7 EXC1 EXC1 EXC1 EXC4 EXC4 EXC5 EXC5 EXC6 EXC6 Em No sound EXC will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number 3 20 aa a rs a p ona cco on oo grm pm _ a clon _ ae Se ar SE UN g Za C7 de ce p 7 7 pr m pa PU m ORCHESTRA Set Bar Chime Snare Roll Finger Snap Close Hi hat Pedal Hi hat Open Hi hat Ride Cymbal Sticks Square Click Metronome Click Metronome Bell Concert BD 2 Concert BD 1 Side Stick Concert SD Castanets Concert SD Timpani F Timpani F Timpani G Timpani G Timpani A Timpani A Timpani B Timpani c Timpani c Timpani d Timpani d Timpani e Timpani f Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Concert Cymbal 2 Vibra slap Concert Cymbal 1 High Bongo Low Bongo Mute High Conga Open High Conga Low Conga High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Cabasa Maracas Short Hi Whistle Long Low Whistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block Mute Cuica Open Cuica Mute Trian
247. o sounds will be VOL played even if you try to raise the volume with the KR s Volume knob To raise Volume the volume use the VOL buttons as well You can use the Memory Backup function to store these settings to the KR p 164 This adjusts the tempo TEMPO You can also assign functions to the button p 167 You cannot change the tempos for CDs 87 Chapter 4 Practice Functions Displaying the Score The KR can display scores not only for the internal songs but for music files and The functions described in performances recorded with the KR This is very convenient for performing while Chapter 4 Practice Functions reading the music and for checking songs that have been recorded When you play cannot be used during back a music file with lyrics the lyrics appear on screen playback of songs on CDs Selecting the song When playing back songs on floppy disks first insert the floppy disk in the disk drive 1 e Press the Select Listen to a Song button to select a song For details refer to Playing a Song p 77 2 Press the Score Display button The Score screen appears da oO o Le U NERO In some internal songs the fingering is displayed The fingering numbers shown in the screen indicate one possible fingering Displays an enlarged score You can also display the note names NEP The score and keyboard are displayed This
248. of the performance parts p 75 Balance knob Changes the volume balance for sounds played with the keyboard and for songs and accompaniments p 75 7 User Program button Stores the selected functions and states of the buttons p 122 DSP 8 Reverb button Adds reverberation to the sound p 33 9 Surround button Adds three dimensional breadth to the accompaniment sounds p 38 10 Equalizer button Allows you to adjust the tone quality with the equalizer p 40 11 Style Orchestrator button This is used to change the arrangement type for automatic accompaniment with the Performance Pads p 70 12 Phrase Button This is used to play a short phrase with the Performance Pads p 71 12 13 User Function Button This is used to assign a variety of functions to the Performance Pads p 157 Performance Pads 14 1 4 buttons The operation of each is changed depending on the buttons numbered 11 13 15 Music Style buttons Selects a Music Style for automatic accompaniment p 62 Pressing the User button selects a User Style that you ve made yourself or a Music Style on floppy disk p 63 16 Fill In buttons Inserts a fill in in an automatic accompaniment and changes the accompaniment pattern p 69 To Variation button To Original button 17 Intro Ending button Play an intro or ending during automatic accompaniment p 66 18 Start Stop button
249. of the intro O Cancelling the countdown 1 e Inthe Metronome screen touch lt Countdown gt 2 Touch lt Switch gt to set this to OFF This sets the KR so that the countdown does not play 68 NEP For more about settings on the Countdown screen refer to Settings for the Countdown p 161 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Modifying an Accompaniment NERO When you use Automatic Accompaniment you can easily add Fill Ins to the You can add variation to the accompaniment patterns change arrangements and make other changes Automatic Accompaniment by assigning different functions to the Performance Pads and E Changing the Accompaniment Pattern pedis ooo non F il in Button s see Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads There are two accompaniment patterns the Original and a Variation In addition a Pedal Setting User fill in or short phrase is added at the points where the accompaniment patterns Functions p 157 change which adds more interest to the song It can be effective to use the simpler original pattern for the first half of the song and the variation pattern for the second half What s a Fill In A short improvisational phrase inserted at the bar line is called a Fill In The KR automatically plays the appropriate phrase for the selected Music Style To Variation To Original Fill In P
250. omatically assigns the most suitable tones for the selected musical style When you re creating a song you can assign Tone sets then change the Tones to suit the ideas you have for your song 1 Display the 16 track Sequencer screen p 127 2 Touch lt Tone Set gt in the lower part of the screen A screen like the one shown below appears Big Band Classic A Cappella Country 3 Touch the screen to select a musical genre A Touch lt Exit gt The 16 track Sequencer screen appears Tones for each part are assigned automatically In some genres some parts may have no tone assigned E Recording a Performance O Step 1 Prepare for Recording Selecting the song to record 1 Press the Select Listen to a Song button 2 Touch the genre of the song you re recording When recording a new song try recording to Favorites 3 Select the song number to which you want to record If recording a new song touch lt 0 Song Name gt to select lt 0 New Song gt Favorites P 1 1 3 Dr GradusfdP ll O New Sono O 1 Etude op10 3 E Fantatsielmp gt Ifa song has already been recorded or if the song s settings have been changed the OK to delete Song confirmation prompt appears when you touch lt 0 Song Name gt For more information take a look at If the following screen appears p 105 Determining the song s beat and tempo 4 Press the Metronome button to select the beat
251. omputer connector p 178 Has Local Control been set to Off When Local Control is set to Off no sound is produced by playing the keyboard Set Local Control to On p 174 The maximum number of notes can play simultaneously is 128 Frequent use of the damper pedal during automatic accompaniment or when playing along witha song on floppy disk may result in performance data with too many notes causing some notes to drop out The sound is strange Sounds are heard twice doubled when the keyboard is played The tuning or pitch of the keyboard or song is off Effects cannot be applied to Tones A note doesn t stop playing The Tone has changed Reverberation still audible even with Reverb turned off In the upper range the sound changes abruptly beyond a certain key Is the KR in layer play p 30 When the KR is connected to an external sequencer set it to the Local OFF mode p 174 Alternatively the sequencer could be set so its Soft Thru feature is OFF Have you set transpose p 103 Are the settings for the Temperament and Stretch Tuning correct p 153 Is the setting for the Master Tune correct p 162 It s not possible to apply more than one effect at the same time so when a performance has been recorded on multiple tracks or when playing along with a song as it s played back the desired effect may not be applied Have the Chord Tone and Bass To
252. on Invention 9 O 2000 Roland Corporation Invention 10 O 2000 Roland Corporation Invention 11 O 2000 Roland Corporation Invention 12 O 2000 Roland Corporation Invention 13 O 2000 Roland Corporation Invention 14 O 2000 Roland Corporation Invention 15 O 2000 Roland Corporation 197 gt o 0 3 a A O N N 0 O Q Q Q lt Internal Song List Masterpieces gt Song files of this genre corresponds to the included collection of printed music entitled Roland 60 Classical Piano Masterpieces Sonate No 15 Liebestraume 3 Etude op10 3 Je te veux Valse op64 1 Golliwog sCakewalk Fantaisielmpromptu Arabesque 1 Blauen Donau Auf Flugeln des Gesanges Mazurka No 5 Gymnopedie 1 Etude op25 1 ClairDeLune Etude op10 5 Dr GradusAdParnassum Grande Valse Brillante La priere d une Vierge Course en Troika ToTheSpring Valse op64 2 RadetzkyMarsch Traumerei MomentsMusicaux 3 Prelude op28 15 HarmoniousBlacksmith Ungarische Tanze 5 Turkischer Marsch Beethoven NocturneNo 2 Fruhlingslied Praludium Jagerlied MenuetAntique Fur Elise Turkischer Marsch Mozart O 00 1996 Roland Corporation 2001 Roland Corporation 2001 Roland Corporation 1997 Roland Corporation 2001 Roland Corporation 1995 Roland Corporation 2001 Roland Corporation 1995 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1995 Roland Corporation 1997 Roland Corporat
253. on Performances are possible in all keys III Kirnberger Characteristics This temperament is based on the theories of the Greek philosopher Pythagoras and has pure fourths and fifths Chords containing a third will sound impure but melodies will sound good Pythagorean This temperament is a partial compromise of just intonation in order to allow modulation Meantone This temperament is a combination of meantone and Pythagorean temperaments It allows you to play in all keys First method number three Werkmeister Touch any one of the icons to choose the tuning system When playing in a temperament other than equal temperament you must specify the tonic the note corresponding to C for a major key or to A for a minor key of the key in which you will play to select the tonic Touch lt Key gt If you have selected equal temperament it is not necessary to select the tonic O Setting the Tuning Curve Stretch Tuning Pianos are generally tuned so that the low range is flatter and the high range is sharper than equal tempered pitches This method of tuning is unique to the piano and is known as stretched tuning A graph that shows the changes in pitch of actual tuning compared with the changes in equal temperament pitch is called a tuning curve Changing the tuning curve produces subtle variations in the reverberations of the chords you play Touch the Stretch Tuning
254. one or Music Style Has the Balance knob been moved all the way to the right p 75 Have you pressed the One Touch Program Arranger button If the One Touch Program Arranger button has not been pressed only the rhythm pattern is played p 65 Is the 16 track Sequencer screen displayed p 127 Has Chord Intelligence been switched off p 159 Is the setting for Piano Style Arranger active p 74 sapuoddy 181 N 0 O Q Q Q lt Accompaniment tempo becomes unstable Troubleshooting In certain cases such as when playing Music Styles on floppy disks the accompaniment may lag when excessive amounts of performance data are used Song doesn t play back correctly Song doesn t play back Only the sound of a particular instrument in a song does not play Pressing the H Reset button doesn t return to the beginning of the song The gt gt Fwa and lt Bwd buttons don t work There is a slight delay before playback of a song on floppy disk starts Does the screen indicate message like OK to delete song p 105 The internal songs cannot be played back while recorded performance data remains in the KR s memory Try playing back the song after deleting the performance data Is the light for the Track button extinguished p 99 If the button light is out the music on that track is not heard Press the track button so the ligh
255. or several hours until the condensation has completely evaporated e Do not allow rubber vinyl or similar materials to remain on the unit for long periods of time Such objects can discolor or otherwise harmfully affect the finish e Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard This can be the cause of malfunction such as keys ceasing to produce sound e Do not paste stickers decals or the like to this instrument Peeling such matter off the instrument may damage the exterior finish Maintenance e Since your piano has a polished finish that is as delicate as that found on finely crafted wooden furniture it needs careful periodic care A few important suggestions concerning the proper care of the unit follow e For dusting using a soft clean cloth and or piano use feather duster Be sure to wipe gently Even the tiniest grains of sand or grit can leave scratches on the surface if too much force is applied while wiping Do not use any cleaners or detergents since they might deteriorate the surface of the cabinet and produce cracks e If the cabinet s surface loses its luster wipe it thoroughly with a soft cloth dampened with a little of the polishing liquid Do not use any cleaners or detergents since they might deteriorate the surface of the cabinet and produce cracks Do not use dusting cloths that contain chemicals e Never use benzine thinners alcohol or solvents of any kind to avoid the possibility
256. or unplugging from an Sy Do not drop it SN outlet or this unit e Atregular intervals you should unplug the power plug and clean it by using a dry cloth to wipe all O dust and other accumulations away from its prongs Also disconnect the power plug from the power outlet whenever the unit is to remain unused for an extended period of time Any accumulation of dust between the power plug and the power outlet can result in poor insulation and lead to fire an outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices Be especially careful when using extension cords the total power used by all devices you have connected to the extension cord s outlet must never exceed the power rating watts amperes for the extension cord Excessive loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and eventually melt through e Do not force the unit s power supply cord to share SN entangled Also all cords and cables should be e Before using the unit in a foreign country consult placed so they are out of the reach of children with your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page nas e Never climb on top of nor place heavy objects on S e Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming the unit e Batteries must never be recharged heated taken S apart or thrown into fire or water e Never handle the power cord or its plugs with wet lt a ES
257. ord Can t record Tempo of recorded song or metronome is off The recorded performance has disappeared Cause Remedy If you select a part that does not contain performance data notes will not be displayed in the score Change the part that is displayed p 90 The score screen feature is particularly unsuitable for the display of difficult complex musical works that demand accurate notation Refer to Notes Regarding the Score Display p 89 In the score screen some lyrics or notes could extend beyond the edges of the screen and not be displayed In certain cases such as when playing songs on floppy disks the song may lag when excessive amounts of performance data are used Has one of the track buttons for recording been selected p 111 Has the setting for Punch in Recording p 133 or Tempo Recording p 142 been made Select the replace recording method p 131 It is not possible to record while the score is being generated Once the unit has finished generating the score i e when the measure number in the screen is no longer highlighted try the operation once again If you select an internal song in which the tempo changes during the song and then record the tempo will change in the same way for the performances that are recorded on the other tracks The tempo of the metronome will also change in the same way If you record additional material without erasing t
258. ouch lt Aux Out gt A screen like the following appears gt AUR Out 3322 4 Touch to choose the marker setting Explanation Select this when using an external speaker for the surround effect p 35 Display Select this when playing the keyboard performance through the KR s internal speaker and the accompaniment sound through an amp or speaker connected to the Aux jack Concert 3 Touch lt Exit gt to go back to the Marker screen E Setup Examples With Aux Set to Surround Spacious Location The piano sound is played through the KR s speaker and the surround sound is played through the external speaker External Speaker and KR s Speaker Volume Settings p 37 e Volume of the external speaker is raised e Volume of the KR s speaker is lowered Piano Sound Speaker IF ove ov Speaker U Se Speaker Location Limited in Space The piano sound is played through the KR s speaker and the surround sound is played both through the KR s speaker and the external speaker External Speaker and KR s Speaker Volume Settings p 37 e Volume of the external speaker is raised e Volume of the KR s speaker is raised Aa Piano Sound Su O Speaker 177 A gt Q O 11 oll O O da Q sl o O U Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices Connecting a Computer E Connect to the MIDI Connectors You can use a U
259. p to fall Make sure that the end of the top stick is inserted securely into the top slip To close the top reverse the opening procedure 18 Before You Start Playing Opening and Closing the Top KR 15 Raising the Music Stand 1 Gently raise the music stand then secure it in place 2 To collapse the stand fold in the metal fittings while supporting the stand with both hands and gently fold down the stand CAUTION Always be sure to put the music stand in the upright position before opening and raising the piano top Be sure to leave the music stand in the upright position before closing the piano top Open the Top board A WARNING Children must not be permitted to open or close the top on their own adult supervision is required 3 Liftthe right front the upper note side A in the figure of the board with both hands fold it up 4 While holding up the top with one hand lift up the top stick and insert its end into the appropriate top slip A WARNING When opening the top be careful not to open it too far Opening the top at an angle in excess of 20 degrees may damage the unit or cause the top to drop Also before opening the top make sure that no one is in the path of the top as it is opened CAUTION Do not move the piano with the top in the open position The top stick may disengage from the socket causing the top to fall To close the top reverse the opening proced
260. part match the pitch of the right hand part during split performance On the Basic screen touch lt Layer gt or lt Split gt The KR switches to layer performance or split performance To apply Octave Shift touch the name of the tone you ve selected Press the Tone button to display the Tone selection screen Touch Octave lt gt or lt gt in the lower part of the screen to adjust the pitch of the sound Each time you touch lt gt the pitch is raised one octave Each time you touch lt gt the pitch is lowered one octave The sound can be changed from two octaves lower than the original sound 2 to two octaves above the original 2 Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Basic screen or the previous screen NERO When the keyboard has been divided into upper and lower sections the damper pedal is applied to only the upper section If you want to add lingering reverberations to the notes of the lower section see Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads Pedal Setting User Functions p 157 NERO You cannot use Octave Shift when using a single tone for the entire keyboard or in the right hand Tone during layer performances Chapter 1 Performance Adding Reverberation to the Sound Reverb Apply a reverb effect to the notes you play with the KR Reverb makes it sound as if you are playing in a concert hall 1 e Press the Reverb button and wa
261. pears touch lt Close gt Touch lt gt on the screen The Check screen display compares the example performance with your own performance Analyze and practice any trouble spots O 3 Changing the practice settings Immediately after turning on the power all measures are set for practice at the original tempo In the beginning you ll probably want to select specific phrases and practice that material repeatedly at a slower tempo Touch lt Options gt A screen like the one shown below appears NERO When the Transpose function p 103 is set to ON the original tone is sounded when you touch notes or lt One Note gt on the screen MERO Changing the Performance Played Back in the Check Screen A gt Q O caja 11 A You can switch the performance that is played back by touching the score for User or Reference in the Check screen When the keyboard is displayed in the Check screen touch lt User gt or lt Reference gt to switch the performance to be played back 93 Chapter 4 Practice Functions The right hand part 1 through 146 Measure Original tempo Chapter 4 Switch the screens Parameter Set Value Left Hand Right Hand Both Hands Explanation Selects the part or parts to be practiced Specifies measures for practice Most of the KR s internal songs have markers set in order to make repeated practice easier You can specify t
262. pening only the front top Z WARNING Children must not be permitted to open or close the top on their own adult supervision is required Because the top is very heavy always use two or more people when opening and closing the top and be sure to handle it carefully 1 Lift the right front the upper note side A in the figure of the board with both hands fold it back and then lay it down slowly on the top CAUTION Do not move the piano with the top in the open position The top stick may disengage from the socket causing the top to fall WARNING When opening the top be careful not to open it too far Opening the top at an angle in excess of 30 degrees may damage the unit or cause the top to drop Also before opening the top make sure that no one is in the path of the top as it is opened About the Topsticks and Topslip The KR 17 has two topsticks each a different length Opening both the front top and the top You can use the different topsticks to change the amount the 2 Follow Step 1 to open the front top Then lift the right top is left open front the upper note side B in the figure of the board with both hands Long top stick Short top stick B The topsticks and topslip work together as illustrated below The long top stick for inner top slip C The short top stick for outer top slip D CAUTION If you use the wrong top slip the top stick could slip out of the top slip causing the to
263. pitch in a Step Flanger stepwise fashion Enhancer Adds modulation to the sound Applies soft distortion to the sound Distortion Applies hard distortion to the sound Auto Wah Changes the tone in a cyclical manner Suppresses fluctuations in volume Cuts off the reverberations before they Gate Reverb fade away completely 2V Pitch Shifter ados two pra opnos to me original sound two voice pitch shifter EB Pitch Shifter Ihe pitch will change in steps feedback pitch shifter Enhancer Applies both enhancer and chorus gt Chorus effects Enhancer Applies both enhancer and flanger gt Flanger effects Enhancer gt Delay Applies both enhancer and delay effects Chorus gt Delay Applies both chorus and delay effects Flanger gt Delay Applies both flanger and delay effects GS Chorus 4 Display Explanation Overdrive Applies both overdrive and chorus gt Chorus effects Overdrive Applies both overdrive and flanger gt Flanger effects Overdrive gt Delay Applies both overdrive and delay effects Distortion Applies both distortion and chorus gt Chorus effects Distortion Applies both distortion and flanger gt Flanger effects Distortion gt Delay Applies both distortion and delay effects Sympathetic Applies a resonance effect when the Resonance damper pedal is depressed ith Wave Choris Produces a chorus with strong undulations Applies different chorus effects in the RRN treble and
264. pon reaching a specified point in the song When you press the Pad or Rec button once more the KR exits recording mode and returns to normal playback O Recording a Passage Specified by Markers 1 Before you start re recording place markers A and B to define the passage Following the procedures described in Setting Markers for Repeated Practice Marker p 100 use Markers A and B to specify the passage 2 In the Rec Mode screen p 131 select lt Auto Punch In Out gt Rec Stop This changes the recording mode to Punch In Recording Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Menu screen 3 O Begin recording Begin recording using the procedures described in Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons Redoing Recordings p 111 or Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts 16 Track Sequencer p 127 Up until the specified passage the previously recorded performance plays back When you reach the specified passage sounds are erased as recording starts begin playing now When you reach the end of the specified passage recording stops and the KR returns to playback of the previously recorded performance When you press the m Play Stop button the song stops Starting Recording from the Measure Specified by Buttons and Pedals If using the Performance Pads or pedals you must first change the function of the pedals and Pads Follow the procedures in A
265. r Memory tad 165 Automatically Starting the Quick Tour eee 166 Disabling Functions Other Than Piano Performance Painel LO K AAA A aah tats 166 Changing the Functions of the Remote Control s Buttons 167 Enabline the Mov ine Rey sins 168 Changing the Moving Key Settings coconccicnncnncnncnnnninnanicanaso 168 Changing the Part That Makes the Keys MOV n se 168 Detailed Song Playback Settings cooonnnonononononenmenisnisisinioss 169 Changing the Tone Settings When Playing Back Songs Play Modelado tte 169 Endings the Lyrics Eyes uri 170 Changing the Parts Assigned to the Track Buttons During SMF Playback Track ASsion sisisicn sin as 170 Chaneine the CO Sete islas 171 Synchronizing the Timing of the Piano and ACCO0M PAMELA 171 Setting the Type of CD To Be Played Back eee 171 Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices 172 Conn ct e MIDI DEE a 172 COMES e o ea tn 172 Making the Connections iio 173 Performing in Ensemble with MIDI Instruments VE JES oh actaing oka eaa nnn EO 173 NUDE SO Sd Wiper es eee aches ak eases 174 Selecting the Transmit Channel Tx Channel oococciccnnc o 174 Disconnecting the Internal Sound Generator and Keyboard Eocal Controls nal ali sea 174 Sending Tone Change Messages Program Change Bank Select MSB Bank Select LSB oooonoocccnoccconcccnooccconnccnnnos 175 Sending Recorded Performance Data to a MIDI Device Composer MIDI Uni aa 175 Connecting to Audio Equipment oooconnnc
266. r ooo 40 Applying Effects to the Sound Effects cocoinicncnnnncononicinionaricns 42 Adding Effects to Mic Vocals Vocal Effect cece eens 43 Enjoying Karaoke Performances with Music Files 51 Using the Metronome and Rhythm Rhythm Partner 52 Usme the Metronome ardid 52 Changing the Metronome SettingS cccce sss seeeeeeeeees 53 Playing ii 56 Changing the Rhythm settings msi titi 56 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment 58 Music Styles and Automatic Accompaniment cccceceseeeeees 58 Performing Using Automatic Accompaniment ACA AA r A ARTOA 59 About NOIS eona nra E ATN 60 Playing Chords with Simple Fingering Chord Intelligence 60 Viewing Chord Fingerings Chord Finder 61 Selecting Music Styles Music Style Buttons cece 62 Selecting Music Styles on Floppy Disks oocncncincmmmmmm m 63 Using Keywords to Search for Music Styles Style Search 64 Playing Only Music Style Rhythm Patterns eee 65 Adjusting the Accompaniment Tempo ccconicnioniononionononionionianiones 65 Starting and Stopping the Accompaniment cece cites 66 Having the Accompaniment Start Simultaneously When You Play the Keyboard Sync cece esses 66 Stopping Automatic Accompaniment cece eects cece 67 Having a Count Sound Play at the End of the Intro Cold WN ea RNE Ei TREAT 68 Modifying an AccompanimMent e essseseserereserererererersre
267. r to p 77 for instructions on displaying the score refer to p 88 1 e Decide on the tone and tempo of the performance After choosing the settings touch lt Exit gt to display the Basic screen Recording settings 2 Press the Rec button A screen like the one shown below appears Do you want to record a new song or add on to the current song Add On iL NewSono 3 Touch lt Add On gt With this setting you can record while listening to the selected song Selecting the track to record 4 Press the track button for the track that you want to record i e the track that you want to play yourself The indicator of the button you pressed will blink and the KR enters recording standby mode Since in this example we will record the right hand performance press the 4 Upper button to make the button s indicator light blink To cancel recording press the Rec button once more Start recording 5 Press the m Play Stop button A two bar count in plays then recording starts Even without pressing the m Play Stop button recording starts when you play the keyboard There is no count in played when you start by playing the keyboard instead of pushing the m Play Stop button When recording starts the m Play Stop and Rec buttons indicators light Stop recording 6 Press the m Play Stop button Recording stops 110 NERD T
268. ral acoustic plano sound Touch lt ON gt to turn the Hammer Response function on Touch the screen slider to adjust the time it takes for a key to sound after it is pressed The more the slider is moved to Slow the more delayed the sound is when the keys are played softly Conversely sounds are produced more quickly when the keys are played with greater force Touch lt OFF gt to cancel the effect 154 E Adjusting the Resonant Sounds String Resonance When the keys are pressed on an acoustic piano the strings for keys that are already pressed also vibrate sympathetically The function used to reproduce this resonance is called String Resonance At Step 3 in Procedure p 152 touch lt String Resonance gt String Resonance SSS When a key ts pressed this recreates the resonance with HH strings of keys already pressed Touch lt ON gt to turn the String Resonance function on Touch the screen slider to adjust the amount of effect applied Moving the slider to Max increases the amount of resonance effect applied Moving the slider to Min reduces the amount of effect applied Touch lt OFF gt to cancel the effect Chapter 9 Various Settings E Adjusting the Keyboard Touch Key Touch You can vary the touch of the keyboard when you play the keys At Step 3 in Procedure p 152 touch lt Key Touch gt B z Key Touch You can play with
269. ranger 155 A aie boc E E 155 Changing the Keyboard s Split Point Split Point 156 Changing Music Styles Without Changing the Tone or Tenipo One Touch Setting sas pct 156 Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads Pedal Setting User Fu ctions scncese 157 Changing the Bend Range Pedal Setting cee 159 Changing How Chords Are Played and Specified Arranger Cone a NS AA 159 Placing a Marker in the Middle of a Measure 0 ee 160 Changing the Settings for the Count In and Countdown 160 Settings for the Colt 160 Settings for the Countdown e ccccnccccocnnnnnnonnnnnancnnnananannonccnconcnnnnos 161 CCT SETI E Sir daeeteneuuieenebe 161 Procedi A oideatantaralousaeh aon inann iceland acestiamates 161 Changing Standard Pitch Master Tune 162 Changing the Language Language 162 Changing the Screen Message When the Power Is Turned On Opening Message still i 162 Changing the Settings for Showing Images with the External Display External Display 163 Selecting Images To Be Shown on the KR and External Displays User Image Display oconcncnnninnoninonananianionionioss 163 Turning Off the Beat Indicator Beat Indicator o oo 164 Remembering the Settings Even When the Power is Turned Off Memory Backup serisi ea a anh 164 Restoring the Factory Settings Factory Reset o 165 Calibrating the Touch Screen Touch Screen 165 Formatting the Use
270. rasing the Performance on Specific Tracks eee 112 Changing How Recording StOPS cccooconoononononnenionnnnnnnnncnnraninonanns 112 Recording Songs Starting with Pickups cece eens 113 Using Floppy DisKS suivant 114 Inserting and Ejecting a Floppy Disk eee 114 Formatting Floppy Disks Format oooncnnnnnmnmmnmesn m m 114 SAV GONE Mi Renee PRR Ar re ree ee a ren er reer ner revere errr ee 116 Deleting Saved SONGS x tad ea 119 Copying Songs on Floppy Disks to Favorites 0 0 0 120 Copying Songs Saved in Favorites to Floppy Disks 121 Chapter 6 User Program Registration 122 Saving Performance Settings User Program coooicnccioncnnninannnnnnos 122 Calling Up Saved User Programs ia sscdeas sci secosraprasissedenavincsinieddesduee 123 Changing the Way User Programs Are Called Up 123 paving the User Program SEts rca 123 Loading Saved User Program Sets oooocnicnnoncnnnnnnncnnnnnnninnncnnnnos 124 Deleting Saved User Program Sets ooccccicnnnnnnnonnnnoncnnnncnnrninnnnnns 125 Copying Sets of User Programs on Floppy Disks to the User Menorca 125 Coping Sets of User Programs Stored in the User Memory to Floppy DIS dd 126 16 Using the Pedal to Switch User Programs oonocicnicncnnonininnnnnnncnnsss 126 Simultaneously Switching User Program and Transmitting TG INU A DOTS nasa 126 Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs 127 Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts 16 Track
271. rb button and watch the indicator light go out 34 The reverb effect is eliminated NEP No effect is applied when the slider is moved all the way to the left In this case the button s indicator won t light up when you press the Reverb button Chapter 1 Performance Adding a Surround Sound to the Accompaniment and Reverb Surround You cannot use both You can connect an amp or external speaker to the Aux jack and play Surround Reverb and accompaniment and reverb sounds through it By using an external speaker this Advanced 3D way it will seem that you are surrounded by the accompaniment or reverb This is simultaneously with called the surround effect Surround Accomp y a Grround Reverb Equalizer E Giving More Breadth to the Accompaniment Sound NEP 1 e Connect amp or external speaker to the Aux jack When using the Surround function sounds are output from the external speaker even 2 Press the Surround button and watch the indicator light up when headphones are 3 connected e Touch lt Surround Accomp gt When using headphones The Surround Accomp Screen appears touch lt Advanced 3D gt to have the Advanced 3D effect Touch applied You cannot use the Surround OFF function when Aux Out is set to Concert Mode p 177 Bass O Surround Ala E comple i MEMD A EM For more on the speaker ON
272. rersrsrersrsres 69 Changing the Accompaniment Pattern Fill In Buttons 69 Changing the Instrumental Makeup of Music Styles Oly Ie Orce trat asieran lida Riri ino Nara 70 Playing Phrases POTS 71 Adding Harmony to the Right Hand Part Melody Inteligence F annesi 72 Playing Sounds in the Left Hand During a Performance Mower TONG hirurren hena dE S 73 Playing the Piano with Accompaniment Added Pano Sye Arran er aa 74 Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Part Balance 793 Changing the Volume Balance between the Accompaniment and the Keyboard Balance Knob 75 Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Performance Part Part Balance usan 75 Chapter 3 Song Playback c ccsccsssseeeeeseeeenseees 77 PIAVIN G2 SOUS ii A AA 77 Using Keywords to Search for Songs Song Search 79 Registering the Songs You Like Favorites coioncnnonnononenonoses 80 Removing Songs from FavorlteS oocoocncnncnninncnninnnnnnnnnanicnnanacanos 81 Playing Back Songs on CDs Only for Instrument Equipped A de aia iad AS aaa ease cub soa aed ueeecaman aaa 82 CAOS ss 82 Playing Back SONGS OM COS iii 83 Using the Remote Control Only for Instrument Equipped with CD Drive 0 0 85 Installing Batteries in the Remote Control 0 0 0 cece 85 Contents How to Use the Remote Control cece 85 About the Remote Control minado csi 86 Chapter 4 Practice Functions c seceseseeeeees 88 Displayin
273. ress the Fill In Variation button and watch the indicator light up The instrument is set so that the variation performance pattern is played Press the Fill In Original button and watch the indicator light up The instrument is set so that the original performance pattern is played Pressing these buttons during a performance inserts a one bar fill in at the appropriate place and time Adding a fill in without changing the accompaniment pattern You can play only the fill in without changing the accompaniment pattern Press the lit Original or Variation Fill In button during the performance 69 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment E Changing the Instrumental Makeup of Music Styles Style Orchestrator You can change the arrangement of an accompaniment This function is called Style Orchestrator Each Music Style has four different accompaniment arrangements DigiScore Oo Performance Pad O asic Advanced1 Advanced 2 Full Style Orchestrator 1 e Press the Style Orchestrator button and watch the indicator light up MEMO The instrument is set to allow you to change the arrangement with the Performance Pads AO PE RE as button or User Function 2 Press Performance Pad 1 4 to change the arrangement for the o Me pIe Orchestrator button s accompaniment indicator goes out and the Watch the indicator of the button you pressed light up function of the Perform
274. rformance part Rhythm Music Style Rhythm Part Bass Bass Bass Tone p 67 Accompaniment 1 Accompaniment 2 Accompaniment 3 Chord Tone p 67 Short phrases sounded when the Performance Pads are pressed p 71 Screen for models featuring the Moving Key Switch the screens This shows the volume balance between the keyboard s Tones when either layer performance p 30 or split performance p 31 are used or the volume balance when using the keyboard to play percussion instruments or sound effects p 28 Displayed Tone Part Drums Percussion instruments or sound effects played with the keys Left hand Tone Layer Tone Right hand Tone Only with models featuring Moving Key Part Balance Only with models featuring Moving Key Switch the screens ae eee Sounds other than the keyboard parts when a CD is playing Overall sound this is the same as the volume set with the remote control VOL buttons 2 Touch each slider t to adjust the volume balance You can also make these adjustments by touching sliders and then using buttons or the dial Touch lt Exit gt to go back to the previous screen 76 Chapter 3 Song Playback Playing a Song Now let s try practicing while playing back internal songs commercial music files and songs saved to floppy disks You can use rewind or fast forward to go to any desired measure and play back from that
275. rformances MEM Performances that have been recorded using Automatic Accompaniment are Music Styles are composed of assigned to the track buttons as shown below five parts For details refer to Music Styles and Automatic Track button Performance Recorded pene Rema Ape The rhythm part of an Automatic Accompaniment is recorded here In addition drum sets and effect sounds that are selected with the keys in a performance are recorded to this track R Rhythm 1 Whole When using Piano Style accompaniment p 74 the performance played on the keyboard is recorded here 2 Bass The Automatic Accompaniment bass part and Accomp accompaniment part are recorded here When the KR is set so that sounds from performances on the left hand side of the keyboard are played while the 3 Lower Automatic Accompaniment sounds p 73 your own performance on the left hand side of the keyboard is recorded here 4 Upper Your own performance on the right hand side of the PP keyboard is recorded here 109 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Recording Along with a Song Try recording along with internal songs and songs on floppy disks Here record your right hand performance along with the song accompaniment Settings for recording performances Select a song before you begin recording When you have selected the song press the Score Display button to display the score For more on how to select songs refe
276. rned on At Step 3 in Procedure p 161 touch lt Opening Message gt A screen like the one shown below appears Openino Message SREE Use When you touch the character icon the character is input where at the position When you touch the icon for the character to be input the character appears at the cursor position For example touching the lt ABC gt icon in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group A B gt C A Each touch of lt A a 0 gt cycles the type of characters through II hh English upper case English lower case numerals symbols then back to English upper case When you touch lt Del gt the character at the cursor position is deleted When you touch lt Ins gt a space is inserted at the cursor position When you have finished inputting the characters touch lt Execute gt Never turn off the power while the display indicates lt Executing gt Doing so will damage the KR s internal memory making it unusable gt If you touch lt All Clear gt at the bottom of the screen and then touch lt Execute gt the display reverts to the screen that normally appears when you turn on the power to the instrument Chapter 9 Various Settings E Changing the Settings for Showing Images with the External Display External Display This selects the content shown on the external display connecte
277. ructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit For Canada NOTICE This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations AVIS Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Reglement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada This owner s manual is printed
278. ry capacity of the KR is full Save the song data on a floppy disk p 116 and delete the song or the User style data stored on the KR memory The KR cannot deal with the excessive MIDI data sent from the external MIDI device Reduce the amount of MIDI data sent to the KR A MIDI cable or computer cable has been disconnected Connect it properly and securely An excessive amount of performance data has been sent to KR in one time and therefore could not be recorded Change the tempo more slowly to record the performance again The Computer switch is set to a wrong position or the computer is set wrongly Switch off the KR then set the Computer switch to the correct position and set the computer correctly After that switch on the KR again There may be a problem with the system Repeat the procedure from the beginning If it is not solved after you have tried several times contact the Roland service center Moving Key Error Stop use immediately and contact the nearest Roland Service Center Automatic Keyboard System or CD Drive Error Stop use immediately and contact the nearest Roland Service Center gt o 0 3 a A O N 183 N 0 O Q Q Q lt Piano Grand Piano1 PianoStrings Piano Choir Tremolo Dyno Jazzy Vib Gt Suitcase Vibraphone Harpsi Doubl Marimba Steel Drums Honky Tonk Stage Rhodes Ballad Piano Wurly Dyno Rhodes Rock Piano Honky tonk 2 Clav Harpsi Si
279. s Factory Reset p 165 Chapter 6 User Program Registration Calling Up Saved User Programs You can easily call up settings saved to the User Program button 1 Press the User Program button The User Program screen appears 2 Touch the name of the User Program you want to call up When you touch the name of the User Program the buttons or other performance settings instantly change to the previously saved settings E Changing the Way User Programs Are Called Up When calling up User Programs you can prevent the settings for Automatic Accompaniment from switching by not touching the touch screen for a few moments 1 Press the User Program button 2 Touch lt Option gt in the lower part of the screen A settings screen like the following appears SF e UPG Option 2 SRS La All settinos in the user program are changed by 1S touching the screen brieflu q Touch briefly and only non Arranger settings are changed Touch for several seconds and all settings are changed 3 Touch lt Instant gt or lt Delayed gt to select the setting Display Explanation Immediately after a User Program name is touched the Automatic Accompaniment settings also switch The Automatic Accompaniment settings switch after you touch and road the User Program name for a few moments Delayed Touch lt Exit gt to return to the User Program screen Saving the User Program Sets
280. s for the Automatic Accompaniment settings p 155 When you touch lt Functions gt on the Piano screen the parameters for the piano performance settings continue into the second page p 152 A Functions screen like the following appears Parame Value Explanation ter Name 3 Functions EERE Countdown will be added 1 sue A ON or not OFF Voice JP Specify the countdown Voice ENG sound Specify the track or part eran that will determine the Upper Track beginning of the Pare t performance when added a countdown Parameter Selects the language used in the display p 162 Opening Sets the message that appears when Message the power is turned on p 162 MIDI Ensemble Refer to p 173 Selects the content to be shown on the connected external display p 163 User Image Selects the image data and display Display used p 163 Refer to p 174 Refer to p 174 External Display Program Change Remains the beat indicator off at all Beat Indicator times p 164 Stores edited settings and other data to the KR p 164 Restores the content stored with Factory Reset Memory Backup to the original factory settings p 165 6101dpu5 Memory Backup Allows for calibration of the touch screen p 165 Refer to p 177 Moving Key Refer to p 168 Changing the Functions of the Remote Control s Buttons p 167 Touch Screen Remote Control 161 Oo d
281. s screen 44 Chapter 1 Performance O Altering Vocals Transformer MEMD You can modify the way your voice sounds through the microphone This is called When you use the Voice the Voice Transformer function Transformer function the resonance setting for the piano T see p 152 may sometimes be e Touch lt Transformer gt in Step 2 of How to select Vocal Effect p 43 reset Transforner SS _ Bear Robot lten Computer Female 2 Touch any one of the icons Here s what the different icons do Explanation Transforms the input into the sound of a child s voice Transforms the input sound into the voice of a large animal Transforms the input into the sound of a robot s voice Transforms the input into a duck s quacking sound Transforms the input into an alien voice Transforms the input into a voice like that from a computer Female Transforms male voices into female voices Male Transforms female voices into male voices 3 Sing through the microphone Your voice is transformed according to the item you selected Cancelling the Effect 4 Once again touch the icon you selected in Step 2 The Voice Transformer effect is eliminated Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Vocal Effects screen 45 Chapter 1 Performance O Adding Harmonies Harmonist Models Equipped With Moving Key MEMD You can sing with a harmony accompaniment even when you re playing
282. saved to that number If you select a number with a previously saved song and then proceed to save a new song the previously saved song will be erased If you do not want to lose a saved song select a number with no song name indicated in the save destination column 117 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Selecting the tone compatibility format when saving to floppy disks 8 Save 9 118 Touch lt KR gt or lt MT gt Some Tones are unique to the KR Data that is recorded using these tones may not play back correctly on other Roland Digital Pianos or Music Players When you want to save data so that it can be played back on another devices save the data with MT set as the Tone compatibility format Display Explanation CS The song is saved as data capable of reproducing performances with richness of expression using this unit s special Tones Data is saved in a form that can also be played on the Roland Digital Pianos or Music Players other than this unit You can listen to songs saved in this format on the Roland HP G R series and KR series keyboards as well as on Roland MT series devices lt Note gt When data saved with MT as the Tone compatibility format is played back on this instrument some of the nuances that were part of the performance at the time the data was recorded may be altered Even with data saved with MT as the Tone compatibility format an exact r
283. select the setting Display Explanation Lyrics are displayed automatically when performance data containing lyrics is played back Lyrics are not displayed even if the song data being played back contains lyrics data 4 Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Menu screen NERO Even when this is set to OFF you can still have the lyrics be displayed by touching lt lyrics gt when it appears in the Piano or Basic screen p 25 NEP The screen may be switched when you press the button while the Lyrics screen is displayed To have the lyrics displayed again touch lt lyrics gt on the Piano or Basic screen or stop playback of the song then press the gt m Play Stop button 170 E Changing the Parts Assigned to the Track Buttons During SMF Playback Track Assign Normally when playing back Roland Piano Digital compatible SMFs p 201 the left hand part is assigned to the 3 Lower button and the right hand part is assigned to the 4 Upper button However assignment of the right hand and left hand parts may differ with some SMF data If you cannot get the right hand and left hand parts to work well set on Auto then change the setting to 2 1 Part or 3 4 Part NEP When you select this parameter the message OK to delete song may be displayed Refer to If the following screen appears p 105 NERO This setting is effective with SMF format song data T
284. sh to purchase SMF Music Files please consult the retailer where you purchased your KR SMF with Lyrics SME SME with Lyrics refers to SMF Standard MIDI File that contains the lyrics When Music Files carrying the SMF with Lyrics logo are played back on a compatible device one bearing the same logo the lyrics will appear in its display KR Can Use E About the KR Sound Generator The KR come equipped with GM 2 GS sound generators GENERAL General MIDI M The General MIDI is a set of recommendations which seeks to provide a way to go beyond the limitations of proprietary designs and standardize the MIDI capabilities of sound generating devices Sound generating devices and music files that meets the General MIDI standard bears the General MIDI logo Music files bearing the General MIDI logo can be played back using any General MIDI sound generating unit to produce essentially the same musical performance GENERAL General MIDI 2 Mil The upwardly compatible General MIDI 2 recommendations pick up where the original General MIDI left off offering enhanced expressive capabilities and even greater compatibility Issues that were not covered by the original General MIDI recommendations such as how sounds are to be edited and how effects should be handled have now been precisely defined Moreover the available sounds have been expanded General MIDI 2 compliant sound generators are capable of reliably playi
285. shown below appears 2 Touch the performance Part with settings you want to change 3 Use the buttons and the dial to specify which 16 track Sequencer performance part you want to extract gt In the Manual mode the type of chords appear at the bottom of the screen Set the Parts for all chords 4 Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Style Converter screen The Style Converter screen appears Saving a User Style You can save the User Styles you create to floppy disks and the user memory When saved to the user memory User Styles are not deleted when the power is turned off You can also select Styles saved to the user memory by pressing the Music Style User button You can save up to 99 User Styles in user memory What is the User Memory The user memory is the area within the instrument where User Styles created with the KR sets of User Programs and other such data are stored You can also copy User Styles and sets of User Programs saved on floppy disks Data saved to the user memory is not deleted even when the KR s power is turned off gt When you want to clear all of the content saved to the user memory and restore the settings to the factory settings refer to Formatting the User Memory p 165 Preparations for saving data When saving to a floppy disk first insert a floppy disk in the disk drive 1 Press the Music Style User button A User Style screen
286. sier The KR s color screen makes viewing easier It also functions as a touch panel so you can carry out tasks simply by touching the panel Introduction How To Use This Manual The KR Owner s Manual consists of two volumes Quick Start and the Owner s Manual Please start out by reading Before You Start Playing p 18 in the Owner s Manual this volume This explains how to connect the KR s power cord and how to turn on the instrument s power After turning on the KR s power please continue by reading Quick Start By trying out the various procedures while reading the Quick Start you can easily learn how to play the KR and make use of its major functions especially procedures that involve use of the main buttons The Owner s Manual describes procedures from basic operation to procedures for special applications for example using the KR as an accompanist and creating songs that will help you master the KR s many performance functions E Conventions Used in This Manual This manual uses the following conventions in the interest of simpler more concise instructions e Button names are enclosed in square brackets as in One Touch Program Piano button e The text incorporates KR 17 screen shots and panel diagrams Thus there will be some portions where the information differs from that for the KR 15 e For easier readability some screens and colors used here may differ
287. sing the Macintosh Patch Bay utility specify 1 MHz as the Interface Type MIDI Interface Clock gua COMPUtEr Apple Macintosh mor Lpc 2 NES Mac PC 1 t Modem Port Qe Lo Computer cable sold separately gt Connection with an IBM PC Use a computer cable sold separately to connect the Computer connector on the KR to the COM1 or COM2 serial port on the IBM PC Set the Computer switch to PC 2 4a COMPuter IBM PC AT bon MIDI Pc2 X ao ER t RS 232C Computer cable sold separately 179 A gt Q O mie 1 oll O N 0 o Q Q Q lt Troubleshooting The power doesn t come on The button doesn t work Nothing appears on screen Vertical lines appear in the screen Color is washed out at the edges of the screen The touch screen doesn t respond correctly Depressing a pedal has no effect or the pedal effect doesn t stop The volume level of the instrument connected to Input jacks is too low Images not shown on external display when external display is connected 180 If you think there s a problem read this first Cause Remedy Is the power cord connected and plugged in correctly p 20 Is the panel locked p 166 Turn the power off then back on The KR uses a liquid crystal screen so text may not be displayed when the ambient temperatur
288. solo This When you use the Harmonist is called the Harmonist function function the resonance setting for the piano see p 152 may 1 E sometimes be reset And the e Touch lt Harmonist gt in Step 2 of How to select Vocal Effect p 43 siiscmapnitedeotnekeyboaid p 42 may be canceled Harnonist 2 Touch any one of the icons Here s what the different icons do Display Explanation Mv Voice The melody played on the keyboard is played as the harmony With some Harmonist types y The harmony is added to your voice regardless of the pitch you may not be able to play Dut The added harmony matches the chords specified on the harmony Wi tieome ot the keyboard Adding harmony to a single voice gives the effect of vocals on the enclosed CD two people singing together The melody played on the keyboard is played as the harmony Variety The harmony added is matched to the pitch for example higher pitches are used for female voices lower pitches for male voices The added harmony matches the chords specified on the Trio keyboard This adds a two voice harmony that makes it seem that a trio is singing The added harmony matches the chords specified on the Chord keyboard oo You can change the way harmonies are added with the Melody Intelligence type p 72 Unison Sounds like two people singing the same melody OctUp Adds another voice one octave higher than the original Oct Down Adds ano
289. song This feature is called Chord Sequencer Thanks to the chord sequencer you can create an accompaniment ahead of time and play along with your right hand 1 Press the Menu button and watch the indicator light up The Menu screen appears 2 Touch lt Chord Sequencer gt The screen like the one shown below is called Chord Sequencer screen This is the cursor The cursor shows where the chord change or other information is input This is the end of the song When continuing to add input insert measures by touching lt Ins gt S Funky Disco Division Original S Drch Full cords fat ew a This indicates the position where the accompaniment pattern Division or the Style Orchestrator changes Display Explanation One measure is inserted before the measure where the cursor is positioned The measure in which the cursor is positioned is deleted Allows input of chords without playing the Chords keyboard Refer to Inputting Chords without Playing the Keyboard p 135 All Clear Deletes all of the data that s been input Deletes the data at the cursor position Records the input chord progression Touch this icon when you have finished inputting all of the chords 3 Press a Music Style button or the touch screen to select a Music Style p 62 134 4 Touch lt Exit gt You are returned to the Chord Sequencer screen 5 Enter the chord progression
290. ss Tone E Stopping Automatic Accompaniment O Stopping with an added ending 1 e Press the Intro Ending button An ending plays and the Automatic Accompaniment stops When you press the Intro Ending button after touching Intro Ending Type lt 2 gt on the Basic screen a short ending plays O Stopping at the same time the button is pressed 1 e Press the Start Stop button The Automatic Accompaniment stops as soon as you press the button NERD You can change the sound of the chord tone and bass tone Take a look at Changing How Chords Are Played and Specified Arranger Config p 159 67 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment E Having a Count Sound Play at the End of the Intro Countdown If an intro plays before your performance you can have a count in sound played to the end of the intro helping you hear when to start playing When the Intro has finished playing the accompaniment plays Count Sound 1 e Press the Metronome button and watch the indicator light up The Metronome screen p 52 appears If you don t want the metronome to play press the Metronome button and indicator light goes out 2 Touch lt Countdown gt The following Countdown settings screen appears Countdown Settings S _ to set this to ON When you press the One Touch Program Arranger button the performance starts and the countdown sound plays at the end
291. ssigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads Pedal Setting User Functions p 157 and assign lt Auto Punch In Out gt to the buttons or pedal In the Rec Mode screen p 131 select lt Manual Punch In Out gt This changes the recording mode to Punch In Recording Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Menu screen Begin recording Begin recording using the procedures described in Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons Redoing Recordings p 111 or Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts 16 Track Sequencer p 127 A gt Q pe j 11 N The previously recorded performance will be played back Recording begins when you press the pedal the Performance Pad or the Rec button start re recording at this time Recording stops when you press the pedal the Performance Pad or the Rec button again and the previously recorded performance is played back When you press the m Play Stop button the performance stops When you re finished with Punch In Recording return to the ordinary Replace Recording mode Take a look at Changing the Recording Method p 131 133 N da oO sien o Le lt Q Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs Composing an Accompaniment By Entering Chords Chord Sequencer You can enter a chord progression and choose the places where the accompaniment pattern will change to create an accompaniment for a
292. st of safety please read and observe the following precautions e Carefully follow the installation instructions for batteries and make sure you observe the correct polarity e Avoid using new batteries together with used ones In addition avoid mixing different types of batteries e Remove the batteries whenever the unit is to remain unused for an extended period of time e If a battery has leaked use a soft piece of cloth or paper towel to wipe all remnants of the discharge from the battery compartment Then install new batteries To avoid inflammation of the skin make sure that none of the battery discharge gets onto your hands or skin Exercise the utmost caution so that none of the discharge gets near your eyes Immediately rinse the affected area with running water if any of the discharge has entered the eyes e Never keep batteries together with metallic objects such as ballpoint pens necklaces hairpins etc Used batteries must be disposed of in compliance with whatever regulations for their safe disposal that may be observed in the region in which you live Be careful when opening closing the lid so you do not get your fingers pinched p 20 Adult super le vision is recommended whenever small children use the unit Should you remove screws and cord cramp make sure to put them in a safe place out of children s reach so there is no chance of them being swallowed accidentally IMPORTANT NOTES
293. strial Park Wildey St Michael Barbados TEL 246 430 1100 BRAZIL Roland Brasil Ltda Rua San Jose 780 Sala B Parque Industrial San Jose Cotia Sao Paulo SP BRAZIL TEL 011 4615 5666 CHILE Comercial Fancy II S A Rut 96 919 420 1 Nataniel Cox 739 4th Floor Santiago Centro CHILE TEL 02 688 9540 COLOMBIA Centro Musical Ltda Cra 43 B No 25 A 41 Bododega 9 Medellin Colombia TEL 574 3812529 COSTA RICA JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Ave 1 Calle 11 Apartado 10237 San Jose COSTA RICA TEL 258 0211 CURACAO Zeelandia Music Center Inc Orionweg 30 Curacao Netherland Antilles TEL 305 5926866 DOMINICAN REPUBLIC Instrumentos Fernando Giraldez Calle Proyecto Central No 3 Ens La Esperilla Santo Domingo Dominican Republic TEL 809 683 0305 ECUADOR Mas Musika Rumichaca 822 y Zaruma Guayaquil Ecuador TEL 593 4 2302364 EL SALVADOR OMNI MUSIC 75 Avenida Norte y Final Alameda Juan Pablo II Edificio No 4010 San Salvador EL SALVADOR TEL 262 0788 GUATEMALA Casa Instrumental Calzada Roosevelt 34 01 zona 11 Ciudad de Guatemala Guatemala TEL 502 599 2888 HONDURAS Almacen Pajaro Azul S A de C V BO Paz Barahona 3 Ave 11 Calle S O San Pedro Sula Honduras TEL 504 553 2029 MARTINIQUE Musique amp Son Z I Les Mangle 97232 Le Lamantin Martinique F W I TEL 596 596 426860 Gigamusic SARL 10 Rte De La Folie 97200 Fort De France Martinique
294. t When you ve chosen lt Demo gt touching lt Exit gt changes the setting for resonant notes to lt Advanced gt Chapter 9 Various Settings E Changing the Tuning Tuning O Choosing the Tuning You can play classical styles such as Baroque using historic temperaments tuning methods Most modern songs are composed for and played in equal temperament the most common tuning in use today But at one time there were a wide variety of other tuning systems in existence By playing in the temperament that was in use when a composition was created you can experience the sonorities of chords originally intended for that song At Step 3 in Procedure p 152 touch lt Tuning gt You can choose from among the eight tunings described below Characteristics system This temperament divides the octave into 12 equal parts All intervals will be slightly out of tune by the same amount This setting is in effect when you turn on the power This temperament makes the 5th and 3rd intervals pure It is unsuited to playing melodies and cannot be transposed but is capable of beautiful sonorities Just Maj Just intonation differs between major and minor keys The same results as major can be obtained in a minor key Just min This tuning is suitable for the music of Arable Arabia This temperament is a modification of meantone temperament and just intonation allowing more freedom of modulati
295. t is illuminated Have song settings been changed for each Part on the 16 Track sequencer screen p 128 Some music files may contain settings that stop play at a point partway through the song Press the Fd Reset button several times more to return to the beginning of the tune Has a Marker placed in the song p 100 The fast forward and reverse buttons are ignored while music files is being read in Wait until processing finishes If you attempt to play back performance data that contains more data than the entire capacity of the KR s memory you may find that operations other than playback such as rewind or fast forward become unavailable There are two types of SMF music files format 0 and format 1 If the song uses SMF format 1 data there will be a slight delay until playback starts Refer to the booklet that came with the music files you re using to determine the format type Lyrics are not indicated properly in the display 182 With some music files the lyrics cannot be displayed correctly If you press a button while the lyrics are being shown in the display the lyrics will disappear To recall them touch lt lyrics gt in the Piano or Basic screen or press the gt Play Stop button In the score screen some lyrics or notes could extend beyond the edges of the screen and not be displayed Score is not indicated properly in the display Song becomes unstable Can t rec
296. t the beginning of a selected measure This is handy when you want to make a sudden change in tempo First carry out Steps 1 3 of Changing the Tempo Within the Song p 142 to make the Tempo Recording settings l Use the lt lt Bwd and gt gt Fwd buttons to move to the measure where you want to change the tempo The measure number appears in the top right area of the Basic screen 2 Press the O Rec button and watch the indicator is flashing The KR is put in recording standby 3 Use the buttons or the dial to change the tempo 4 Press the gt Play Stop button The song s tempo changes starts with the measure you selected gt While tempo recording is being used to write tempo the tempo display in the screen will be highlighted 5 When you press the gt Play Stop button the change in tempo stops You cannot record performances while in Tempo Recording mode When you re finished tempo recording go back to the ordinary Replace Recording Take a look at Changing the Recording Method Rec Mode p 130 gt If you want to restore the previous tempo delete the tempo A gt Q pe j 11 N data at the place where the tempo was recorded For an explanation of how to delete the information of tempo settings refer to Making Measures Blank Erase p 139 Tempo Recording Shortcut Hold down the Rec button and press
297. tch the its indicator light up A Reverb screen like the one shown below appears NEP Connecting an external speaker to the Aux jack provides an effect in which the listener seems to be enveloped by sound p 35 2 Touch an icon to select the performance space Ground Wide pen space with no reverberation Room Smallwwom O Studio Areordingstudio Hall Large concen halleverbention Dome Adomedtallpark oS Adds the extended reverberations found inside a cave Reproduces an indoor type reverb Provides a clear expansive reverberation Reproduces the reverberation found in a hall Gives reverberation with a greater sense of depth than GS Room Reproduces a plate echo reverberation created using the vibrations of a metal plate A delayed sound that is added to the original similar to the reflected sounds of mountain echoes GS Delay GS Pan Delay The reflected sounds are panned shifted laterally 33 Chapter 1 Performance de Touch the slider beneath the icons to adjust the effect selected Touch and slide the knob on the screen to the right for a deeper reverb and to the left for less You can also move the slider with the buttons and the dial Pressing the buttons simultaneously returns the slider to the initial value When you touch lt Exit gt the reverb effect is activated and you return to the previous screen Cancelling the Effect 4 Press the Reve
298. td Kick 2 Elec BD Side Stick Elec SD Hand Clap Gated SD Elec Low Tom 2 Closed Hi hat 1 Elec Low Tom 1 Pedal Hi hat 1 Elec Mid Tom 2 Open Hi hat 1 Elec Mid Tom 1 Elec Hi Tom 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Elec Hi Tom 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Reverse Cymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibra slap C High Bongo Low Bongo Mute High Conga Open High Conga Low Conga High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Cabasa Maracas Short Hi Whistle Long Low Whistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block Mute Cuica Open Cuica Mute Triangle Open Triangle Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo EXC7 EXC7 EXC1 EXC1 EXC1 EXC2 EXC3 EXC3 EXC4 EXC4 EXC5 EXC5 EXC6 EXC6 187 gt o E 0 3 a A O w Appendices Drum Set List No sound EXC will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number TR 808 Set Bar Chime Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Sticks Square Click Metronome Click Metronome Bell Std Kick 2 808 Bass Drum 1 808 Rim Shot 808 Snare Drum Hand Clap Snare Drum 2 808 Low Tom 2 808 CHH 808 Low Tom 1 808 CHH 808 Mid Tom 2 808 OHH EXC 1 808 Mid Tom 1 808 Hi Tom 2 808 Cymbal 808 Hi Tom 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cymbal 808 Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibra slap
299. terms Music Style 0000 O Que Pop Ballad Oldies Big Band Latin Trad Rock Acoustic Country Swing Gospel Kids Performance Pad asic Ad d1 Advanced 2 Full Assigning functions to the Performance Pads 1 e Press the User Function button and watch the indicator light up User Pad Setting q da oO sia Q Le Q i Rotary Pad 2 Pad 3 MEMO You can also assign the Tap Tempo function to the pedal and use the pedal to specify the tempo For details refer to for the Performance Pad to which the function is Assigning Functions to a P Pedals and Performance Pads assigned then select Tap Tempo Pedal Setting User Functions p 157 3 Touch lt Exit gt the tempo is indicated in the upper left of the screen Specifying the Tempo 4 Press the Pad to which Tap Tempo is assigned at least twice The tempo is set to the rhythm you used when tapping the button 96 Chapter 4 Practice Functions E Use Your Voice to Select the Tempo Vocal Tap Tempo Just as in Tap Tempo Function p 96 you can set tempos using your voice This MEMO feature is called Vocal Tap Tempo Vocal Tap Tempo does not function well when the mic Connect a microphone p 22 volume is too low Adjust the volume level with the Mic Volume knob gt Press the Metronome button Touch lt Vocal Tap gt Vocal T
300. ters Stored in Memory Backup p 200 At step 3 in Procedure p 161 touch lt Memory Backup gt A screen like the one shown below appears Menoru Backup SSS Stores settings in internal memory Touch lt Execute gt The confirmation message appears on screen Touch lt OK gt to store the setting When the setting has been stored in memory the previous screen will reappear Never turn off the power while the display indicates lt Executing gt Doing so will damage the KR s internal memory making it unusable Chapter 9 Various Settings E Restoring the Factory Settings Factory Reset You can return the content stored with Memory Backup p 164 and the User Programs p 122 to their original factory settings This operation is referred to as Factory Reset When you perform a Factory Reset all settings that have been stored in memory up to then are erased and reset to their factory defaults gt This operation does not return the touch screen calibration settings to the original factory condition To return the touch screen calibration settings to the original factory settings refer to Returning the touch screen calibration settings to the original factory settings p 165 gt When you want to restore the content registered to the KR s User memory to the factory condition refer to Formatting the User Memory p 165 At step 3 in Procedure p
301. the bend range At Step 3 Procedure p 155 touch lt Pedal Setting gt e Pedal Settino SSS Left Pedal Center Pedal Bend Range Touch lt Bend Range gt j to adjust the bend range setting You can set this to any value within a range of 1 to 12 in half tone steps up to one octave E Changing How Chords Are Played and Specified Arranger Config This changes the settings determining how Music Styles are played and how the keys are pressed to specify chords What are the Chord Tone and Bass Tone When the Automatic Accompaniment is stopped and Sync Start p 66 is turned off chords are produced when you play in the left hand side of the keyboard This is called the chord tone and the root of the chord that is played at the same time is called the bass tone At Step 3 Procedure p 155 touch lt Arranger Config gt firranoer Confiouration Base Tone Chord Tone Chord Intel A of each item to make settings ae Value Explanation ter Name played Only Music Style rhythm Chord amp Bs parts chord Tones and bass Tones are played OFF Acoustic Bs A Bass Cymbl Fingered Bs Picked Bs Fretless Bs Slap Bass Organ Bass Synth Bass 101 Selects the bass Tone or Thum Voice chord Tone When set to Off no tone is played A gt Q O j 11 OFF E Piano 1 E Piano 2 Soft E Piano Hard E Pia
302. the HP G MT KR or Atelier families or into a computer s drive Otherwise if the write protect tab remains in the Write position when you perform any disk operations using the other device s disk drive such as checking the contents of the disk or loading data you risk rendering the disk unreadable by this unit s disk drive Before Using CDs Handling the CD Drive Avoid using the unit immediately after it has been moved to a location with a level of humidity that is greatly different than its former location Rapid changes in the environment can cause condensation to form inside the drive which will adversely affect the operation of the drive and or damage discs When the unit has been moved allow it to become accustomed to the new environment allow a few hours before operating it Remove any disc from the drive before powering up or down To avoid the risk of malfunction and or damage insert only discs with into the CD drive Never insert any other type of disc Avoid getting paper clips coins or any other foreign objects inside the drive Do not subject to vibrations or physical shock during use and do not move the unit while the power is turned on The pickup is of dust resistant construction Do not use pickup cleaners or other such materials as they may damage the pickup Handling the CDs e When handling the discs please observe the following e Do not touch the recorded surface of the disc
303. the most natural touch This is the touch closest to that of an acoustic piano Eau ns e a Notes sound at an unchanging volume level regardless of how lightly or forcefully you play the keyboard This sets the keyboard to a light touch You can achieve fortissimo ff play with a less forceful touch than usual so the keyboard feels lighter This setting makes it easier for children whose hands have less strength This sets the keyboard to the standard touch You can play with the most natural touch This setting is closest to the response of an acoustic piano This sets the keyboard to a heavy touch You have to play the keyboard more forcefully than usual in order to play fortissimo ff so the keyboard touch feels heavier This setting allows you to add more expression when playing dynamically Touch any of the icons lt Fixed gt lt Light gt lt Medium gt or lt Heavy gt to set the key touch for the keyboard To make fine adjustments touch the slider in the screen Move the slider to the right to add resistance and to the right to make the key touch lighter Changing the Settings for One Touch Arranger E Procedure 1 Press the One Touch Program Arranger button to display the Basic screen 4 127 Funky Disco 2 Touch lt Functions gt A screen like the one shown below appears Functions Parame Explanation ter Name p Key Refer to Adjusting the Keybo
304. ther make of connection cable please note the following precautions e Some connection cables contain resistors Do not use cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit The use of such cables can cause the sound level to be extremely low or impossible to hear For infor mation on cable specifications contact the manufac turer of the cable Before opening or closing the keyboard lid always make sure that no pets or other small animals are located on top of the instrument in particular they should be kept away from the keyboard and its lid Otherwise due to the structural design of this instrument small pets or other animals could end up getting trapped inside it If such a situation is encountered you must immediately switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the outlet You should then consult with the retailer from whom the instrument was purchased or contact the nearest Roland Service Center Before Using Floppy Disks Handling the Floppy Disk Drive Install the unit on a solid level surface in an area free from vibration If the unit must be installed at an angle be sure the installation does not exceed the permissible range upward 0 downward 0 Avoid using the unit immediately after it has been moved to a location with a level of humidity that is greatly different than its former location Rapid changes in the environment can cause condensation to form inside the drive which will a
305. ther voice one octave lower than the original 5thUp Adds harmony a fifth above the original 3rdUp Adds harmony a third above the original Adds harmony a major fourth below the original 46 Chapter 1 Performance Cancelling the Effect MEMD 3 Touch the Harmonist type you selected in Step 2 again When you use the Harmonist function the resonance setting The Harmonist function is cancelled for the piano see p 152 may Touch lt Exit gt to go back to the Vocal Effects screen Me De Feehan Hie effects applied to the keyboard O Adding Harmonies Harmonist Models Without Moving Key a ones You can sing with a harmony accompaniment even when you re playing solo This is called the Harmonist function 1 e Touch lt Harmonist gt in Step 2 of How to select Vocal Effect p 43 Harnonist Duet OUct Up sth Up 4rd Up Ath own Chords 2 Touch any one of the icons Here s what the different icons do Display Oo o O at CC Duet Sounds like two people singing the same melody people singing the same melody Oct Up Adds another voice one octave higher than the original Oct Down Adds another voice one octave lower than the original another voice one octave lower than the Adds another voice one octave lower than the original ol The melody being played on the keyboard becomes the harmony 5th Up Adds harmony a fifth above the original 3rdUp Adds harmony a third above th
306. ting a new Style is selected the message Please select a song appears Use the Select Listen to a Song button to select a song p 77 then start the procedure again Ifa User Style has already been recorded a message like the one shown below appears OK to delete Stule Touch lt Cancel gt to return to the Menu screen Please save the User Style on a floppy disk or in the internal memory p 149 When you touch lt OK gt the previously recorded User Style is deleted and a new User Style is created A Style Converter screen like the one shown appears Parameter Name Settings Content Conv Mode Switches the mode Auto Manual Chord root for the segment to be Chord Root AE Chord type for the segment to be extracted major minor seventh Division Division Measure number of the first measure of the segment to be extracted Chord Type From For Number of measures extracted Making the settings 4 Touch lt Conv Mode gt then use the buttons or the dial to switch the mode to Auto This makes the setting for the Auto mode 3 Touch lt Chord Root gt and lt Chord Type gt then use the buttons or the dial to input the chord root and type for the segment to be extracted 6 Touch lt Division gt then use the buttons or the dial to select the Division CN Original Original accompaniment pattern Fill To From the fill in to the vari
307. tion 330 W 260 W 180 W 1502 1580 D x 1000 H BOY EOE AI O soo lan 59 3 16 W x 62 1 4 D x 7 11 1 15 16 D 15 16 H inch 39 3 8 H inches 5 16 W x 36 15 16 D x 35 15 16 H inches 1502 W x 1580 D x 1773 H mm Including the music stand 59 3 16 W x 62 1 4 D x 69 13 16 H inces Weights including th Slee ne rege 230 kg 507 lbs 130 kg 287 lbs 110 kg 243 Ibs piano stand Quick Start Owner s Manual Roland 60 Classical Piano Masterpieces AC cord Dimensions including the piano stand 1465 W x 938 D x 1431 H mm 57 11 16 W x 36 15 16 D x 56 3 8 inches Quick Start Owner s Manual Roland 60 Classical Piano Masterpieces Accessories CD Music Data Disc with vocals AC cord Maintenance Kit Key Cover Remote Control Dry cell Batteries Maintenance Kit Key Cover In the interest of product improvement the specifications and or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice 204 Numerics 16 Track Sequencet ips 127 A A zeae 20 Access IICA a 14 Accompaniment rra ra 66 DVO SEAT A nn eaeasesiuiaannaas 66 Advance 38 Arranger CONS aida las 159 ING OIE it Os 118 Audio Equipmentiotonia oi 176 Arto Tunch Out eraa ESA 133 Automatic Accompaniment eeseseeeseseerssrsersessersessereesserees 58 AU ACS A EN IA 14 177 B Balane oraina A E 79 Balance no Dusan cia 75 Pank Select SD a 175 Bank Select MSB rritet T 175 Basie SCRCCIN terei a a a a 24 Basie C
308. to qualified service personnel Servicing blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any third prong are provided for your safety When the provided way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus replacement of the obsolete outlet the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped For the U K WARNING THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE GREEN AND YELLOW EARTH BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured GREEN AND YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth symbol Qor coloured GREEN or GREEN AND YELLOW The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED USING THE UNIT SAFELY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PREVENTION OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS About WARNING and ZA CAUTION Notices A
309. tor will light brightly while data is being read or written Normally it will be lit dimly or will be dark When a floppy disk is initialized all of the data saved on the floppy disk is erased If you re formatting a used floppy disk for reuse be sure to check first to make sure the floppy disk doesn t contain any data you don t want to lose 112 amp xe SUE Select Listen to a Song Disk First make sure that the protect tab of the floppy disk is in the Write write enable position Rear side of the disk Write can write new data onto disk Write Protect Tab Protect prevents writing to disk 114 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance 1 e Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive 2 Press the Disk button 3 Touch lt File gt A Song File screen like the one below appears gt a Sono File Menu SSS 4 Touch lt Format Disk gt The following screen appears Fornat Disk 3 OK to format disk Touch lt Cancel gt to go back to the previous screen 5 e Touch lt OK gt Initialization of the floppy disk begins When initialization is completed you re returned to the previous screen Don t try to take the floppy disk out of the disk drive until the formatting process is finished If Error appears on screen take a look at Error Messages p 183 115 Chapter
310. u Disco de Select a Music Style p 62 4 Play the keyboard The accompaniment starts when you play a chord anywhere on the keyboard 74 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Part Balance You can adjust the volume balance between the accompaniment and the keyboard and the volume balance for each of the parts in a Music Style E Changing the Volume Balance between the Accompaniment and the Keyboard Balance Knob ir tnd You can change the volume balance between a song and accompaniment and the completely to the notes you play on the keyboard Accompaniment side no sounds from the keyboard are 1 e Adjust the volume balance with the Balance knob audible even when the keys are pressed You can usually leave the knob at the center position E Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Performance Part Part Balance You can adjust the volume of each performance part in a Music Style and the balance between parts when playing multiple Tones on the keyboard 1 e Press the Part Balance button and watch the indicator light up The following Part Balance screen appears Touch Part Balance 35 Screen for models featuring the Moving Key Switch the screens The volume balance between the performance parts in the Music Style is indicated 73 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Display Pe
311. umn Choosing R Pattern copies the KR s built in Rhythm Patterns For more information take a look at Copying Rhythm Patterns to Create Rhythm Parts p 137 If you choose a Track button you can only copy to the selected Track button You cannot copy to the other Track buttons Copy destination measure number When End is selected the data is copied to the end of the song Number of times the data is to be copied Dst Copy destination part number Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs CA a Data can be copied in the following three ways Replace If there is a performance recorded at the copy destination this previous recording is erased and the copied data is written in its place Mix If there is a performance recorded at the copy destination the copied data is layered over the previous recording If the Tones used for the copy source and copy destination are different the copy destination Tone is used Insert If there is a performance recorded at the copy destination the copied portion is inserted without erasing the previous recording The song is lengthened by the number of inserted measures E Copying Rhythm Patterns to Create Rhythm Parts The KR features numerous internal rhythm patterns You can copy these rhythm patterns to create a rhythm part gt For more information about the name of Rhythm Patterns please refer to Rhythm Pattern List p 199 At Step
312. upper right of the Basic screen changes to PU and the KR is set to record a song starting with a pickup 7108 E New Sona q Grand Piano1 s Start recording After a one measure count recording begins 113 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Using Floppy Disks You can use the KR s disk drive to save songs to floppy disks and listen to commercial music files E Inserting and Ejecting a Floppy Disk Inserting a floppy disk 1 e With the front of the floppy disk facing up insert the floppy disk in the disk drive slot until there is an audible click Indicator 4 S D Floppy Disk Eject Button Removing a floppy disk 2 Press the Eject button The end of the floppy disk comes out of the slot Grasp the edge of the floppy disk and gently pull it out E Formatting Floppy Disks Format A newly purchased floppy disk or a floppy disk that has been used by another device cannot be used as is Such floppy disks must be formatted initialized for use with the KR If a floppy disk is in a format that doesn t match the format of this unit you won t be able to use that floppy disk NERD If you re using the disk drive for the first time be sure to read the important notes on p 6 Never remove the floppy disk while it is being read or written Doing so will scratch the magnetic surface of the floppy disk making it unusable The disk drive indica
313. ure Raising the Music Stand KR 17 1 Open the front top 2 Hold the music stand with both hands then raise it forward 3 Place the music stand prop at the rear of the music stand into a slot KR 15 2 l Gently raise the music stand then secure it in place as shown in the figure 2 To collapse the stand fold in the metal fittings while supporting the stand with both hands and gently fold down the stand E Using the Music Holders KR 15 You can use the holders to hold pages in place When not using the holders leave them folded down N anja Q gt Y Q S Q NOA 210393 Before You Start Playing 22 oy gt A o O 2t a 2 N Opening and Closing the Lid Connecting the Power Cord 1 When opening the lid use both hands to gently lift the gt b Screw D lid and slide it inward S 2 When closing the lid be sure to use both hands to E Screw 8 grasp the lid slowly pulling it down towards you and Cord Cramp 3 gently lower it until it stops fully closed KR 17 AX CAUTION B A When opening and closing the lid be careful not to let your fingers LR Rf get caught Small children should use it only under the supervision S S i 22 of an adult A z CAUTION D m When moving the piano for safety s sake be sure to close the lid first Make sure you don t have anything such as sheet music on the keyboard when you close the
314. urs Valse 1998 Roland Corporation Little Brown Jug 1998 Roland Corporation Marchin In O 1992 Roland Corporation Silent Night Holy Night O 1998 Roland Corporation Stagecoach O 1994 Roland Corporation EZ Classical Air sul G O 1993 Roland Corporation Fantasie impromptu op 66 2001 Roland Corporation Grande valse brillante 1995 Roland Corporation Gymnopedie 1 1997 Roland Corporation Liebestraume 3 2001 Roland Corporation Mondschein 1994 Roland Corporation Nocturne 9 2 1996 Roland Corporation Petit chien 2001 Roland Corporation Prelude28 15 1996 Roland Corporation Traumerei 1996 Roland Corporation TurkishMarch O 1996 Roland Corporation Ungarische Tanze V O 1996 Roland Corporation N 0 O Q Q Q lt 196 Preludelight Bluesky Rag Secret Agent Late Night Chopin Fly Free Sun Daze Keepers Tale CountOnBlues OneDown amp Easy A PreludeTo BachsBoppin HungarianRag KismetsSalsa Matthew RollOverLudwig Frog Song Jazzy 2003 Roland Corporation 2000 Roland Corporation 1992 Roland Corporation 2002 Roland Corporation 1998 Roland Corporation 1992 Roland Corporation 1992 Roland Corporation 1992 Roland Corporation 1994 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1996 Roland Corporation 1998 Roland Corporation 1996 Rola
315. use the buttons and the dial to automatically switch pages and select tones 3 Touch lt Exit gt This returns you to the Basic screen or the previous screen 27 Chapter 1 Performance E Playing Percussion Instruments or Sound Effects You can use the keyboard to play percussion sounds or effects like sirens and animal sounds Collection DigiScore Oo Select Various Tones 1 e Press the Select Various Tones button and watch the indicator light up 2 Touch lt Drums gt or lt SFX gt a Touch the screen to play sounds Each note of the keyboard will play a different sound You can also have play sounds by touching the screen 3 Touch lt Exit gt several times This returns you to the Basic screen or the previous screen 28 NEP The combination of sounds assigned to the keyboard varies according to the drum set Take a look at the Drum Set List p 186 and SFX Set List p 190 Chapter 1 Performance E Using Keywords to Search for Tones Tone Search You can search for tones that match the conditions you set for instrument or musical style You can also search the tones using the first character of the tone name 1 e Press any Tone button The tone selection screen appears 2 Touch lt Search gt The following Tone search screen appears Condition Search screen Name Search screen gt Tone Search
316. wer part of the screen 4 Touch Display Explanation You can use a function assigned to the pedal The left pedal is dedicated to switching Left Pedal User Programs The function assigned to the left pedal cannot be used The center pedal is dedicated to switching User Programs The function assigned to the center pedal cannot be used Center Pedal Touch lt Exit gt to return to the User Program screen 126 Simultaneously Switching User Program and Transmitting PC Numbers You can have PC Program Change numbers be transmitted to an external MIDI device when you switch the User Program on the KR You can register PC number settings to each of the User Programs just as you can with button settings and other settings preferences Calling Up the Performance Settings to Be Set 1 Press the User Program button then touch the name of the performance setting you want to set Setting the Transmission of the PC 2 Touch lt PC Set gt in the User Program screen The following type of screen appears B E PC Settinos 3 t al Bank Select Bank Select Program L5B Change 3 Touch settings Display This prevents the PC number from being transmitted Off or sets the transmission channel Channel 1 16 Tx PC Channel Bank Sets the Bank Select MSB Select MSB Bank Select LSB Sets the Bank Select LSB Program Change Sets the Program Change messages Program Numb
317. xternal devices These connectors can be used to connect the KR to an external device for even greater versatility A separate publication titled MIDI Implementation is also available It provides complete details concerning the way MIDI has been implemented on this unit If you should require this publication such as when you intend to carry out byte level programming please contact the nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor E Connectors MIDI Out Connector Connect this to the MIDI In connector on an external MIDI device using a MIDI cable sold separately Performance data when you play the keyboard or depress a pedal is sent from this connector to the external MIDI connector MIDI In Connector Connect this to the MIDI Out connector on an external MIDI device using a MIDI cable sold separately This receives MIDI messages that are sent from external MIDI devices The KR receiving MIDI messages can output sounds exchange tones and perform other operations External MIDI devices can t be used for remotely changing the Tones played by the KR s keyboard Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices E Making the Connections To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections 1 Turn the volume all the way down on the KR and on the device you re about
318. y Swing Gospel Kids 1 e Press the One Touch Program Arranger button For more on the Music Style names refer to the Music 2 Press one of the Music Style buttons to select the Music Style group Style List p 192 p 193 Watch the indicator button light up Six of the Music Styles included in that group are displayed on the screen 60s Feelin J AnericanPop 4 JJ 7 Easy Listen This screen is called the Style Selection screen You can listen to the Music Style by touching lt Audition gt J to switch the screen and display the next selections You can touch lt Search gt to find Styles that match the selected criteria p 64 3 Touch a Music Style name to select the Music Style You can use the buttons and the dial to automatically switch pages and select MEMD Styles By changing the tempo and 4 Tone you can enjoy o Touch Preset lt A gt lt B gt lt C gt or lt D gt in the lower part of the screen l performing with a different When the Music Style is selected Preset A is selected ambience even in the same Music Style When any of the Presets from lt A gt through lt D gt are selected the Music Style tempo alae il right hand Tone Style Orchestrator settings p 70 and other settings change 62 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment 5 e Touch lt Exit gt The display returns to the Basic screen When you play a chord in the left hand part of
319. yet then perform Blank Recording for the necessary number of measures before placing the markers Touch the lt Repeat gt icon in the Marker screen p 100 This sets the loop recording mode Start a recording After you have finished with loop recording touch the lt Repeat gt icon in the Marker screen once more to return to the usual replace recording mode Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs E Re Recording Part of Your Performance Punch in Recording You can re record part of a passage as you listen to a recorded performance This recording method is called Punch in Recording This convenient function lets you record over a specified points in a part as you listen to a prerecorded performance in another section User Punch In Recording by the following two methods Recording the Region Defined by Markers A and B Auto Punch In Out Before you start recording place markers A and B to define the passage you want to re record Make the setting for punch in recording and re record just the passage between markers A and B Recording From the Point at Which the Pedal or Buttons Are Pressed Manual Punch In Out You can play back a performance and depress the pedal at the desired place to start re recording Depressing the pedal a second time cancels recording and returns you to playback When you use the Performance Pads or Rec button recording begins when you press the Pad or button u
320. ying back playback will continue if you touch Marker A or Marker B on the Marker screen E Erasing a Marker 1 e Touch lt Clear gt for the marker you want to erase A gt Q pe j 11 A E Moving a Marker You can move a marker that has been placed in a song You can also move the section of music defined by Markers A and B forward or back without changing the number of measures of marked for the marker to be moved When you touch KI the marker is moved to a previous part of the song When you touch La the marker is moved to a later part of the song 101 q da oO sia Q Le Q Chapter 4 Practice Functions Moving Markers A and B without changing the interval between them 1 e On the Marker screen touch LA in the middle of the screen For example if you have Marker A set at the beginning of the fifth measure and e Marker A is moved to the beginning of the first measure and Marker B is moved to the Marker B set at the beginning of the ninth measure when you touch beginning of the fifth measure Touch to shift Marker A to the beginning of the ninth measure and Marker B to the beginning of the thirteenth measure Measure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 _ em A Marker A Measure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 E OS x A A Marker A Marker B E Playing Back the Same Passage Over and Over You can play back a p

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

Instalação, Operação e Manutenção de Tampões Articulados do  télécharger le PDF  Setup and User`s Manual  _ [ 1  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file